Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 1.
What is Phosphorylation?
Answer:
It is the formation of ATP, by the addition of inorganic phosphate to ADP.
ADP + Pi → ATP
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 2.
What are the different ways of Phosphorylation?
Answer:
Phosphorylation occurs in three different ways – photophosphorylation, substrate-level phosphorylation, and oxidative phosphorylation.

Question 3.
What is Substrate-level phosphorylation? Where does it occur?
Answer:
Substrate-level phosphorylation is a direct phosphorylation of ADP by transfer of a phosphate group from any suitable substrate. It occurs in cytoplasm of the cells and matrix of mitochondria.

Question 4.
What is oxidative phosphorylation? Mention the site of this reaction.
Answer:
In oxidative phosphorylation ATP is synthesize by using the energy released during the oxidation of substrates like NADH + H+ and FADH2. This occurs on the inner mitochondrial membrane only.

Question 5.
When is ATP hydrolysed?
Answer:
ATP is hydrolysed whenever energy is required for any metabolic reactions.

Question 6.
What is respiration?
Answer:
Respiration is a catabolic process wherein complex organic substrate is oxidized to simple components to generate biological energy, i.e. ATP.

Question 7.
Give an example for anabolic and catabolic process.
Answer:
Anabolic process- Photosynthesis (Biosynthetic process).
Caiabolic process- Respiration (Breakdown process).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 8.
Name the following.

  1. The substrate that undergoes oxidation during oxidative phosphorylation
  2. The phosphorylation that occurs only in inner mitochondria! membrane
  3. Two ways of cellular respiration

Answer:

  1. NADH+H+ and FADH2
  2. Oxidative phosphorylation
  3. Anaerobic and aerobic respiration

Question 9.
What is anaerobic respiration?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.

Question 10.
What is glycolysis? Describe various steps involved in glycolysis.
OR
Describe the process involved in formation of pyruvic acid from glucose molecule.
OR
What is glycolysis? Describe the process of glycolysis with the help of schematic representation.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 2

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 11.
Write down the overall chemical reaction of a process in which glucose in broken down to two molecules of pyruvic acid.
Answer:
Overall reaction of glycolysis:
Glucose + 2 ATP + 2iP + 4 ADP + 2 NAD+ → 2 Pyruvate + 2 ADP + 4 ATP + 2 NADH + 2 Ha+ + 2 H2O

Question 12.
Write explanatorv notes on: Glycolysis
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Question 13.
How glycolysis is regulated?
Answer:
Glycolysis is strongly regulated by the complex interplay between ATP consumption, NADH2 regeneration and regulation of various glycolytic enzymes like hexokinase, PFK-1, pyruvate kinase, etc. Besides, it is also controlled by hormones like glucagon, epinephrine and insulin.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 14.
Where does glycolysis take place in a cell?
Answer:
Glycolysis takes place in the cytoplasm of a cell.

Question 15.
What are the products of cleavage in glycolysis?
Answer:
Dihydroxyacetone phosphate (DHAP) and 3-phosphoglyceraldehyde (3-PGAL) are the products of cleavage in glycolysis.

Question 16.
Where does dehydration occur in glycolysis?
Answer:
In glycolysis, dehydration occurs when 2-Phosphoglyceric acid loses a water molecule (dehydration) to form phosphoenol pyruvic acid in presence of the enzyme enolase.

Question 17.
Name the process which is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration.
Answer:
Glycolysis is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration.

Question 18.
Name the enzymes that catalyse the irreversible reactions.
Answer:
Hexokinase, Phosphoffuctokinase, Phosphoglycerate kinase and Pyruvate kinase are the enzymes that catalyse the irreversible reactions.

Question 19.
Where glycolysis is the only source of energy production?
Answer:
Glycolysis is only source of energy production in erythrocytes, renal medulla, brain and sperm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 20.
Which type of muscle fibres are rich in myoglobin?
Answer:
Red muscles are rich in myoglobin.

Question 21.
Which type of muscle fibre mainly performs anaerobic respiration?
Answer:
White muscle fibres mainly performs anaerobic respiration.

Question 22.
What is lactic acid fermentation?
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process. It is represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 3

Question 23.
What is the fate of pyruvate in yeast?
Answer:
Yeast shows both aerobic and anaerobic respiration depending upon the presence or absence of oxygen.
1. In absence of oxygen, the pyruvate undergoes anaerobic respiration where it is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H to ethanol and carbon dioxide. This type of anaerobic respiration is termed alcoholic fermentation.
2. In the presence of oxygen however, it can respire aerobically to produce C02 and H20.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 24.
What is alcoholic fermentation?
Answer:
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation. It is represented as follows:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 4

Question 25.
Name the process of respiration which does not involve intake of oxygen (02) and release of carbon dioxide (C02).
Answer:
Lactic acid fermentation is the process of anaerobic respiration which does not involve intake of oxygen (02) and release of carbon dioxide (C02).

Question 26.
Why yeast stops multiplying in the culture after alcoholic fermentation?
Answer:
After alcoholic fermentation the multiplication of yeast stops because the alcohol formed during the process kills the yeast cells.

Question 27.
What is aerobic respiration?
Answer:

  1. Aerobic respiration occurs in the presence of free molecular oxygen during oxidation of glucose.
  2. In this type of respiration, the glucose is completely oxidized to C02 and H20 with release of large amount of energy.
  3. It involves glycolysis, acetyl CoA formation (connecting link reaction), Krebs cycle, electron transfer chain reaction and terminal oxidation.

Question 28.
Where does aerobic respiration occur in eukaryotic cell?
Answer:
Aerobic respiration occurs in the mitochondria in eukaryotes.

Question 29.
Explain the conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA.
OR
Describe the connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 5

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 30.
Name the following.
1. Which enzymes converts pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA?
2. Name the coenzyme required by pyruvate dehydrogenase.
Answer:
1. Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Thiamin (vitamin Bi)

Question 31.
Why is acetyl Co-A called connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle?
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 32.
Why vitamin Bi is important for maintaining good health?
Answer:
1. Pyruvate dehydrogenase (PDH) requires thiamin (vitamin Bi) as a co-enzyme. It cannot function in absence of vitamin B1.
2. Thiamin deficiency causes many disorders such as pyruvic acidosis and lactic acidosis, which are life threatening conditions. Hence, it is required to maintain good health.

Question 33.
Describe Citric acid cycle.
OR
With the help of schematic representation explain Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria.
  2. The acetyl CoA formed during the link reaction undergoes aerobic oxidation.
  3. This cycle serves a common oxidative pathway for carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
  4. In mitochondria pyruvic acid is decarboxylated and the remaining 2-carbon fragment is combined with a molecule of coenzyme A to form acetyl-CoA.
  5. This reaction is an oxidative decarboxylation process and produces H+ ions and electrons along with carbon dioxide.
  6. During the process NAD+ is reduced to NADH+H+.
  7. P-oxidation of fatty acids also produces acetyl-CoA as the end product.
  8. Acetyl-CoA from both sources is condensed with oxaloacetic acid to form citric acid. Citric acid is oxidized step-wise by mitochondrial enzymes, releasing carbon dioxide.
  9. Regeneration of oxaloacetic acid occurs to complete the cycle.
  10. There are four steps of oxidation in this cycle, catalyzed by dehydrogenases (oxidoreductases) using NAD+ or FAD+ as the coenzyme.
  11. The coenzymes are consequently reduced to NADH+H+ and FADH2 respectively. These transfer their electrons to the mitochondrial respiratory chain to get reoxidised.
  12. One molecule of GTP (ATP) is also generated for every molecule of citric acid oxidized.

Question 34.
What is the site of Krebs cycle in mitochondria?
Answer:
Krebs cycle takes place in the mitochondrial matrix.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 35.
Match the following:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Glycolysis (b) Succinyl CoA → Succinate (q) NADH dehydrogenase
3. ETS (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (r) Two ATP are produced
4. Link reaction (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex to Ubiquinone (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase

Answer:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (b) Succinyl CoA → Succinate (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase
2. Glycolysis (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (r) Two ATP are produced
3. ETS (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (q) NADH dehydrogenase
4. Link reaction (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase

Question 36.
Explain ETS.
OR
Illustrate the mechanism of electron transport system.
OR
Give an account of ATP generation steps during ETS.
OR
Explain the mechanism of electron transportation system (ETS).
OR
Explain terminal oxidation.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. The open end of the glass tube (delivery tube) is dipped into lime water containing in a test tube (Tube B).
  6. Stoppers of both the tubes are fitted tightly to prevent leakage of gases. First test tube is placed in warm water (37° C-38° C) in a beaker.
  7. Lime water gradually turns milky, indicating the evolution of carbon dioxide from the yeast preparation.
  8. Level of the lime water in the delivery tube does not rise, showing that there is no decline in volume of gas in test tube A and consequently no utilization of oxygen by yeast. Preparation is stored for a day or two.
  9. When we open the stopper of tube A we will notice a smell of alcohol indicating the formation of ethanol.
  10. From this activity it may be inferred that yeast respires anaerobically to ferment glucose to ethanol and carbon dioxide.

Question 37.
Explain the significance of electron transport system.
Answer:
Significance of ETS:

  1. Major amount of energy is generated through ETS or terminal oxidation in the form of ATP molecules.
  2. Per glucose molecule 38 ATP molecules are formed, out of which 34 ATP molecules are produced through ETS.
  3. Oxidized coenzymes such as NAD and FAD are regenerated from their reduced forms (NADH+H+ and FADH2) for recycling.
  4. In this process, energy is released in a controlled and stepwise manner to prevent any damage to the cell.
  5. ETS produces water molecules.

Question 38.
What is oxidative phosphorylation?
Answer:
Oxidative phosphorylation: It is a metabolic pathway that uses energy released by the oxidation of substrates to produce ATP.

  1. Oxidative phosphorylation takes place in the mitochondrial membrane.
  2. Many intermediate products during respiration are oxidised and release 2H+.
  3. The released hydrogen is trapped by NAD+ or FAD+.
  4. Electrons pass through electron transport system to produce ATP and metabolic water.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 39.
Give the balance sheet of ATP formed in aerobic respiration.
Answer:

Step of Respiration Consumption Production Total Net
benefit
Substrate level phosphorylation 1 Oxidative Phosphorylation
NADH+ H+ FADH2 Total
Glycolysis 2 4 2 × 3 = 6 ___________ 6 10 8
Pyruvate → AcetylCoA _______________ ___________ 2 × 3 = 6 ___________ 6 6 6
Krebs cycle _______________ 1 × 2 = 2 6 × 3 = 18 2×2 = 4 22 24 24
Total 2             [6]             30 + 4 = [34]             m             38

Question 40.
With the help of an experiment explain how yeast respires anaerobically.
Answer:
Respiration in yeast can be demonstrated with the help of an experiment.
Anaerobic respiration in yeast:

  1. A pinch of dry baker’s yeast suspended in water containing 10ml of 10% glucose in a test tube (test tube A).
  2. The surface of the liquid is covered with oil to prevent entry of air and the test tube is closed tightly with rubber stopper to prevent leakage.
  3. One end of a short-bent glass tube is inserted through it to reach the air inside the tube.
  4. Other end of the glass tube is connected by a polyethylene or rubber tubing to another bent glass tube fitted into a stopper.
  5. The open end of the glass tube (delivery tube) is dipped into lime water containing in a test tube
    (Tube B).
  6. Stoppers of both the tubes are fitted tightly to prevent leakage of gases. First test tube is placed in warm water (37° C-38° C) in a beaker.
  7. Lime water gradually turns milky, indicating the evolution of carbon dioxide from the yeast preparation.
  8. Level of the lime water in the delivery tube does not rise, showing that there is no decline in volume of gas in test tube A and consequently no utilization of oxygen by yeast. Preparation is stored for a day or two.
  9. When we open the stopper of tube A we will notice a smell of alcohol indicating the formation of ethanol.
  10. From this activity it may be inferred that yeast respires anaerobically to ferment glucose to ethanol and carbon dioxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 6

Question 41.
With the help of an experiment explain how germinating seeds respire.
Answer:

  1. Seed coats of a few germinating seeds (peas, beans or gram) are removed and are then put in a test tube filled with mercury.
  2. After closing the test tube with the thumb, it is vertically inverted in a trough of mercury and the thumb is carefully removed.
  3. Being lighter than mercury, the seeds rise to the closed upper end of the test Uibe. No gas is seen at first in the test tube.
  4. As germination proceeds, a gas begins to collect at the top of the mercury in the test tube.
  5. On introducing a pellet of potassium hydroxide into the tube, it rises to the top and absorbs the gas. The mercury again fills the tube.
  6. The potassium hydroxide reacts with carbon dioxide gas to produce potassium carbonate and water.
  7. The gas therefore disappears. Evidently germinating seeds produce carbon dioxide by anaerobic respiration in the absence of oxygen in the mercury column.

[Note: Mercury is toxic chemical. Proper precautions must be taken while performing this experiment ]
[Note: Students can scan the adjacent QR code to get conceptual clarity with the aid of a relevant example.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 42.
Give the significance of respiration.
OR
Write a short note on significance of respiration.
Answer:

  1. Respiration provides energy for biosynthesis of biomolecules.
  2. It is also a source of energy for cell division, growth, repairs and replacement of worn out parts, movements,
    locomotion etc.
  3. Various intermediates of Krebs cycle are used as building blocks for synthesis of other complex compounds.
  4. Coupled with photosynthesis, it helps to maintain the balance between C02 and O2 in the atmosphere.
  5. Anaerobic respiration (fermentation) is used in various industries such as dairies, bakeries, distilleries, leather industries, paper industries etc. It is used in the commercial production of alcohol, organic acids, vitamins, antibiotics etc.

Question 43.
Match the following:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase
2. Glycolysis (b) Succinyl CoA Succinate (q) NADH dehydrogenase
3. ETS (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (r) Two ATP are produced
4. Link reaction (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase

Answer:

Column I Column II Column III
1. Krebs cycle (b) Succinyl CoA Succinate (s) Succinyl CoA – synthetase
2. Glycolysis (a) 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate → 3-Phosphoglycerate (r) Two ATP are produced
3. ETS (d) Transfer of electrons from Complex I to Ubiquinone (q) NADH dehydrogenase
4. Link reaction (c) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl CoA (p) Pyruvate dehydrogenase

Question 44.
Apply Your Knowledge

Question 1.
While teaching respiration professor said that oxygen is important for respiration in humans, Rakesh kept thinking, where exactly oxygen is required during cellular respiration? What would be the correct explanation for his doubt?
Answer:
Oxygen is very important for life, we humans cannot survive without oxygen. Glycolysis, link reaction and Krebs cycle do not involve oxygen. In cellular reaction, oxygen is required only during ETS where it acts as an electron acceptor hence leading to terminal oxidation where it gets converted into water called metabolic water.

The process of respiration is very fast and occurs continuously as cell require continuous supply of energy to carry out metabolic activities, thus, we require oxygen for cellular respiration even when we are sleeping.

Question 2.
Sonal while studying ETS had a doubt, why FADH2 yields only 2 ATP’s whereas NADH2 yields three ATP’s? What would be the correct explanation for her doubt?
Answer:

  1. During ETS, NADH2 and FADH2 undergoes oxidation where they are converted to NAD+ and FAD+ respectively.
  2. During this conversion, hydrogen is removed, which latter forms proton and electron. This electron so formed is passed on to different electron carriers. During this transfer of electron, energy is released which is used in ATP synthesis.
  3. In case of NADH2, energy is released at three places hence results into formation of 3 ATPs whereas, in case of FADH2 energy is released at only two places, hence results into formation of only 2 ATPs.
  4. Here, the ATP formation occurs by Chemiosmotic hypothesis.

Question 45.
Quick Review

Various steps involved in glycolysis:

Step(s) Substrate Enzyme End product(s)
Phosphorylation Glucose + ATP Hexokinase Glucose – 6 – Phosphate + ADP
Isomerisation Glucose – 6-Phosphate Phosphohexose isomerase Fructose – 6 – Phosphate
Phosphorylation Fructose – 6-Phosphate + ATP (Phosphate donor) Phosphofructokinase Fructose 1,6-Diphosphate + ADP
Cleavage Fructose -1, 6-Diphosphate Aldolase 3 – Phosphoglyceraldehyde + Dihydroxyacetone phosphate
Phosphorylation and Dehydrogenation 3-PGAL + H3PO4 + NAD+ Triosephosphate

dehydrogenase

1, 3 Diphosphoglyceric acid + NADH + H+
Dephosphorylation 1, 3-DPGA + ADP Diphosphoglycerate kinase (Mg2) ATP + 3-Phosphoglyceric acid
Rearrangement 3-PGA Phosphoglycerate mutase 2-Phosphoglyceric acid
Dehydration 2-PGA Enolase Phosphoenol Pyruvic acid + H20
Dephosphorylation Phosphoenol Pyruvic acid +ADP Pyruvate kinase Pyruvic acid + ATP

Various steps involved in Krebs cycle:

Step(s) Substrate Enzyme End product(s)
Condensation Acetyl-CoA+Oxalo- acetic acid + H20 Citrate synthase Citric acid (6C) + Coenzyme- A
Dehydration
Hydration
It is again completed in two steps:
Citric acid
Cis-Aconitic acid + H20
Aconitase
Aconitase
Cis-Aconitic acid + H20 Iso-citric acid(6C)
Oxidative decarboxylation a. Isocitric acid + NAD+ Isocitrate dehydrogenase Oxalo succinic acid(6C) + NADH + H+
b. Oxalosuccinic acid Isocitrate dehydrogenase a – ketoglutaric acid(5C) + CO
Oxidative Decarboxylation. (-2H) (-C02) a-Ketoglutaric acid + H20 + NAD + Coenzyme A a-Ketoglutarate dehydrogenase complex Succinyl-CoA(4C) + NADH + H++co2
Substrate level phosphorylation Succinyl – Co A + GDP + iP Succinyl CoA synthetase Succinic acid (4C) + Coenzyme-A + GTP
Dehydrogenation (-2H) Succinic acid + FAD (H-acceptor) Succinate dehydrogenase Fumaric acid (4C) + FADH2
Hydration(+H20) Fumaric acid + H20 Hydration(+H20) Fumaric acid + H20
Dehydrogenation (-2H) Malic acid + NAD+ (H-acceptor) Dehydrogenation (-2H) Malic acid + NAD+ (H-acceptor)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer 7

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 46.
Exercise

Question 1.
Define phosphorylation.
Answer:
It is the formation of ATP, by addition inorganic phosphate to ADP.
ADP + Pi → ATP

Question 2.
Mention the different ways of phosphorylation.
Answer:
Phosphorylation occurs in three different ways as – photophosphorylation, substrate-level phosphorylation and oxidative phosphorylation.

Question 3.
Define substrate-level phosphorylation.
Answer:
Substrate-level phosphorylation is a direct phosphorylation of ADP by transfer of a phosphate group from any suitable substrate. It occurs in cytoplasm of the cells and matrix of mitochondria.

Question 4.
What is fermentation?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.

Question 5.
Where does glycolysis occurs?
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
What is glycolysis? Explain with the help of schematic representation.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Question 7.
Define fermentation. What are the different types of fermentation?
Answer:
1. Anaerobic respiration is the cellular respiration that does not involve the atmospheric oxygen. It is also called as fermentation.
2. It involves glycolysis where the product of glycolysis i.e. pyruvate is converted to either lactic acid or ethanol.
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation.

Question 8.
Name the products of lactic acid fermentation.
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.

Question 9.
Write the chemical reaction of lactic acid fermentation.
Answer:
It is a process of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvic acid undergoes reduction by addition of one proton and two electrons donated by NADH+H+ to form lactic acid as the product and NAD+ as the byproduct of oxidation. Skeletal muscles usually derive energy by this process.

Question 10.
Explain alcoholic fermentation.
Answer:
Alcoholic fermentation is a type of anaerobic respiration where the pyruvate is decarboxylated to acetaldehyde. The acetaldehyde is then reduced by NADH+H+ to ethanol and Carbon dioxide. Since ethanol is produced during the process, it is termed alcoholic fermentation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 11.
Less energy is produced during anaerobic respiration that in aerobic respiration. Justify.
Answer:
Anaerobic respiration produces less energy because:

  1. Incomplete breakdown of respiratory substrate takes place.
  2. Some of the products of anaerobic respiration can be oxidised further to release energy which shows that anaerobic respiration does not liberate the whole energy contained in the respiratory substrate.
  3. NADH2 does not produce ATP, as electron transport is absent.
  4. Only 2 ATP molecules are generated from one molecule of glucose during anaerobic respiration.

Question 12.
Enlist steps involved in aerobic respiration.
Answer:
It involves glycolysis, acetyl CoA formation (connecting link reaction), Krebs cycle, electron transfer chain reaction and terminal oxidation.

Question 13.
Write the reaction of connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:
This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 14.
How glycolysis is regulated?
Answer:
Glycolysis is strongly regulated by the complex interplay between ATP consumption, NADH2 regeneration and regulation of various glycolytic enzymes like hexokinase, PFK-1, pyruvate kinase, etc. Besides, it is also controlled by hormones like glucagon, epinephrine and insulin.

Question 15.
Write the significance of ETS.
Answer:
Significance of ETS:

  1. Major amount of energy is generated through ETS or terminal oxidation in the form of ATP molecules.
  2. Per glucose molecule 38 ATP molecules are formed, out of which 34 ATP molecules are produced through ETS.
  3. Oxidized coenzymes such as NAD and FAD are regenerated from their reduced forms (NADH+H+ and FADH2) for recycling.
  4. In this process, energy is released in a controlled and stepwise manner to prevent any damage to the cell.
  5. ETS produces water molecules.

Question 16.
Give the schematic representation of glycolysis.
Answer:
Glycolysis is a process where glucose is broken down into two molecules of pyruvic acid, hence called glycolysis (glucose-breaking). It is common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration. It occurs in the cytoplasm of the cell. It involves ten steps.
Glycolysis consists of two major phases:
1. Preparatory phase (1-5 steps).
2. Payoff phase (6-10 steps).
1. Preparatory phase:
a. In this phase, glucose is phosphorylated twice by using two ATP molecules and a molecule of fructose 1,6-bisphosphate is formed.
b. It is then cleaved into two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate and dihydroxy acetone phosphate. These two molecules are 3-carbon carbohydrates (trioses) and are isomers of each other.
c. Dihydroxy acetone phosphate is isomerised to second molecule of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate.
d. Therefore, two molecules of glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate are formed.
e. Preparatory phase of glycolysis ends.

2. Payoff phase:
a. In this phase, both molecules of glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate are converted to two molecules of 1,3- bisphoglycerate by oxidation and phosphorylation. Here, the phosphorylation is brought about by inorganic phosphate instead of ATP.
b. Both molecules of 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate are converted into two molecules of pyruvic acid through series of reactions accompanied with release of energy. This released energy is used to produce ATP (4 molecules) by substrate-level phosphorylation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 17.
Describe the formation of Acetyl Co-A in respiration.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 18.
Give the schematic representation of the overall view of Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria.
  2. The acetyl CoA formed during the link reaction undergoes aerobic oxidation.
  3. This cycle serves a common oxidative pathway for carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
  4. In mitochondria pyruvic acid is decarboxylated and the remaining 2-carbon fragment is combined with a molecule of coenzyme A to form acetyl-CoA.
  5. This reaction is an oxidative decarboxylation process and produces H+ ions and electrons along with carbon dioxide. During the process NAD+ is reduced to NADH+H+.
  6. P-oxidation of fatty acids also produces acetyl-CoA as the end product.
  7. Acetyl-CoA from both sources is condensed with oxaloacetic acid to form citric acid. Citric acid is oxidized step-wise by mitochondrial enzymes, releasing carbon dioxide.
  8. Regeneration of oxaloacetic acid occurs to complete the cycle.
  9. There are four steps of oxidation in this cycle, catalyzed by dehydrogenases (oxidoreductases) using NAD+ or FAD+ as the coenzyme.
  10. The coenzymes are consequently reduced to NADH+H+ and FADH2 respectively. These transfer their electrons to the mitochondrial respiratory chain to get reoxidised.
  11. One molecule of GTP (ATP) is also generated for every molecule of citric acid oxidized.

Question 19.
Explain why the respiratory pathway is an amphibolic pathway?
Answer:

  1. Respiration is considered as a catabolic process; however, it is not entirely correct in case of Krebs cycle.
  2. Many reactions of Krebs cycle involve oxidation of acetyl CoA to release energy and C02.
  3. However, the breakdown of respiratory substrates provides intermediates like a-ketoglutarate, oxaloacetate are used as precursors for synthesis of fatty acids, glutamic acid and aspartic acid respectively.
  4. Thus, as the same respiratory process acts as catabolic as well as anabolic pathway for synthesis of various intermediate metabolic products, it is called amphibolic pathway.

Question 20.
Write a detailed note on the connecting link between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.
Answer:

  1. The conversion of pyruvic acid to acetyl CoA is an oxidative decarboxylation reaction.
  2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.
  3. This reaction is called as ‘connecting link’ reaction between glycolysis and Krebs cycle.

Question 21.
Give the diagrammatic representation of ETS.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 22.
Explain the process of terminal oxidation. Give its significance (any two points).
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Question 23.
1. Enlist the main steps involved in aerobic respiration and their place of occurrence.
2. Differentiate between photosynthesis and aerobic respiration.
Answer:
1. Glycolysis takes place in the cytoplasm of a cell.
2. It is catalyzed by a multienzyme complex-pyruvate dehydrogenase complex (PDH). This enzyme is present in mitochondria of eukaryotes and cytosol of prokaryotes.,
3. Krebs cycle or citric acid cycle is the second phase of aerobic respiration which takes place in the matrix of the mitochondria. and These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.

Question 24.
1. Give the schematic representation of ETS.
2. Differentiate between respiration and combustion.
Answer:

  1. NADH2 and FADH2 produced during glycolysis, connecting link reaction and Krebs cycle are oxidized with the help of various electron carriers and enzymes.
  2. These carriers and enzymes are arranged on inner mitochondrial membrane in the form of various complexes as complex I, II, III, VI and V.
  3. NADH+H+ is oxidised by NADH dehydrogenase (complex I) and it’s electrons are transferred to ubiquinone (coenzyme Q-CoQ) present on inner membrane of mitochondria. Reduced ubiquinone is called as ubiqunol.
  4. FADH2 is oxidised by complex II (Succinate dehydrogenase) and these electrons are also transferred to CoQ.
  5. During oxidation of NADH+H+ and FADH2, electrons and protons are released but only electrons are canned forward whereas protons are released into outer chamber of mitochondria (intermembrane space).
  6. Ubiquinol is oxidised by complex-III (Cytochrome bcl complex) and it’s electrons are transferred to cytochrome C.
  7. Cytochrome C is a small, iron-containing protein, loosely associated with inner membrane. It acts as a mobile electron carrier, transferring the electrons between complex III and IV.
  8. Cytochrome C is oxidised by complex IV or cytochrome C oxidase consisting of cytochrome a and a3. Electrons are transferred by this complex to the molecular oxygen. This is terminal oxidation.
  9. Reduced molecular oxygen reacts with protons to form water molecule called as metabolic water.
  10. Protons necessary for this are channelled from outer chamber of mitochondria into inner chamber by F0 part of oxysome (complex V) present in inner mitochondrial membrane.
  11. This proton channelling by F0 is coupled to catalytic site of F1 which catalyses the synthesis of ATP from ADP and inorganic phosphate. This is oxidative phosphorylation.
  12. As transfer of protons is accompanied with synthesis of ATP, this process is named as ‘Chemiosmosis’ by Peter Mitchell.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 25.
Enlist the different respiratory substrate.
Answer:
Respiratory substrates are the molecules that are oxidized during respiration to release energy which can be used for ATP synthesis. Carbohydrates, fats and proteins are the common respiratory substrate. Glucose is the most common respiratory substrate.

Question 26.
Define R.Q. What is its value for fats?
Answer:
1. Respiratory quotient (R.Q.) or respiratory ratio is the ratio of volume of CO2 released to the volume of O2 consumed in respiration.
2. R.Q. = Volume of CO2 released/Volume of O2 consumed

Question 27.
Write the significance of respiration.
Answer:

  1. Respiration provides energy for biosynthesis of biomolecules.
  2. It is also a source of energy for cell division, growth, repairs and replacement of worn out parts, movements,
    locomotion etc.
  3. Various intermediates of Krebs cycle are used as building blocks for synthesis of other complex compounds.
  4. Coupled with photosynthesis, it helps to maintain the balance between C02 and O2 in the atmosphere.
  5. Anaerobic respiration (fermentation) is used in various industries such as dairies, bakeries, distilleries, leather industries, paper industries etc. It is used in the commercial production of alcohol, organic acids, vitamins, antibiotics etc.

Question 47.
Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
Respiration is regarded as a ________ process.
(A) catabolic
(B) anabolic
(C) reduction
(D) synthetic
Answer:
(A) catabolic

Question 2.
Anaerobic respiration is also called as ________ .
(A) Glycolysis
(B) fermentation
(C) phosphoryaltion
(D) decarboxylation
Answer:
(B) fermentation

Question 3.
The first compound formed in glycolysis is
(A) Glucose-6-phosphate
(B) Glucose-1,6-biphosphate
(C) Fructose-6-phosphate
(D) Pyruvic acid
Answer:
(A) Glucose-6-phosphate

Question 4.
Which of the following compounds in last step of glycolysis gives pyruvic acid?
(A) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde
(B) dihydroxy acetone phosphate
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate
(D) 2-phosphoglycerate
Answer:
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate

Question 5.
In glycolysis, dehydration occurs during formation of
(A) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde
(B) 2 – phosphoglycerate
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate
(D) dihydroxyacetone phosphate
Answer:
(B) 2 – phosphoglycerate

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
In which of the following steps dehydrogenation occurs?
(A) Glucose → Glucose 6-phosphate
(B) 3-phophoglcerate → 2-phophoglccratc
(C) phosphoenolpyruvate → pyruvate
(D) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde → 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate
Answer:
(D) 3 – phosphoglyceraldehyde → 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate

Question 7.
The compound common to both aerobic and anaerobic respiration is
(A) C02
(B) pyruvic acid
(C) acetyl CoA
(D) free oxygen
Answer:
(B) pyruvic acid

Question 8.
Which compound is found both in respiration and photosynthesis?
(A) Phosphoglycerate
(B) Phosphoglyceraldehyde
(C) Both (A) and (B)
(D) Succinic acid
Answer:
(C) Both (A) and (B)

Question 9.
Which type of respiration does not release C02?
(A) Aerobic respiration
(B) Alcoholic fermentation
(C) Lactic acid fermentation
(D) Krebs cycle
Answer:
(C) Lactic acid fermentation

Question 10.
What is the overall goal of glycolysis, Krebs cycle and electron transport system?
(A) Synthesis of ATP in fermentation reaction
(B) Carbohydrates
(C) Nucleic acids
(D) ATP in small stepwise units
Answer:
(D) ATP in small stepwise units

Question 11.
The intermediate between glycolysis and TCA cycle is:
(A) Lactic acid
(B) Acetaldehyde
(C) Fructose-6-phosphate
(D) Acetyl Co-A
Answer:
(D) Acetyl Co-A

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 12.
During alcoholic fermentation, decarboxylation of pyruvate gives
(A) acetaldehyde
(B) lactic acid
(C) ethyl alcohol
(D) methyl alcohol
Answer:
(A) acetaldehyde

Question 13.
Where the link reaction occurs in prokaryotes?
(A) cytoplasm
(B) mitochondrial matrix
(C) cell membrane
(D) mitochondrial membrane
Answer:
(A) cytoplasm

Question 14.
In Krebs cycle, dehydration of substrate occurs
(A) once
(B) twice
(C) thrice
(D) four times
Answer:
(A) once

Question 15.
Which of the following steps generate ATP without ETS?
(A) Pyruvic acid → Acetyl Co-A
(B) ∝-ketoglutarate → Succinic acid
(C) Iso-citric acid → Oxalosuccinic acid
(D) Succinyl Co-A → Succinic acid
Answer:
(D) Succinyl Co-A → Succinic acid

Question 16.
In Krebs cycle, the acid which undergoes oxidative decarboxylation is
(A) citric acid
(B) succinic acid
(C) malic acid
(D) ∝-ketoglutaric acid
Answer:
(D) ∝-ketoglutaric acid

Question 17.
During Krebs cycle, fumaric acid gets converted into malic acid by
(A) decarboxylation
(B) dehydrogenation
(C) dehydration
(D) hydration
Answer:
(D) hydration

Question 18.
Krebs cycle is also called TCA cycle because
(A) the first compound formed is citric acid.
(B) it was discovered by Sir Hans Krebs.
(C) organic acids formed have 3 carboxylic acid groups.
(D) acetyl Co-A is formed
Answer:
(C) organic acids formed have 3 carboxylic acid groups.

Question 19.
Which of the following compound is the acceptor of Acetyl Co-A in Krebs cycle?
(A) Oxaloacetic acid
(B) Fumaric acid
(C) Malic acid
(D) Oxalo succinic acid
Answer:
(A) Oxaloacetic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 20.
Which of the following compounds is formed in Krebs cycle from fumaric acid?
(A) Oxalo acetic acid
(B) Malic acid
(C) ∝-KGA
(D) Citric acid
Answer:
(B) Malic acid

Question 21.
Which of the following step of aerobic respiration would be omitted when fatty acids are used as respiratory substrate?
(A) Glycolysis
(B) Krebs cycle
(C) Electron transfer chain reaction
(D) Terminal oxidation.
Answer:
(A) Glycolysis

Question 22.
During Krebs cycle, decarboxylation occurs _______ time/s.
(A) 1
(B) 2
(C) 3
(D) 4
Answer:
(B) 2

Question 23.
The conversion of malic acid to oxalo acetic acid is catalyzed by
(A) malate reductase
(B) malate thiokinase
(C) fumarase
(D) malate dehydrogenase
Answer:
(D) malate dehydrogenase

Question 24.
Electron carriers of oxidative phosphorylation are present on
(A) outer membrane of mitochondria.
(B) inner membrane of mitochondria.
(C) thylakoid membrane of chloroplast.
(D) matrix of mitochondria.
Answer:
(B) inner membrane of mitochondria.

Question 25.
Which of the following derives maximum energy per molecule of glucose?
(A) Alcoholic fermentation.
(B) Lactic acid fermentation.
(C) Aerobic respiration in unicellular organisms.
(D) Glycolysis in liver cells.
Answer:
(C) Aerobic respiration in unicellular organisms.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 26.
The cytochrome which donates de-energised electron to oxygen is
(A) cytochrome-a
(B) cytochrome-b
(C) cytochrome-a3
(D) cytochrome-c
Answer:
(C) cytochrome-a3

Question 27.
In terminal oxidation FADH2 is oxidized by
(A) complex I
(B) complex II
(C) complex III
(D) complex IV
Answer:
(B) complex II

Question 28.
The net gain of energy from a molecule of glucose in the aerobic respiration is
(A) 38
(B) 35
(C) 70
(D) 76
Answer:
(A) 38

Question 29.
Each molecule of NADH2 through ETS yields
(A) 1 ATP
(B) 2 ATPs
(C) 3 ATPs
(D) 4 ATPs
Answer:
(C) 3 ATPs

Question 30.
One glucose molecule, through ETS yields
(A) 2 ATP molecules
(B) 3 ATP molecules
(C) 34 ATP molecules
(D) 38 ATP molecules
Answer:
(C) 34 ATP molecules

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 31.
The adenosine triphosphate (ATP) gain during glycolysis, connecting link and Krebs cycle respectively are _______ .
(A) 8, 6,24
(B) 8,24, 6
(C) 24, 8, 6
(D) 6, 8, 24
Answer:
(A) 8, 6,24

Question 32.
The respiratory quotient (R.Q.) of carbohydrate is ________ .
(A) 0.7
(B) 1
(C) 0.9
(D) 0.1
Answer:
(B) 1

Question 33.
R. Q. for proteins is about _______ .
(A) 0.7
(B) 0.8
(C) 0.9
(D) 1.0
Answer:
(C) 0.9

Question 48.
Competitive Corner:

Question 1.
Which of the following statements regarding mitochondria is INCORRECT?
(A) Inner membrane is convoluted with infoldings.
(B) Mitochondrial matrix contains single circular DNA molecule and ribosomes.
(C) Outer membrane is permeable to monomers of carbohydrates, fats and proteins.
(D) Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in outer membrane.
Hint: Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in inner membrane.
Answer:
(D) Enzymes of electron transport are embedded in outer membrane.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 2.
Where is the respiratory electron transport system (ETS) located in plants?
(A) Intermembrane space
(B) Mitochondrial matrix
(C) Outer mitochondrial membrane
(D) Inner mitochondrial membrane
Answer:
(D) Inner mitochondrial membrane

Question 3.
In case of anaerobic respiration, the R.Q is _____ .
(A) always less than one
(B) always more than one
(C) always infinity
(D) Variable on the basis of substrate.
Answer:
(C) always infinity

Question 4.
The net gain of ATP molecules during aerobic breakdown of one glucose molecule is _______ .
(A) 40
(B) 38
(C) 36
(D) 30
Answer:
(B) 38

Question 5.
During glycolysis the compounds PGAL and DHAP are formed from fructose 1,6- diphosphate by _______.
(A) cleavage
(B) isomerisation
(C) phosphorylation
(D) condensation
Answer:
(A) cleavage

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 13 Respiration and Energy Transfer

Question 6.
Number of oxygen molecules utilized in glycolysis is ________ .
(A) 0
(B) 2
(C) 4
(D) 6
Answer:
(A) 0

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
__________ is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Question 2.
__________ is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 3.
__________ covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
Answer:
Cyberlaw

Question 4.
The attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
Answer:
Information Technology Act 2000

Question 5.
The Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 6.
The Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 7.
__________ is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
Answer:
Ethics

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 8.
__________ is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
Answer:
Morals

Question 9.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion.
Answer:
Morals

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________
Answer:
Cybercrime

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a __________
Answer:
Hacker

Question 12.
A __________ who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
Answer:
Hacker

Question 13.
__________ can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation and mischief.
Answer:
Cybercrimes

Question 14.
__________ is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
Answer:
Software piracy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 15.
__________ includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
Answer:
Software piracy

Question 16.
Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as __________
Answer:
Unauthorized Access

Question 17.
__________ means granting access rights to resources.
Answer:
Authorization

Question 18.
A __________ is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
Answer:
Copyright

Question 19.
__________ owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
Answer:
Copyright

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called __________
Answer:
Cracking

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a __________
Answer:
Crack

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 22.
__________ is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
Answer:
Cyberstalking

Question 23.
__________ is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
Answer:
Phishing

Question 24.
__________ is typically carried out by email spoofing.
Answer:
Phishing

Question 25.
__________ is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
Answer:
Plagarism

Question 26.
__________ refers to unauthorised intrusion into a computer or a network.
Answer:
Hacking

Question 27.
__________ is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
Answer:
Hacker

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 28.
__________ is a method of converting the original message into random text.
Answer:
Encryption

Question 29.
Full form of SSL is __________
Answer:
Secure Socket Layer

Question 30.
Through the __________, transmission of data is encrypted.
Answer:
Secure Socket Layer

Question 31.
__________ refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
Answer:
Firewall

Question 32.
__________ is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 33.
__________ aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 34.
The __________ have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
Answer:
Cyber laws

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 35.
The __________ also aims to provide for the legal framework.
Answer:
Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 36.
__________ has been replaced with the electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.
Answer:
Digital Signature

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Criminal Law is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Cyberlaw covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
The Information Technology Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
The Computer Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
Morals are also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
Ethics is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
Thus Morals are dictated by society, culture, or religion.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as Hacker.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a Hacker.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
A Cybercrime who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
Cybercrimes can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
Unauthorized access includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
Answer:
False

Question 16.
Gaining access without the user’s permission is known as Software piracy.
Answer:
False

Question 17.
Authorization means granting access rights to resources.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 18.
Cracking is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
Copyright owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called copyright.
Answer:
False

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a Crack.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
Cyberstalking is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 24.
Phishing is typically carried out by email spoofing.
Answer:
True

Question 25.
Plagiarism is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
Hacking refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network.
Answer:
True

Question 27.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
Answer:
True

Question 28.
Encryption is a method of converting the original message into random text.
Answer:
True

Question 29.
The full form of SSL is Secure Socket Layer.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
Through the Encryption transmission of data is encrypted.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 31.
Encryption refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
Answer:
False

Question 32.
A digital signature is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
Answer:
False

Question 33.
Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
Cyber laws have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
Answer:
True

Question 35.
The Information Technology Act, 2000 also aims to provide for the legal framework.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 36.
Cyber laws have been replaced with electronic signatures to make it a more technology-neutral act.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
__________ is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Question 2.
__________ is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Question 3.
__________ covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy.
(A) Cyberlaw
(B) Criminal Law
(C) Business Law
(D) Internet Law
Answer:
(A) Cyberlaw

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
The __________ attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
(A) Information Technology Act 2000
(B) Cyber Rule
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act 2000

Question 5.
The __________ Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
(A) Cyber Rule
(B) Information Technology
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(B) Information Technology

Question 6.
The __________ Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of an electronic records.
(A) Cyber Rule
(B) Information Technology
(C) Computer Act
(D) Legal Act
Answer:
(B) Information Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 7.
__________ is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(A) Ethics

Question 8.
__________ is the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(B) Morals

Question 9.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion.
(A) Ethics
(B) Morals
(C) Society
(D) Culture
Answer:
(B) Morals

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 10.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(A) Cybercrime

Question 11.
Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a __________
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(B) Hacker

Question 12.
A __________ who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
(A) Cybercrime
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(B) Hacker

Question 13.
__________ can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.
(A) Cybercrimes
(B) Hacker
(C) Computer crime
(D) Illegal Act
Answer:
(A) Cybercrimes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 14.
__________ is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(A) Software piracy

Question 15.
__________ includes stealing of codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(A) Software piracy

Question 16.
Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as __________
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(B) Unauthorized access

Question 17.
__________ means granting access rights to resources.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(C) Authorization

Question 18.
A __________ is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(D) Copyright

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 19.
__________ owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
(A) Software piracy
(B) Unauthorized access
(C) Authorization
(D) Copyright
Answer:
(D) Copyright

Question 20.
Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called __________
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(A) Cracking

Question 21.
The cracker will use a program or script known as a __________
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(B) Crack

Question 22.
__________ is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(C) Cyberstalking

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 23.
__________ is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(D) Phishing

Question 24.
__________ is typically carried out by email spoofing.
(A) Cracking
(B) Crack
(C) Cyberstalking
(D) Phishing
Answer:
(D) Phishing

Question 25.
__________ is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) A. Cracking
Answer:
(A) Plagarism

Question 26.
__________ refers to unauthorised intrusion into a computer or a network.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) Cracking
Answer:
(B) Hacking

Question 27.
__________ is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.
(A) Plagiarism
(B) Hacking
(C) Hacker
(D) Cracking
Answer:
(C) Hacker

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 28.
__________ is a method of converting the original message into random text.
(A) Encryption
(B) Secure Socket Layer
(C) Firewall
(D) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Encryption

Question 29.
Full form of SSL is __________
(A) Secure Socket Layer
(B) Secure Switch Layer
(C) Secure Session Lesson
(D) System Secure Layer
Answer:
(A) Secure Socket Layer

Question 30.
Through the __________, transmission of data is encrypted.
(A) Secure Socket Layer
(B) Secure Switch Layer
(C) Secure Session Lesson
(D) System Secure Layer
Answer:
(A) Secure Socket Layer

Question 31.
__________ refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.
(A) Encryption
(B) Secure Socket Layer
(C) Firewall
(D) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Firewall

Question 32.
__________ is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital Signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 33.
__________ aims to provide the legal infrastructure for e-commerce in India.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 34.
The __________ have a major impact on E-Businesses and the new economy in India.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber Laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(B) Cyber Laws

Question 35.
The also aims to provide for the legal framework.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber Laws
(C) Digital signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000

Question 36.
__________ has been replaced with the electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.
(A) Information Technology Act, 2000
(B) Cyber laws
(C) Digital Signature
(D) Digital Certificate
Answer:
(C) Digital Signature

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated __________ and provides ways to deal with __________
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Cybercrimes
(E) Morals
Answer:
(B) Laws, (D) Cybercrimes

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 2.
The Information Technology Act has also proposed a legal framework for the __________ and origin of __________
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Cybercrimes
(E) Morals
Answer:
(A) Authentication, (C) Electronic record

Question 3.
Thus __________ are dictated by society, culture or religion while __________ are chosen by the person himself which governs his life.
(A) Authentication
(B) Laws
(C) Electronic record
(D) Morals
(E) Ethics
Answer:
(D) Morals, (E) Ethics

Question 4.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer __________ and __________
(A) Operating System
(B) Programming Language
(C) Individual
(D) Institution
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(A) Operating System, (B) Programming Language

Question 5.
Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an __________ or an __________
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Institution
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(C) Individual, (D) Institution

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 6.
Activity such as __________ or __________ and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Decipher Codes
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(D) Decipher Codes, (E) Passwords

Question 7.
Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as __________ and __________ combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
(A) Computer
(B) Credit Card Numbers
(C) Network
(D) Username Password
(E) Programming Language
Answer:
(B) Credit Card Numbers, (D) Username Password

Question 8.
Hacking refers to unauthorised intrusion into a __________ or a __________
(A) Computer
(B) Credit Card Numbers
(C) Network
(D) Username Password
(E) Programming Language
Answer:
(A) Computer, (C) Network

Question 9.
Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer __________ and __________
(A) Operating system
(B) Programming language
(C) Individual
(D) Decipher Codes
(E) Passwords
Answer:
(A) Operating system, (B) Programming language

Question 10.
Encryption is a method of converting the __________ message into __________ text.
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Software
(E) Electronic communication
Answer:
(A) Original, (B) Random

Question 11.
Firewall refers to network security __________ and __________ system which blocks certain type of information.
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Software
(E) Electronic communication
Answer:
(C) Hardware, (D) Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 12.
Information Technology Act, 2000 is an Act to provide legal recognition for transaction carried out by means of __________ and other means of __________
(A) Original
(B) Random
(C) Hardware
(D) Electronic Data Interchange
(E) Electronic Communication
Answer:
(D) Electronic Data Interchange, (E) Electronic Communication

Question 13.
Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the __________ infrastructure for __________ in India.
(A) Legal
(B) E-Commerce
(C) Original
(D) Random
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Legal, (B) E-Commerce

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Cyberlaw is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements, including computers, __________, __________ and __________
(A) Software
(B) Internet
(C) Hardware
(D) Legal Issues
(E) Information Systems
Answer:
(A) Software, (C) Hardware, (E) Information Systems

Question 2.
Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the __________, __________, and their respective __________
(A) Software
(B) Internet
(C) Cyberspace
(D) Legal Issues
(E) Information Systems
Answer:
(B) Internet, (C) Cyberspace, (D) Legal Issues

Question 3.
Cyber lawcoversafairlybroadarea,encompassingseveralsubtopicsincluding __________, access to and __________, and __________
(A) Freedom of expression
(B) Usage of the Internet
(C) Online privacy
(D) Electronic Crime
(E) Hi-Tech Crime
Answer:
(A) Freedom of expression, (B) Usage of the Internet, (C) Online privacy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as __________, __________ or __________
(A) Freedom of expression
(B) Usage of the Internet
(C) Cybercrime
(D) Electronic Crime
(E) Hi-Tech Crime
Answer:
(C) Cybercrime, (D) Electronic Crime, (E) Hi-Tech Crime

Question 5.
Activity such as __________ codes or __________ and breaking __________ systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
(A) Cyber Cafe
(B) Decipher
(C) Cyber Security
(D) Passwords
(E) Security
Answer:
(B) Decipher, (D) Passwords, (E) Security

Question 6.
The IT Act 2000 was amended in 2008 and 2011 and it includes rules for __________, __________, __________ by service provider, Audit of electronic document etc.
(A) Cyber Cafe
(B) Decipher
(C) Cyber Security
(D) Delivery of Services
(E) Security
Answer:
(A) Cyber Cafe, (C) Cyber Security, (D) Delivery of Services

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ethics (A) Computer Crime
(2) Morals (B) Principles of right and wrong
(3) Cyber Crime (C) Moral philosophy
(4) Hacker (D) Illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ethics (C) Moral philosophy
(2) Morals (B) Principles of right and wrong
(3) Cyber Crime (A) Computer Crime
(4) Hacker (D) Illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Software Piracy (A) Legal right
(2) Unauthorized access (B) Gaining access without the users’ permission
(3) Authorization (C) Granting access rights to resources
(4) Copyright (D) Copyright violation of software

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Software Piracy (D) Copyright violation of software
(2) Unauthorized access (B) Gaining access without the users’ permission
(3) Authorization (C) Granting access rights to resources
(4) Copyright (A) Legal right

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Copyright owners (A) Have the right to control the reproduction of their work
(2) Cracking (B) Will use a program or script known as a crack
(3) Cracker (C) Breaking security systems for illegal reasons
(4) Cyberstalking (D) Uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Copyright owners (A) Have the right to control the reproduction of their work
(2) Cracking (C) Breaking security systems for illegal reasons
(3) Cracker (B) Will use a program or script known as a crack
(4) Cyberstalking (D) Uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Phishing (A) Technique of extracting confidential information
(2) Plagiarism (B) Presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent
(3) Hacking (C) Safe and responsible use of information and communication technology
(4) Cyber Safety (D) Refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Phishing (A) Technique of extracting confidential information
(2) Plagiarism (B) Presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent
(3) Hacking (D) Refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network
(4) Cyber Safety (C) Safe and responsible use of information and communication technology

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Netiquette (A) Network Security
(2) Encryption (B) Method of converting the original message into random text
(3) Secure Socket Layer (C) Transmission of data is encrypted
(4) Firewall (D) Internet etiquette

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Netiquette (D) Internet etiquette
(2) Encryption (B) Method of converting the original message into random text
(3) Secure Socket Layer (C) Transmission of data is encrypted
(4) Firewall (A) Network Security

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Act 2000 (A) Provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange
(2) Digital Signature (B) Electronic Signature

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Act 2000 (A) Provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange
(2) Digital Signature (B) Electronic Signature

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What is Cyber Law?
Answer:

  1. Cyberlaw is the area of law that deals with the Internet’s relationship to technological and electronic elements.
  2. Cyberlaw is the part of the overall legal system that deals with the Internet, cyberspace, and their respective legal issues.
  3. Cyberlaw covers a fairly broad area, encompassing several subtopics including freedom of expression, access to and usage of the Internet, and online privacy

Question 2.
State the advantages of Cyber Law.
Answer:

  1. The Information Technology Act 2000 attempts to change outdated laws and provides ways to deal with cybercrimes.
  2. The Information Technology Act offers the much-needed legal framework so that information is not denied.
  3. The Information Technology Act has also proposed a legal framework for the authentication and origin of electronic records.

Question 3.
Define Ethics and Morals.
Answer:

  1. Ethics is also called moral philosophy is the discipline concerned with what is morally good and bad, right or wrong.
  2. Morals are the standards of behaviour; principles of right and wrong behaviour.
  3. Thus Morals are dictated by society, culture, or religion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 4.
What is Cyber Crime?
Answer:

  1. Computer Crime is alternatively referred to as Cybercrime.
  2. Computer crime is an act performed by a knowledgeable computer user, sometimes referred to as a Hacker.
  3. A Hacker who illegally browses or steals a company’s or individual’s private information.
  4. Cybercrimes can involve criminal activities that are traditional in nature, such as theft, fraud, forgery, defamation, and mischief.

Question 5.
State the examples of Cyber Crime.
Answer:

  1. Software piracy is nothing but copyright violation of software created originally by an individual or an institution.
  2. Software piracy includes stealing codes/programs and other information illegally and creating the imitated copy by unauthorized means.
  3. Gaining access without the users’ permission is known as unauthorized access.
  4. Authorization means granting access rights to resources.
  5. A copyright is a legal right that gives the creator of a literary, artistic, musical, or other creative work.
  6. Copyright owners have the right to control the reproduction of their work, including the right to receive the royalty payment for that reproduction.
  7. Activity such as decipher codes or passwords and breaking security systems for illegal reasons is called cracking.
  8. The cracker will use a program or script known as a Crack.
  9. Cyberstalking is a criminal practice where an individual uses the Internet to systematically harass or threaten someone.
  10. Phishing is a technique of extracting confidential information such as credit card numbers and username password combos by pretending as a legal enterprise.
  11. Phishing is typically carried out by email spoofing.
  12. Plagiarism is presenting someone else’s work or idea as your own without their consent.
  13. Hacking refers to unauthorized intrusion into a computer or a network.
  14. Hacker is a person intensely interested in the deep and hidden or concealed working of any computer operating system and programming language.

Question 6.
Explain Security Procedures.
Answer:

  1. Encryption is a method of converting the original message into random text.
  2. The full form of SSL is Secure Socket Layer.
  3. Through the Secure Socket Layer, the transmission of data is encrypted.
  4. A firewall refers to a network security (Hardware and Software) system which blocks certain types of information.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 4 Cyber Law

Question 7.
Discuss the IT Act of India 2000 and its features.
Answer:

  1. Information Technology Act, 2000 is an Act to provide legal recognition for transactions carried out by means of electronic data interchange and other means of electronic communication.
  2. Information Technology Act, 2000 aims to provide the legal infrastructure for E-Commerce in India.
  3. Cyber Laws have a major impact on e-businesses and the new economy in India.
  4. The Information Technology Act, 2000 also aims to provide for the legal framework.
  5. Digital signature has been replaced with the electronic signature to make it a more technology-neutral act.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
___________ resources have become a part of our day to day life.
Answer:
Online

Question 2.
The ___________ is a powerful media to transmit information.
Answer:
Internet

Question 3.
The pages of information displayed on the internet are referred to as ___________
Answer:
Web Pages

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by ___________ governing authorities.
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of ___________
Answer:
Websites

Question 6.
WWW stands for ___________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as ___________
Answer:
Web

Question 8.
___________ is a simple text file created using HTML.
Answer:
Webpage

Question 9.
___________ is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio and videos.
Answer:
Website

Question 10.
A ___________ is a software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
Answer:
Web browser

Question 11.
A ___________ is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
Answer:
Web Server I

Question 12.
The functionality of website is managed by ___________
Answer:
Webserver

Question 13.
Full form of URL is ___________
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 14.
___________ is an address of a web page on the internet.
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of ___________
Answer:
Uniform Resource Locator

Question 16.
Full form of HTTP is ___________
Answer:
HyperText Transfer Protocol

Question 17.
___________ is a protocol used by WWW for client server communication.
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 18.
Full for of HTML is ___________
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 19.
___________ enables to write code for a webpage.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of ___________ links.
Answer:
Hypertext

Question 21.
___________ is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 22.
___________ documents are created in any text editor for and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language

Question 23.
___________ is compatible with most of the web browsers.
Answer:
Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 24.
___________ Tags are also called paired tags.
Answer:
Container

Question 25.
___________ Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
Answer:
Container

Question 26.
___________ Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
Answer:
Empty

Question 27.
___________ defines a header for a document or a section.
Answer:
<header>

Question 28.
___________ defines a container for navigation links.
Answer:
<nav>

Question 29.
___________ defines a section in a document.
Answer:
<section>

Question 30.
___________ defines an independent self-contained article.
Answer:
<article>

Question 31.
___________ defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
Answer:
<aside>

Question 32.
___________ defines a footer for a document or a section.
Answer:
<footer>

Question 33.
___________ defines additional details.
Answer:
<details>

Question 34.
_________ formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
Answer:
Text

Question 35.
_________ displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
Answer:
<b>

Question 36.
_________ displays text within it in italicized manner like Hello.
Answer:
<i>

Question 37.
_________ displays text with underline like Hello.
Answer:
<u>

Question 38.
_________ displays text in small font size.
Answer:
<small>

Question 39.
_________ displays text in subscript form.
Answer:
<sub>

Question 40.
___________ displays text in superscript form.
Answer:
<sup>

Question 41.
The HTML ___________ element defines marked or highlighted text.
Answer:
<mark>

Question 42.
HTML provides ___________ levels of heading tags.
Answer:
Six

Question 43.
The ___________ tag displays text in bold and with largest heading level.
Answer:
<H1>

Question 44.
The ___________ tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
Answer:
<H6>

Question 45.
___________ tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
Answer:
<IMG>

Question 46.
___________ is used to specify the path of an image file.
Answer:
src

Question 47.
___________ specifies height of the image in pixels.
Answer:
Height

Question 48.
___________ specifies width of the image in pixels.
Answer:
Width

Question 49.
___________ is referred as alternate text.
Answer:
Alt

Question 50.
___________ is a empty tag.
Answer:
<IMG>

Question 51.
___________ tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
<hr>

Question 52.
___________ sets color for the horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
color

Question 53.
___________ specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
Answer:
width

Question 54.
___________ sets thickness of a ruled line.
Answer:
size

Question 55.
___________ tag is used to define paragraphs.
Answer:
<P>

Question 56.
A ___________ is made up of rows and columns.
Answer:
Table

Question 57.
___________ is used to indicate creation of a table.
Answer:
<table>

Question 58.
___________ is used to specify a table heading.
Answer:
<caption>

Question 59.
___________ tag is used to create each row of the table.
Answer:
<tr>

Question 60.
___________ indicates table heading.
Answer:
<th>

Question 61.
___________ specifies data within the table (cell content).
Answer:
<td>

Question 62.
___________ attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
Answer:
border

Question 63.
___________ displays border in a specific color.
Answer:
bordercolor

Question 64.
___________ the table either to the left, right or center.
Answer:
aligns

Question 65.
___________ sets the background color for the table.
Answer:
bgcolor

Question 66.
___________ are used to connect one document with another document.
Answer:
Hyperlinks

Question 67.
In HTML, Links are created by using ___________ tag.
Answer:
<a>

Question 68.
A ___________ by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
Answer:
Hyperlink

Question 69.
An ___________ link is underlined and purple.
Answer:
Visited

Question 70.
A ___________ link is underlined and blue.
Answer:
Active

Question 71.
___________ in HTML is used to accept user input.
Answer:
Forms

Question 72.
A ___________ is a collection of different elements also called as controls.
Answer:
Form

Question 73.
___________ attributes specifies a name to a form.
Answer:
Name

Question 74.
The ___________ attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
Answer:
Action

Question 75.
The ___________ attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
Answer:
Method

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is ___________
Answer:
GET

Question 77.
The data submitted by using ___________ is visible in the address bar.
Answer:
GET

Question 78.
The ___________ method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
Answer:
POST

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line ___________
Answer:
Textbox

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a ___________ button.
Answer:
Radio

Question 81.
The ___________ button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
Radio

Question 82.
<Input type = “checkbox”> creates a ___________
Answer:
Checkbox

Question 83.
___________ allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
Checkbox

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for ___________ the form data to a server.
Answer:
Submitting

Question 85.
The ___________ type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘ * ‘ asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc.
Answer:
Password

Question 86.
The ___________ control clears the text content entered in the form.
Answer:
Reset

Question 87.
<Input type =”____________”> displays push button which activates on events.
Answer:
Button

Question 88.
_________ describes, the name of the control like text radio.
Answer:
Type

Question 89.
The ___________ attribute is a user defined value.
Answer:
Name

Question 90.
The ___________ attribute is used with text and password type.
Answer:
Max length

Question 91.
___________ specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
Answer:
Max length

Question 92.
The ___________ attribute can be used with text and password type.
Answer:
Size

Question 93.
___________ specifies the width of the text box.
Answer:
Size

Question 94.
The ___________ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
Answer:
Checked

Question 95.
The ___________ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
Answer:
Value

Question 96.
The ___________ tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
Answer:
<textarea>

Question 97.
___________ is used to specify name for the text area.
Answer:
Name

Question 98.
___________ specifies the number of lines in a text area.
Answer:
Rows

Question 99.
___________ specifies the width of a text area.
Answer:
Cols

Question 100.
___________ specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
Answer:
Max length

Question 101.
___________ specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
Answer:
Placeholder

Question 102.
___________ specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
Answer:
Required

Question 103.
___________ tag is used to create drop-down list.
Answer:
<select>

Question 104.
___________ assigns name to the control.
Answer:
Name

Question 105.
___________ allows the user to select more than one value.
Answer:
Multiple

Question 106.
The ___________ attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
Answer:
Size

Question 107.
To define preselected option, ‘___________’ attribute is added to the <option>.
Answer:
Selected

Question 108.
___________ assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
Answer:
Value

Question 109.
___________ was initially created to make webpages alive.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 110.
A ___________ is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
Answer:
Script

Question 111.
___________ are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 112.
___________ can be use for client side or server side scripting language.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 113.
___________ code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 114.
___________ attribute is used to set scripting language.
Answer:
Language

Question 115.
The ___________ is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
Answer:
Variable

Question 116.
___________ name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore and dollar character with following rules.
Answer:
Variable

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as ___________ name.
Answer:
Variable

Question 118.
___________ name can be limited up to 255 characters.
Answer:
Variable

Question 119.
___________ name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.
Answer:
Variable

Question 120.
_____________ provides data types to store and use different types of values.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘___________’ data type.
Answer:
Number

Question 122.
___________ data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
Answer:
Number

Question 123.
___________ are used for storing text.
Answer:
Strings

Question 124.
___________ type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
Answer:
Boolean

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘___________’ when variable which is declared but not assigned.
Answer:
Undefined

Question 126.
___________ are used to do arithmetic and logical operations.
Answer:
Operators

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as ___________ operator.
Answer:
Unary

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called as ___________ operator.
Answer:
Binary

Question 129.
___________ operators are used in mathematical expressions.
Answer:
Arithmetic

Question 130.
It is important to know that ___________ operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
Answer:
Assignment

Question 131.
___________ operator is used to assign value of an expression to a variable.
Answer:
Assignment

Question 132.
___________ operators are used to check conditions or comparison of operands.
Answer:
Relational

Question 133.
___________ operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
Answer:
Logical

Question 134.
___________ (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment value of variable by one.
Answer:
Increment

Question 135.
___________ operator in JavaScript is used to decrement value of variable by one.
Answer:
Decrement

Question 136.
___________ are non-executable statements in program.
Answer:
Comments

Question 137.
___________ are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
Answer:
Comments

Question 138.
Statements added in ___________ are ignored by JavaScript.
Answer:
Comments

Question 139.
___________ is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
Answer:
Function

Question 140.
___________ is reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
Answer:
Function

Question 141.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
Answer:
parseInt()

Question 142.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating point representation.
Answer:
parseFloat()

Question 143.
___________ function displays alert popup box with ok button. This is also called as a message box.
Answer:
alert()

Question 144.
___________ function is used when you want input value from user at the time of program execution.
Answer:
prompt()

Question 145.
___________ function displays confirmation message box with ok and cancel button.
Answer:
confirm()

Question 146.
___________ string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
Answer:
toLowerCase()

Question 147.
___________ string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
Answer:
toUpperCase()

Question 148.
___________ returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if given value is number.
Answer:
isNaN()

Question 149.
A ___________ in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
Answer:
Function

Question 150.
A ___________ is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
Answer:
Function

Question 151.
___________ can be called either by an event or by giving call to that function.
Answer:
Functions

Question 152.
___________ is an event-driven language.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 153.
___________ is an action done bv the user or an application.
Answer:
Event

Question 154.
___________ lets you execute a code when events are detected.
Answer:
JavaScript

Question 155.
___________ when user moves the mouse away from an element.
Answer:
onMouseOut

Question 156.
___________ when user clicks an element.
Answer:
onClick

Question 157.
___________ when user moves the mouse over an element.
Answer:
onMouseOver

Question 158.
___________ when user releases a mouse button over an element.
Answer:
onMouseUp

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Online resources have become a part of our day-to-day life.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
The Internet is a powerful medium to transmit information.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
The pages of the information displayed on the internet are referred to as the worldwide web.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by Webpages governing authorities.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of Websites.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
WWW stands for world wide web.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as Webpage.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
The web is a simple text file created using HTML.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
A website is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio, and videos.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
A web browser is software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
A Web server is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
The functionality of the website is managed by Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
The full form of URL is Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
Uniform Resource Locator is an address of a web page on the internet.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of Uniform Resource Locator.
Answer:
True

Question 16.
The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Uniform Resource Locator is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Full form of HTML is HyperText Markup Language.
Answer:
True

Question 19.
HyperText Markup Language enables to write code for a webpage.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of HyperText links.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
HyperText Markup Language is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
Uniform Resource Locator documents are created in any text editor and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
Answer:
False

Question 23.
HyperText Markup Language is compatible with most web browsers.
Answer:
False

Question 24.
Empty Tags are also called paired tags.
Answer:
False

Question 25.
Container Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
Container Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
<nav> defines a header for a document or a section.
Answer:
False

Question 28.
<header> defines a container for navigation links.
Answer:
False

Question 29.
<article> defines a section in a document.
Answer:
False

Question 30.
<section> defines an independent self-contained article.
Answer:
False

Question 31.
<aside> defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
Answer:
True

Question 32.
<footer> defines a footer for a document or a section.
Answer:
True

Question 33.
<details> defines additional details.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
<b> formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
Answer:
False

Question 35.
<b> displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 36.
<i> display text within it in an italicized manner like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 37.
<u> displays text with an underline like Hello.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
<small> displays text in small font size.
Answer:
True

Question 39.
Text displays text in subscript form.
Answer:
False

Question 40.
<sup> displays text in superscript form.
Answer:
True

Question 41.
The HTML <sub> element defines marked or highlighted text.
Answer:
False

Question 42.
HTML provides six levels of heading tags.
Answer:
True

Question 43.
The Six tag displays text in bold and with the largest heading level.
Answer:
False

Question 44.
The <H6> tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
Answer:
True

Question 45.
src tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
Answer:
False

Question 46.
<IMG> is used to specify the path of an image file.
Answer:
False

Question 47.
Height specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 48.
Width specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 49.
Alt is referred to as alternate text.
Answer:
True

Question 50.
<IMG> is a empty tag.
Answer:
True

Question 51.
<P> tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
False

Question 52.
color sets the color for the horizontal ruled line.
Answer:
True

Question 53.
width specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
Answer:
True

Question 54.
size sets the thickness of a ruled line.
Answer:
True

Question 55.
<hr> tag is used to define paragraphs.
Answer:
False

Question 56.
A Table is made up of rows and columns.
Answer:
True

Question 57.
<caption> is used to indicate the creation of a table.
Answer:
False

Question 58.
<table> is used to specify a table heading.
Answer:
False

Question 59.
<tr> tag is used to create each row of the table.
Answer:
True

Question 60.
<th> indicates table heading.
Answer:
False

Question 61.
<td> specifies data within the table (cell content).
Answer:
True

Question 62.
A border attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
Answer:
True

Question 63.
bgcolor displays borders in a specific color.
Answer:
False

Question 64.
border the table either to the left, right or center.
Answer:
False

Question 65.
bgcolor sets the background color for the table.
Answer:
True

Question 66.
Hyperlinks are used to connect one document with another document.
Answer:
True

Question 67.
In HTML, links are created by using <a> tag.
Answer:
True

Question 68.
A Hyperlink by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
Answer:
True

Question 69.
An Active link is underlined and purple.
Answer:
False

Question 70.
A Visited link is underlined and blue.
Answer:
False

Question 71.
Forms in HTML are used to accept user input.
Answer:
True

Question 72.
A Form is a collection of different elements also called controls.
Answer:
True

Question 73.
Name attributes specifies a name to a form.
Answer:
True

Question 74.
The Method attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
Answer:
False

Question 75.
The Action attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
Answer:
False

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is GET.
Answer:
True

Question 77.
The data submitted by using POST is visible in the address bar.
Answer:
False

Question 78.
The GET method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
Answer:
False

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line Textbox.
Answer:
True

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a radio button.
Answer:
True

Question 81.
The radio button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
True

Question 82.
<Input type = “checkbox”> creates a Password.
Answer:
False

Question 83.
The button allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
Answer:
False

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for Submitting the form data to a server.
Answer:
True

Question 85.
The Checkbox input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterisk or ‘•’ disc.
Answer:
False

Question 86.
The Reset control clears the text content entered in the form.
Answer:
True

Question 87.
<Input type = “Radio”> displays push button which activates on events.
Answer:
False

Question 88.
Maxlength describes the name of the control like text radio.
Answer:
False

Question 89.
The Name attribute is a user-defined value.
Answer:
True

Question 90.
Maxlength attribute is used with text and password type.
Answer:
True

Question 91.
Type specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
Answer:
False

Question 92.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
Answer:
True

Question 93.
The value specifies the width of the text box.
Answer:
False

Question 94.
The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
Answer:
True

Question 95.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
Answer:
False

Question 96.
The <textarea> tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
Answer:
True

Question 97.
Name is used to specify a name for the textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 98.
Required specifies the number of lines in a text area.
Answer:
False

Question 99.
Maxlength specifies the width of a text area.
Answer:
False

Question 100.
Maxlength specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 101.
Placeholder specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
Answer:
True

Question 102.
Rows specify that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
Answer:
False

Question 103.
Value tag is used to create a drop-down list.
Answer:
False

Question 104.
Name assigns a name to the control.
Answer:
True

Question 105.
Multiple allows the user to select more than one value.
Answer:
True

Question 106.
The Size attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
Answer:
True

Question 107.
To define the preselected option, the ‘Selected’ attribute is added to the <option>.
Answer:
True

Question 108.
<select> assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
Answer:
False

Question 109.
JavaScript was initially created to make web pages alive.
Answer:
True

Question 110.
A Script is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
Answer:
True

Question 111.
Scripts are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
Answer:
True

Question 112.
JavaScript can be used for the client-side or server-side scripting languages.
Answer:
True

Question 113.
Python code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
Answer:
False

Question 114.
The language attribute is used to set scripting language.
Answer:
True

Question 115.
A Variable is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
Answer:
True

Question 116.
The variable name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore, and dollar characters with the following rules.
Answer:
True

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as Variable names.
Answer:
True

Question 118.
A variable names can be limited to up to 255 characters.
Answer:
True

Question 119.
Variable name in javascript is declared with keyword var’.
Answer:
True

Question 120.
JavaScript provides data types to store and use different types of values.
Answer:
True

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘Boolean’ data type.
Answer:
False

Question 122.
The number data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
Answer:
True

Question 123.
Strings are used for storing text.
Answer:
True

Question 124.
Number type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
Answer:
False

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘Undefined’ when a variable is declared but not assigned.
Answer:
True

Question 126.
Operators are used to doing arithmetic and logical operations.
Answer:
True

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as Unary operator.
Answer:
True

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called Binary operators.
Answer:
True

Question 129.
Assignment operators are used in mathematical expressions.
Answer:
False

Question 130.
It is important to know that the Assignment operator is not an ‘equal to’ operator.
Answer:
True

Question 131.
The binary operator is used to assign the value of an expression to a variable.
Answer:
False

Question 132.
Relational operators are used to checking conditions or comparisons of operands.
Answer:
True

Question 133.
Logical operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
Answer:
True

Question 134.
The decrement (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment the value of a variable by one.
Answer:
False

Question 135.
The increment operator in JavaScript is used to decrement the value of variables by one.
Answer:
False

Question 136.
Mistakes are non-executable statements in the program.
Answer:
False

Question 137.
Comments are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
Answer:
True

Question 138.
Statements added in Comments are ignored by JavaScript.
Answer:
True

Question 139.
The function is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
Answer:
True

Question 140.
The function is a reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
Answer:
True

Question 141.
parseFloat() function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
Answer:
False

Question 142.
parselnt() function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating-point representation.
Answer:
False

Question 143.
alert() function displays an alert popup box with an ok button. This is also called a message box.
Answer:
False

Question 144.
prompt() function is used when you want input value from the user at the time of program execution.
Answer:
True

Question 145.
confirm() function displays a confirmation message box with ok and cancel buttons.
Answer:
True

Question 146.
toUpperCase() string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
Answer:
False

Question 147.
toLowerCase() string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
Answer:
False

Question 148.
isNaN() returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if the given value is a number.
Answer:
True

Question 149.
A Gmail in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
Answer:
False

Question 150.
A Function is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
Answer:
True

Question 151.
Functions can be called either by an event or by giving a call to that function.
Answer:
True

Question 152.
JavaScript is an event-driven language.
Answer:
True

Question 153.
An event is an action done by the user or an application.
Answer:
True

Question 154.
JavaScript lets you execute a code when events are detected.
Answer:
True

Question 155.
onMouseUp when the user moves the mouse away from an element.
Answer:
False

Question 156.
onClick when the user clicks an element.
Answer:
True

Question 157.
onMouseOver when the user moves the mouse over an element.
Answer:
True

Question 158.
onClick when the user releases a mouse button over an element.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
__________ resources have become a part of our day to day life.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(A) Online

Question 2.
The __________ is a powerful media to transmit information.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(B) Internet

Question 3.
The pages of information displayed on the internet are referred to as __________
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(C) Web pages

Question 4.
The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by __________ governing authorities.
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) World Wide Web
Answer:
(D) World Wide Web

Question 5.
The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of __________
(A) Online
(B) Internet
(C) Webpages
(D) Websites
Answer:
(D) Websites

Question 6.
WWW stands for __________
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web Browser
Answer:
(A) World Wide Web

Question 7.
WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as __________
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(D) Web

Question 8.
__________ is a simple text file created using HTML.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(B) Webpage

Question 9.
__________ is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio and videos.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web
Answer:
(C) Website

Question 10.
A __________ is a software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
(A) World Wide Web
(B) Webpage
(C) Website
(D) Web Browser
Answer:
(D) Web Browser

Question 11.
A __________ is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(A) Web Server

Question 12.
The functionality of website is managed by __________
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(A) Webserver

Question 13.
Full form of URL is __________
(A) Uniform Resource Locator
(B) United Research Live
(C) Uniform Research Live
(D) Uniform Research Locator
Answer:
(A) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 14.
__________ is an address of a web page on the internet.
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(B) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 15.
The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of __________
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(B) Uniform Resource Locator

Question 16.
Full form of HTTP is __________
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Test Transfer Protocol
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Permission
(D) Hyper Text Transfer Permission
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 17.
__________ is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
(A) Web Server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text
Answer:
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 18.
Full form of HTML is __________
(A) Hyper Text Markup Language
(B) Hyper Test Markup Language
(C) Hyper Text Machine Language
(D) Hyper Test Machine Language
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 19.
__________ enables to write code for a webpage.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 20.
All the webpages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of __________ links.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) Hypertext
Answer:
(D) Hypertext

Question 21.
__________ is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
(A) Web server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 22.
__________ documents are created in any text editor for and can be run (executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
(A) Webserver
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 23.
__________ is compatible with most of the web browsers.
(A) Web server
(B) Uniform Resource Locator
(C) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(D) HyperText Markup Language
Answer:
(D) Hyper Text Markup Language

Question 24.
__________ Tags are also called paired tags.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(A) Container

Question 25.
__________ Tags have a beginning tae and an end tag.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(A) Container

Question 26.
__________ Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.
(A) Container
(B) Empty
(C) Web Server
(D) Uniform Resource Locator
Answer:
(B) Empty

Question 27.
__________ defines a header for a document or a section.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(A) <header>

Question 28.
__________ defines a container for navigation links.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(B) <nav>

Question 29.
__________ defines a section in a document.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(C) <section>

Question 30.
__________ defines an independent self-contained article.
(A) <header>
(B) <nav>
(C) <section>
(D) <article>
Answer:
(D) <article>

Question 31.
__________ defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(A) <aside>

Question 32.
__________ defines a footer for a document or a section.
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(B) <footer>

Question 33.
__________ defines additional details.
(A) <aside>
(B) <footer>
(C) <details>
(D) <header>
Answer:
(C) <details>

Question 34.
__________ formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing it’s appearance.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(A) Text

Question 35.
__________ displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(B) <b>

Question 36.
__________ displays text within it in italicized manner like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(C) <i>

Question 37.
__________ displays text with underline like Hello.
(A) Text
(B) <b>
(C) <i>
(D) <u>
Answer:
(D) <u>

Question 38.
__________ displays text in small font size.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(A) <small>

Question 39.
__________ displays text in subscript form.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(B) <sub>

Question 40.
__________ displays text in superscript form.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(C) <sup>

Question 41.
The HTML __________ element defines marked or highlighted text.
(A) <small>
(B) <sub>
(C) <sup>
(D) <mark>
Answer:
(D) <mark>

Question 42.
HTML provides __________ levels of heading tags.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(A) Six

Question 43.
The __________ tag displays text in bold and with largest heading level.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(B) <H1>

Question 44.
The __________ tag displays text in the smallest heading level.
(A) Six
(B) <H1>
(C) <H6>
(D) <H2>
Answer:
(C) <H6>

Question 45.
__________ tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(A) <IMG>

Question 46.
__________ is used to specify the path of an image file.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(B) src

Question 47.
__________ specifies height of the image in pixels.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(C) Height

Question 48.
__________ specifies width of the image in pixels.
(A) <IMG>
(B) src
(C) Height
(D) Width
Answer:
(D) Width

Question 49.
__________ is referred as alternate text.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(A) Alt

Question 50.
__________ is a empty tag.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(B) <IMG>

Question 51.
__________ tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(C) <hr>

Question 52.
__________ sets color for the horizontal ruled line.
(A) Alt
(B) <IMG>
(C) <hr>
(D) color
Answer:
(D) color

Question 53.
__________ specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(A) width

Question 54.
__________ sets thickness of a ruled line.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(B) size

Question 55.
__________ tag is used to define paragraphs.
(A) width
(B) size
(C) <P>
(D) color
Answer:
(C) <P>

Question 56.
A __________ is made up of rows and columns.
(A) Table
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(A) Table

Question 57.
__________ is used to indicate creation of a table.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(A) <table>

Question 58.
__________ is used to specify a table heading.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(B) <caption>

Question 59.
__________ tag is used to create each row of the table.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(C) <tr>

Question 60.
__________ indicates table heading.
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <th>
Answer:
(D) <th>

Question 61.
__________ specifies data within the table (cell content).
(A) <table>
(B) <caption>
(C) <tr>
(D) <td>
Answer:
(D) <td>

Question 62.
__________ attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(A) border

Question 63.
__________ displays border in a specific color.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(B) bordercolor

Question 64.
__________ the table either to the left, right or center.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(C) aligns

Question 65.
__________ sets the background color for the table.
(A) border
(B) bordercolor
(C) aligns
(D) bgcolor
Answer:
(D) bgcolor

Question 66.
__________ are used to connect one document with another document.
(A) Hyperlinks
(B) <a>
(C) Hypertext
(D) Visited
Answer:
(A) Hyperlinks

Question 67.
In HTML, Links are created bv usinsr __________ tag.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(B) <a>

Question 68.
A __________ by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(C) Hyperlink

Question 69.
A __________ link is underlined and purple.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Visited
Answer:
(D) Visited

Question 70.
An __________ link is underlined and blue.
(A) Hypertext
(B) <a>
(C) Hyperlink
(D) Active
Answer:
(D) Active

Question 71.
__________ in HTML is used to accept user input.
(A) Forms
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Forms

Question 72.
A __________ is a collection of different elements also called as controls.
(A) Form
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Form

Question 73.
__________ attributes specifies a name to a form.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) Name

Question 74.
The __________ attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(B) Action

Question 75.
The __________ attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(C) Method

Question 76.
The default method of submitting form data is __________
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(D) GET

Question 77.
The data submitted by using __________ is visible in the address bar.
(A) Name
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(D) GET

Question 78.
The __________ method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.
(A) POST
(B) Action
(C) Method
(D) GET
Answer:
(A) POST

Question 79.
<Input type = “text”> creates a one line __________
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(A) Textbox

Question 80.
<Input type = “radio”> creates a __________ button.
(A) Textbox The
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(B) Radio

Question 81.
The __________ button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(B) Radio

Question 82.
<Input type =”checkbox”> creates a __________
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(C) Checkbox

Question 83.
__________ allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(C) Checkbox

Question 84.
<Input type = “submit”> displays a button for __________ the form data to a server.
(A) Textbox
(B) Radio
(C) Checkbox
(D) Submitting
Answer:
(D) Submitting

Question 85.
The __________ input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterik or ‘.’ disc.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(A) Password

Question 86.
The __________ control clears the text content entered in the form.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(B) Reset

Question 87.
<Input type = “___________”> displays push button which activates on events.
(A) Password
(B) Reset
(C) Button
(D) Textbox
Answer:
(C) Button

Question 88.
__________ describes, the name of the control like text radio.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) Type

Question 89.
The __________ attribute is a user defined value.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 90.
__________ attribute is used with text and password type.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Maxlength

Question 91.
__________ specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Maxlength

Question 92.
The ‘___________’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 93.
__________ specifies the width of the text box.
(A) Type
(B) Name
(C) Maxlength
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 94.
The ‘______________’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
(A) Checked
(B) Value
(C) Name
(D) Maxlength
Answer:
(A) Checked

Question 95.
The ‘______________’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.
(A) Checked
(B) Value
(C) Name
(D) Maxlength
Answer:
(B) Value

Question 96.
The __________ tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(A) <textarea>

Question 97.
__________ is used to specify name for the textarea.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 98.
__________ specifies the number of lines in a textarea.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(C) Rows

Question 99.
__________ specifies the width of a text area.
(A) <textarea>
(B) Name
(C) Rows
(D) Cols
Answer:
(D) Cols

Question 100.
__________ specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(A) Maxlength

Question 101.
__________ specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(B) Placeholder

Question 102.
__________ specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.
(A) Maxlength
(B) Placeholder
(C) Required
(D) Rows
Answer:
(C) Required

Question 103.
__________ tag is used to create drop-down list.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) <select>

Question 104.
__________ assigns name to the control.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Name

Question 105.
__________ allows the user to select more than one value.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(C) Multiple

Question 106.
The __________ attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
(A) <select>
(B) Name
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(D) Size

Question 107.
To define preselected option, ‘___________’ attribute is added to the <option>.
(A) Selected
(B) Value
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(A) Selected

Question 108.
__________ assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.
(A) Selected
(B) Value
(C) Multiple
(D) Size
Answer:
(B) Value

Question 109.
__________ was initially created to make webpages alive.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 110.
A __________ is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(B) Script

Question 111.
__________ are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Scripts
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(B) Scripts

Question 112.
__________ can be use for client side or server side scripting language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 113.
__________ code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Script
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 114.
__________ attribute is used to set scripting language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Scrip
(C) Language
(D) Python
Answer:
(C) Language

Question 115.
The __________ is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 116.
__________ name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore and dollar character with following rules.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 117.
Standard keywords are not allowed as __________ name.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 118.
__________ name can be limited up to 255 characters.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 119.
__________ name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.
(A) Variable
(B) Java
(C) .Net
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Variable

Question 120.
__________ provides data types to store and use different types of values.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 121.
Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘____________’ data type.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(B) Number

Question 122.
__________ data type can hold positive as well as negative values.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(B) Number

Question 123.
__________ are used for storing text.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(C) Strings

Question 124.
__________ type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(D) Boolean

Question 125.
JavaScript returns ‘____________’ when variable which is declared but not assigned.
(A) Undefined
(B) Number
(C) Strings
(D) Boolean
Answer:
(A) Undefined

Question 126.
__________ are used to do arithmetic and logical operations.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(A) Operators

Question 127.
Operators that require one operand is called as __________ operator.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(B) Unary

Question 128.
Operators that require two operands are called as __________ operator.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(C) Binary

Question 129.
__________ operators are used in mathematical expressions.
(A) Operators
(B) Unary
(C) Binary
(D) Arithmetic
Answer:
(D) Arithmetic

Question 130.
It is important to know that __________ operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(A) Assignment

Question 131.
__________ operator is used to assign value of an expression to a variable.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(A) Assignment

Question 132.
__________ operators are used to check conditions or comparison of operands.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(B) Relational

Question 133.
__________ operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(C) Logical

Question 134.
__________ (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment value of variable by one.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Increment
Answer:
(D) Increment

Question 135.
__________ operator in JavaScript is used to decrement value of variable by one.
(A) Assignment
(B) Relational
(C) Logical
(D) Decrement
Answer:
(D) Decrement

Question 136.
___________ are non-executable statements in program.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 137.
___________ are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 138.
Statements added in ___________ are ignored by JavaScript.
(A) Comments
(B) Mistakes
(C) Java
(D) Python
Answer:
(A) Comments

Question 139.
___________ is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 140.
___________ is reusable codeblock that will be executed when it is called.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 141.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(B) parseInt()

Question 142.
___________ function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating point representation.
(A) Function
(B) parseInt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(C) parseFloat()

Question 143.
___________ function displays alert popup box with ok button. This is also called as a message box.
(A) Function
(B) parselnt()
(C) parseFloat()
(D) alert()
Answer:
(D) alert()

Question 144.
___________ function is used when you want input value from user at the time of program execution.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(A) prompt()

Question 145.
___________ function displays confirmation message box with ok and cancel button.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(B) confirm()

Question 146.
___________ string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(C) toLowerCase()

Question 147.
___________ string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) toUpperCase()
Answer:
(D) toUpperCase()

Question 148.
___________ returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if given value is number.
(A) prompt()
(B) confirm()
(C) toLowerCase()
(D) isNaN()
Answer:
(D) isNaN()

Question 149.
A ___________ in any scripting and programming language is a small part of a program that we require again and again.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 150.
A ___________ is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 151.
___________ can be called either by an event or by giving call to that function.
(A) Function
(B) Gmail
(C) Hotmail
(D) Program
Answer:
(A) Function

Question 152.
___________ is an event-driven language.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 153.
___________ is an action done by the user or an application.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(B) Event

Question 154.
___________ lets you execute a code when events are detected.
(A) JavaScript
(B) Event
(C) Function
(D) Driven
Answer:
(A) JavaScript

Question 155.
___________ when user moves the mouse away from an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) onMouseUp
Answer:
(A) onMouseOut

Question 156.
___________ when user clicks an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(B) onClick

Question 157.
___________ when user moves the mouse over an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(C) onMouseOver

Question 158.
___________ when user releases a mouse button over an element.
(A) onMouseOut
(B) onClick
(C) onMouseOver
(D) OnMouseUp
Answer:
(D) onMouseUp

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The standards and formats for presenting __________ and __________ on the internet are developed and approved by world wide web governing authorities.
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) websites
(E) text editor
Answer:
(B) Text, (C) graphics

Question 2.
A web browser is a software used to view __________ or __________ available on the internet.
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) websites
(E) text editor
Answer:
(A) web pages, (D) websites

Question 3.
HyperText Transfer Protocol documents are created in any __________ for and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a __________
(A) web pages
(B) Text
(C) graphics
(D) text editor
(E) web browser
Answer:
(D) text editor, (E) web browser

Question 4.
Every HTML page is enclosed within two tags __________ and __________
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(C) <html>, (E) </html>

Question 5.
The page is divided into two sections internally __________ section and __________ section.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(A) Head, (B) body

Question 6.
HTML tags are categorized as _________ & __________
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) End
(D) Empty tags
(E) Standalone
Answer:
(B) Container tags, (D) Empty tags

Question 7.
Container Tags have a __________ tag and an __________ tag.
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) End
(D) Empty tags
(E) Standalone
Answer:
(A) Beginning, (C) End

Question 8.
Empty tags are __________ tags and do not have an __________ tag.
(A) Beginning
(B) Container tags
(C) Standalone
(D) End
(E) Empty Tag
Answer:
(C) Standalone, (D) End

Question 9.
_________ and __________ tag indicates that the document is an html file.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <html>
(D) Container tags
(E) </html>
Answer:
(C) <html>, (E) </html>

Question 10.
____________ and __________ includes <Title> within it. the text within <head> is not displayed on the webpage.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <head>
(D) Container tags
(E) </head>
Answer:
(C) <head>, (E) </head>

Question 11.
__________ and __________ content within this tag is displayed on the title bar.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <title>
(D) Container tags
(E) </title>
Answer:
(C) <title>, (E) </title>

Question 12.
__________ and __________ tag includes all content which is to be developed in the web browser.
(A) Head
(B) body
(C) <body>
(D) Container tags
(E) </body>
Answer:
(C) <body>, (E) </body>

Question 13.
<footer> defines a footer for a __________ or a __________
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Columns
(E) Tags
Answer:
(A) Document, (B) Section

Question 14.
A table is made up of __________ and __________
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Columns
(E) Tags
Answer:
(C) Rows, (D) Columns

Question 15.
The __________ and __________ used to create a table.
(A) Document
(B) Section
(C) Rows
(D) Tags
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(D) Tags, (E) Attributes

Question 16.
A Hyperlink by default appears __________ in colour with an __________
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(B) Blue, (C) Underline

Question 17.
The method attribute specifies __________ or __________ method to be used when submitting the form data.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(A) Get, (D) Post

Question 18.
Method of form are __________ or __________
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Post
(E) Text
Answer:
(A) Get, (D) Post

Question 19.
Maxlength attribute is used with __________ and __________ type.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 20.
Maxlength specifies the maximum number of characters which can be entered in a __________ or __________ box.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 21.
The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with __________ and __________ type.
(A) Get
(B) Blue
(C) Underline
(D) Text
(E) Password
Answer:
(D) Text, (E) Password

Question 22.
The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a __________ or __________ button.
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Value
(E) Client
Answer:
(A) Checkbox, (C) Radio

Question 23.
The attributes of <option> tag are __________ & __________
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Value
(E) Client
Answer:
(B) Selected, (D) Value

Question 24.
JavaScript can be use for __________ side or __________ side scripting language.
(A) Checkbox
(B) Selected
(C) Radio
(D) Client
(E) Server
Answer:
(D) Client, (E) Server

Question 25.
Number data type can hold __________ as well as __________ values.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) False
(E) Logical
Answer:
(A) Positive, (B) Negative

Question 26.
Boolean Type represents only two values ‘__________’ and ‘__________’.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) False
(E) Logical
Answer:
(C) True, (D) False

Question 27.
Operators are used to do __________ and __________ operations.
(A) Positive
(B) Negative
(C) True
(D) Arithmetic
(E) Logical
Answer:
(D) Arithmetic, (E) Logical

Question 28.
Java script supports two types of comments __________ & __________
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Multiline Comment
(E) Programming
Answer:
(B) Single line comment, (D) Multiline Comment

Question 29.
Confirm() function displays confirmation message box with __________ and __________ button.
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Multiline comment
(E) Programming
Answer:
(A) Ok, (C) Cancel

Question 30.
A Function in any __________ and __________ languages is small part of program that we require again and again.
(A) Ok
(B) Single line comment
(C) Cancel
(D) Scripting
(E) Programming
Answer:
(D) Scripting, (E) Programming

Question 31.
Functions can be called either by an __________ or by giving __________ to that function.
(A) Event
(B) User
(C) Application
(D) Call
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(A) Event, (D) Call

Question 32.
Event is an action done by the __________ or an __________
(A) Event
(B) User
(C) Application
(D) Call
(E) Attributes
Answer:
(B) User, (C) Application

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
The popular extensions of image file are __________, __________ and __________
(A) Left
(B) Png
(C) Right
(D) Jpg
(E) Gif
Answer:
(B) Png, (D) Jpg, (E) Gif

Question 2.
It aligns the table either to the __________, __________ or __________
(A) Left
(B) Png
(C) Right
(D) Center
(E) Gif
Answer:
(A) Left, (C) Right, (D) Center

Question 3.
__________, __________, __________ tags can have bgcolor attribute for specifying background color to a row or a column respectively.
(A) <tr>
(B) <th>
(C) <td>
(D) Name
(E) Size
Answer:
(A) <tr>, (B) <th>, (C) <td>

Question 4.
The attributes of <select> tag are __________, __________ & __________
(A) Name
(B) Alphabets
(C) Multiple
(D) Numbers
(E) Size
Answer:
(A) Name, (C) Multiple, (E) Size

Question 5.
When we store information it is in the form of __________, __________ or __________ values.
(A) Name
(B) Alphabets
(C) Multiple
(D) Numbers
(E) Alphanumeric
Answer:
(B) Alphabets, (D) Numbers, (E) Alphanumeric

Question 6.
In JavaScript null is, just a value which means “__________”, “__________”, “__________”
(A) Nothing
(B) Empty
(C) Unknown
(D) Arithmetic
(E) Relational
Answer:
(A) Nothing, (B) Empty, (C) Unknown

Question 7.
Most of the operators can be divided into groups __________, __________ and __________ operators.
(A) Nothing
(B) Empty
(C) Arithmetic
(D) Relational
(E) Logical
Answer:
(C) Arithmetic, (D) Relational, (E) Logical

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) World Wide Web (A) A collection of interlinked web page
(2) Webpage (B) Web
(3) Website (C) A simple text file created using HTML
(4) Web Browser (D) A web browser is a software used to view web pages

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) World Wide Web (B) Web
(2) Webpage (C) A simple text file created using HTML
(3) Website (A) A collection of interlinked web page
(4) Web Browser (D) A web browser is a software used to view web pages

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Web Server (A) A protocol used by WWW
(2) Uniform Resource Locator (B) An application or a computer that sends webpages
(3) HyperText Transfer Protocol (C) An address of a web page on the internet
(4) Hyper Text Markup Language (D) Enables to write code for a webpage

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Web Server (B) An application or a computer that sends webpages
(2) Uniform Resource Locator (C) An address of a web page on the internet
(3) HyperText Transfer Protocol (A) A protocol used by WWW
(4) Hyper Text Markup Language (D) Enables to write code for a webpage

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Container Tags (A) Defines a header
(2) Empty tags (B) Paired tags
(3) <!DOCTYPE html> (C) Standalone tags
(4) <header> (D) A document type declaration

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Container Tags (B) Paired tags
(2) Empty tags (C) Standalone tags
(3) <!DOCTYPE html> (D) A document type declaration
(4) <header> (A) Defines a header

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <nav> (A) Defines a container
(2) <section> (B) Defines an independent self-contained article
(3) <article> (C) Defines a section
(4) <aside> (D) Defines content apart from the content

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <nav> (A) Defines a container
(2) <section> (C) Defines a section
(3) <article> (B) Defines an independent self-contained article
(4) <aside> (D) Defines content apart from the content

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <footer> (A) Defines additional details
(2) <details> (B) Displays text within it in italicized manner
(3) <b> (C) Displays text within it in Bold
(4) <i> (D) Defines a footer

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <footer> (D) Defines a footer
(2) <details> (A) Defines additional details
(3) <b> (C) Displays text within it in Bold
(4) <i> (B) Displays text within it in italicized manner

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <u> (A) Displays text with underline
(2) <small> (B) Displays text in subscript form
(3) <sub> (C) Displays text in small font size
(4) <ins> (D) Anything that appears within <ins>…</ins> element is displayed as inserted text

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <u> (A) Displays text with underline
(2) <small> (C) Displays text in small font size
(3) <sub> (B) Displays text in subscript form
(4) <ins> (D) Anything that appears within

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <del> (A) Smallest heading level
(2) <mark> (B) Largest heading level
(3) <H1> (C) The HTML element defines marked or highlighted text
(4) <H6> (D) Anything that appears within <del>…</del>… element, is displayed as deleted text

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <del> (D) Anything that appears within <del>…</del>… element, is displayed as deleted text
(2) <mark> (C) The HTML element defines marked or highlighted text
(3) <H1> (B) Largest heading level
(4) <H6> (A) Smallest heading level

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1)  <IMG> tag (A) Specifies the width of the image
(2) src (B) It is used to specify the path of an image file
(3) Height (C) Specifies the height of the image
(4) Width (D) Insert an image

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1)  <IMG> tag (D) Insert an image
(2) src (B) It is used to specify the path of an image file
(3) Height (C) Specifies the height of the image
(4) Width (A) Specifies the width of the image

Question 9.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) alt (A) It is referred to as alternate text
(2) <HR> tag (B) Define paragraphs
(3) <P> tag (C) Display horizontal ruled line
(4) table (D) Rows and column

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) alt (A) It is referred as alternate text
(2) <HR> tag (C) Display horizontal ruled line
(3) <P> tag (B) Define paragraphs
(4) table (D) Rows and column

Question 10.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <table> (A) It indicates table heading
(2) <caption> (B) It is used to speedy a table heading
(3) <tr> (C) Create each row of the table
(4) <th> (D) It is used to indicate creation of a table

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <table> (D) It is used to indicate creation of a table
(2) <caption> (B) It is used to speedy a table heading
(3) <tr> (C) Create each row of the table
(4) <th> (A) It indicates table heading

Question 11.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <td> (A) It specifies data within the table
(2) Border (B) Aligns the table
(3) Border color (C) Displays border in a specific color
(4) Align (D) Display a border

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <td> (A) It specifies data within the table
(2) Border (D) Display a border
(3) Border color (C) Displays border in a specific color
(4) Align (B) Aligns the table

Question 12.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Bgcolor (A) Creates a checkbox
(2) <Input type =”text”> (B) Creates a one line textbox
(3) <Input type =”radio”> (C) Creates a radio button
(4) <Input type =”checkbox”> (D) Sets the background color

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Bgcolor (D) Sets the background color
(2) <Input type =”text”> (B) Creates a one line textbox
(3) <Input type =”radio”> (C) Creates a radio button
(4) <Input type =”checkbox”> (A) Creates a checkbox

Question 13.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <Input type =”submit”> (A) Displays a button for submitting
(2) <Input type =”password”> (B) The reset control clears the text content
(3) <Input type =”reset”> (C) Create text contents in the form of ‘*’asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc
(4) <Input type =”button”> (D) Displays push button

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) <Input type =”submit”> (A) Displays a button for submitting
(2) <Input type =”password”> (C) Create text contents in the form of ‘*’asterik or ‘ . ‘ disc
(3) <Input type =”reset”> (B) The reset control clears the text content
(4) <Input type =”button”> (D) Displays push button

Question 14.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Number type (A) Division by 0
(2) String Type (B) Storing text
(3) Boolean Type (C) ‘True’ and ‘False’
(4) Infinity (D) ‘Number’ data type

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Number type (D) ‘Number’ data type
(2) String Type (B) Storing text
(3) Boolean Type (C) ‘True’ and ‘False’
(4) Infinity (A) Division by 0

Question 15.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Null (A) “Nothing”, “Empty”, “Unknown”
(2) Undefined (B) Arithmetic and logical operations
(3) Operators (C) Variable which is declared but not assigned
(4) One operand (D) Unary operator

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Null (A) “Nothing”, “Empty”, “Unknown”
(2) Undefined (C) Variable which is declared but not assigned
(3) Operators (B) Arithmetic and logical operations
(4) One operand (D) Unary operator

Question 16.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Two operands (A) Mathematical expressions
(2) Arithmetic operators (B) Binary operator
(3) Relational operators (C) Check conditions or comparison of operands
(4) Comments (D) Non-executable statements

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Two operands (B) Binary operator
(2) Arithmetic operators (A) Mathematical expressions
(3) Relational operators (C) Check conditions or comparison of operands
(4) Comments (D) Non-executable statements

Question 17.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) ParseInt() (A) Number
(2) ParseFloat() (B) Floating point
(3) Alert() (C) Displays ok and cancel buttons
(4) Prompt() (D) Message box

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) ParseInt() (A) Number
(2) ParseFloat() (B) Floating point
(3) Alert() (D) Message box
(4) Prompt() (C) Displays ok and cancel buttons

Question 18.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Confirm() (A) Function displays a confirmation message box
(2) toLowerCase() (B) Convert the given string into lower case alphabets
(3) toUpperCase() (C) Convert given string into uppercase alphabets
(4) onMouseOut (D) When the user moves the mouse away from an element

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Confirm() (A) Function displays a confirmation message box
(2) toLowerCase() (B) Convert the given string into lower case alphabets
(3) toUpperCase() (C) Convert given string into uppercase alphabets
(4) onMouseOut (D) When the user moves the mouse away from an element

Question 19.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) onClick (A) When the user presses a key
(2) onMouseOver (B) When the user moves the mouse over an element
(3) onMouseUp (C) When the user releases a mouse button over an element
(4) onKeyDown (D) When a user clicks an element
(5) onKeyUp (E) When the user releases key

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) onClick (D) When a user clicks an element
(2) onMouseOver (B) When the user moves the mouse over an element
(3) onMouseUp (C) When the user releases a mouse button over an element
(4) onKeyDown (A) When the user presses a key
(5) onKeyUp (E) When the user releases key

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What is Internet?
Answer:

  1. Online resources have become a part of our day-to-day life.
  2. The Internet is a powerful medium to transmit information.
  3. The pages of the information displayed on the internet are referred to as Webpages.
  4. The standards and formats for presenting text and graphics on the internet are developed and approved by worldwide web governing authorities.
  5. The growing demand for attractive presentation of information using electronic means gave rise to the invention of Websites.

Question 2.
Discuss the Components of the web.
Answer:

  1. WWW stands for world wide web.
  2. WWW stands for world wide web normally referred to as Web.
  3. The webpage is a simple text file created using HTML.
  4. A website is a collection of interlinked web pages containing text, images, audio, and videos.
  5. A web browser is software used to view web pages or websites available on the internet.
  6. A Web server is an application or a computer that sends webpages over the internet using the HTTP protocol.
  7. The functionality of the website is managed by the webserver.
  8. The full form of URL is Uniform Resource Locator.
  9. Uniform Resource Locator is an address of a web page on the internet.
  10. The web pages are retrieved from the original location with the help of a Uniform Resource Locator.
  11. The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
  12. HyperText Transfer Protocol is a protocol used by WWW for client-server communication.
  13. The full form of HTML is HyperText Markup Language.
  14. HyperText Markup Language enables to write code for a webpage.
  15. All the web pages in a website are linked with one another, with the help of Hypertext Links.

Question 3.
What is HTML?
Answer:

  1. HyperText Markup Language is a standard language for developing and creating interactive websites, introduced by Tim Berners Lee.
  2. HyperText Markup Language documents are created in any text editor and can be run(executed) on any computer that has a web browser.
  3. HyperText Markup Language is compatible with most web browsers.

Question 4.
Write down the classification of HTML Tags.
Answer:
HTML tags are categorized as Container tags & Empty tags

  1. Container Tags are also called paired tags.
  2. Container Tags have a beginning tag and an end tag.
  3. Empty Tags are standalone tags and do not have an end tag.

Question 5.
Discuss the structure of a web page using HTML5.
Answer:

  1. <header> defines a header for a document or a section.
  2. <nav> defines a container for navigation links.
  3. <seetion> defines a section in a document.
  4. <article> defines an independent self-contained article.
  5. <aside> defines content apart from the content (like a sidebar).
  6. <footer> defines a footer for a document or a section.
  7. <details> defines additional details.

Question 6.
Explain the Text formatting element.
Answer:

  1. Text formatting is used to make a document look attractive thereby enhancing its appearance.
  2. <b> displays text within it in Bold like Hello.
  3. <i> displays text within it in an italicized manner like Hello.
  4. <u> displays text with an underline like Hello.
  5. <small> displays text in small font size.
  6. <sub> displays text in subscript form.
  7. <sup> displays text in superscript form.
  8. The HTML <mark> element defines marked or highlighted text.

Question 7.
Explain Heading levels.
Answer:

  1. HTML provides six levels of heading tags.
  2. The <H1> tag displays text in bold and with the largest heading level.
  3. The <H6> tag displays text in the smallest heading level.

Question 8.
Explain Inserting an image, a horizontal ruled line, and a paragraph.
Answer:

  1. <IMG> tag is used to insert an image within a webpage.
  2. src is used to specify the path of an image file.
  3. Height specifies the height of the image in pixels.
  4. Width specifies the width of the image in pixels.
  5. Alt is referred to as alternate text.
  6. <IMG> is an empty tag.
  7. <hr> tag is used to display horizontal ruled line.
  8. color sets the color for the horizontal ruled line.
  9. Width specifies the length of the ruled line in % or pixels.
  10. Size sets the thickness of a ruled line.
  11. <P> tag is used to define paragraphs.

Question 9.
Write a note on creating a table.
Answer:

  1. A Table is made up of rows and columns.
  2. <table> is used to indicate the creation of a table.
  3. <caption> is used to specify a table heading.
  4. <tr> tag is used to create each row of the table.
  5. <th> indicates table heading.
  6. <td> specifies data within the table (cell content).

Question 10.
Discuss the attributes of the table.
Answer:

  1. A border attribute is required to display a border for the entire table.
  2. Border color displays borders in a specific color.
  3. Aligns the table either to the left, right, or center.
  4. Bgcolor sets the background color for the table.

Question 11.
Explain Creating hyperlinks in a web page and HTML Link colors.
Answer:

  1. Hyperlinks are used to connect one document with another document.
  2. In HTML, Links are created by using <a> tag.
  3. A Hyperlink by default appears blue in colour with an underline.
  4. A Visited link is underlined and purple.
  5. An Active link is underlined and blue.

Question 12.
Discuss the Forms in HTML.
Answer:

  1. Forms in HTML are used to accept user input.
  2. A Form is a collection of different elements also called controls.
  3. Name attributes specifies a name to a form.
  4. The Action attribute specifies the path where the form is to be submitted.
  5. The Method attribute specifies the get or post method to be used when submitting the form data.
  6. The default method of submitting form data is GET.
  7. The data submitted by using GET is visible in the address bar.
  8. The POST method of sending data does not display the form data in the address bar.

Question 13.
Explain the <Input> tag and type of control.
Answer:

  1. <Input type = “text”> creates a one-line Textbox.
  2. <Input type = “radio”> creates a Radio button.
  3. The Radio button allows one option selection against multiple choices.
  4. <Input type = “checkbox’^ creates a Checkbox.
  5. A checkbox allows more than one selection against multiple choices.
  6. <Input type = “submit”> displays a button for Submitting the form data to a server.
  7. The Password input type is used to create text contents in the form of ‘*’ asterisk or ‘•’ disc.
  8. The Reset control clears the text content entered in the form.
  9. <Input type = “Button.”> displays push button which activates on events.

Question 14.
Write down the attributes of <Input>.
Answer:

  1. The type describes the name of the control like text radio.
  2. The Name attribute is a user-defined value.
  3. Maxlength attribute is used with text and password type.
  4. Max length specifies the maximum number of characters that can be entered in a text or password box.
  5. The ‘Size’ attribute can be used with text and password type.
  6. Size specifies the width of the text box.
  7. The ‘Checked’ attribute specifies the default selection for options in a checkbox or radio button.
  8. The ‘Value’ attribute can be used with text, checkbox, radio, submit or reset.

Question 15.
Explain <Textarea> tag and its attribute.
Answer:

  1. The <Textarea> tag is used to create a textbox with multiple lines.
  2. Name is used to specify a name for the textarea.
  3. Rows specify the number of lines in a text area.
  4. Cols specify the width of a text area.
  5. Max length specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in the textarea.
  6. Placeholder specifies a short hint that describes the expected value of a textarea.
  7. Required specifies that textarea must be filled out. i.e. It can not be blank.

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <select> and <option> tag.
Answer:

  1. <select> tag is used to create drop-down list.
  2. Name assigns a name to the control.
  3. Multiple allows the user to select more than one value.
  4. The Size attribute is used to specify the number of visible values.
  5. To define the preselected option, the ‘Selected‘ attribute is added to the <option>.
  6. Value assigns value to the option specified in the dropdown list.

Question 17.
Write down Scripting in HTML.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript was initially created to make web pages alive.
  2. A Script is a list of commands that are executed by a scripting engine.
  3. Scripts are used to generate dynamic Web pages on the Web.
  4. JavaScript can be used for the client-side or server-side scripting language.
  5. JavaScript code can be inserted in HTML program between <script> and </script> tag.
  6. The language attribute is used to set scripting language.

Question 18.
Explain Variables.
Answer:

  1. A Variable is a basic unit of storage in a JavaScript program.
  2. The variable name may consist of alphabets, digits and underscore, and dollar characters with the following rules.
  3. Standard keywords are not allowed as Variable names.
  4. Variable names can be limited to up to 255 characters.
  5. Variable name in javascript is declared with keyword ‘var’.

Question 19.
Explain Data Types.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript provides data types to store and use different types of values.
  2. Numerical value specially belongs to the ‘Number’ data type.
  3. Number data types can hold positive as well as negative values.
  4. Strings are used for storing text.
  5. Boolean type represents only two values ‘true’ and ‘false’.
  6. JavaScript returns ‘Undefined’ when a variable is declared but not assigned.

Question 20.
Discuss Operators and types of Operators.
Answer:

  1. Operators are used to doing arithmetic and logical operations.
  2. Operators that require one operand is called as Unary operator.
  3. Operators that require two operands are called Binary operators.
  4. Arithmetic operators are used in mathematical expressions.
  5. It is important to know that the Assignment operator is not ‘equal to’ operator.
  6. The assignment operator is used to assign the value of an expression to a variable.
  7. Relational operators are used to checking conditions or comparisons of operands.
  8. Logical operators are used to verifying more than one condition at a time or to negate the condition.
  9. The increment (++) operator in JavaScript is used to increment the value of the variable by one.
  10. Decrement operator in JavaScript is used to decrement the value of the variable by one.

Question 21.
Explain Comments in JavaScript.
Answer:

  1. Comments are non-executable statements in the program.
  2. Comments are used to provide information or explanation about your programming construct.
  3. Statements added in Comments are ignored by JavaScript.

Question 22.
What is Function and commonly used Built-In Functions in JavaScript?
Answer:

  1. The function is used to perform repetitive tasks whenever required.
  2. The function is a reusable code block that will be executed when it is called.
  3. parselnt() function is used to parse a string and convert it into a number
  4. parseFloat() function is used to parse a string and convert it into floating-point representation.
  5. alert() function displays an alert popup box with an ok button. This is also called a message box
  6. prompt() function is used when you want input value from the user at the time of program execution.
  7. confirm() function displays a confirmation message box with ok and cancels button
  8. toLowerCase() string function used to convert the given string into lower case alphabets
  9. toUpperCase() string function is used to convert given string into uppercase alphabets
  10. isNaN() returns ‘true’ if given value is not a number. It returns ‘false’ if the given value is a number.

Question 23.
What are User Defined Functions?
Answer:

  1. A Function in any scripting and programming language is small part of a program that we require again and again.
  2. A Function is a subprogram designed to perform a particular task.
  3. Functions can be called either by an event or by giving a call to that function.

Question 24.
Explain Event Handling.
Answer:

  1. JavaScript is an event-driven language.
  2. An event is an action done by the user or an application.
  3. JavaScript lets you execute a code when events are detected.

Question 25.
Explain Event Handler.
Answer:

  1. onMouseOut when the user moves the mouse away from an element.
  2. onClick when the user clicks an element.
  3. onMouseOver when the user moves the mouse over an element.
  4. onMouseUp when the user releases a mouse button over an element.

8A. Write Codes in HTML.

Question 1.
My First Page in HTML
Answer:
<html>
<head>
<title> First Page </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = green >
<font color=”red” size=”20″> This is my first web page
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q1

Question 2.
Write the the HTML Program which contains Text Formatting Elements.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Example of HTML5 text formatting tags</title>
</head>
<body>
<b>This text is bold</b><br><br>
<i>This text is italic</i><br><br>
<mark>This text is marked</ mark><br><br>
This is <sub>subscript</sub> and <sup>superscript</sup><br><br>
<ins>This text is inserted to the document</ins><br><br>
<del>This text is deleted from the document</del><br><br>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q2

Question 3.
Write down the HTML program which provides six levels of the heading tags.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Heading levels</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=skyblue>
<H1>Heading level 1 Text is largest in size</H1>
<H2>Heading level 2</H2>
<H3>Heading level 3</H3>
<H4>Heading level 4</H4>
<H5>Heading level 5</H5>
<H6>Heading level 6 Text is smallest in size</H6>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q3

Question 4.
Create a table in HTML which contains 4 rows and 3 columns.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Table with 4 rows and 3 columns</title>
</head>
<body>
<table border=”2″>
<tr>
<th>Sr. No.</th>
<th>Input Device</th>
<th>Output Device</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Keyboard</td>
<td>Monitor</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Mouse</td>
<td>Printer</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td> Joystick</td>
<td>Plotter</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body></html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q4

Question 5.
Create a table in HTML with rowspan attribute.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Table with rowspan attribute</title>
</head><body>
<table border=”3″>
<tr>
<td rowspan=2>Colors</td>
<td bgcolor=red>Red</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td bgcolor=green>Green</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q5

Question 6.
Create a table in HTML with col span attribute.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Table with colspan</title>
</head>
<body>
<table border =”3″>
<tr>
<td colspan=”2″ align=”center”> Colors </td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td bgcolor=red>Red</td>
<td bgcolor=green>Green</td>
</tr>
</table>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q6

Question 7.
Create a Form with input elements in HTML.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Form with Input elements</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”orange”>
<h1>use of form</h1>
<form>
Enter your name
<input type=”text” Name-‘n1″ max length=”20″><Br>
Enter your standard:
<input type=”radio” name=”r1″ value =”11″>
11<sup>th</sup>
<input type=”radio” name=”r1″ value=”12″>
12<sup>th</sup><br>
Choose your optional subjects : <br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”Hindi”>Hindi<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”German”>German<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”Biology”>Biology<br>
<input type=”checkbox” name=”c1″ Value=”IT”>IT<br>
<input type=”submit” value=”Submit”><br>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q7

Question 8.
Create a Form element and textarea in HTML.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Form elements and textarea</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor = “cyan” text=”Red”>
<h1> Use of form elements </h1>
<form method = “post” action = “data.php”>
Enter your name:
<input type = “text” name = “fn”> <br>
Select your city :
<select name=”ct”>
<option>Pune</option>
<option>Nagpur</option>
<option>Solapur</option>
</select><br>
Enter your address: <textarea name = “address” rows = “3” cols = “30”placeholder = “your address” required>
</textarea> <br>
<input type = “submit” value = “send”>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q8

Question 9.
Write down the HTML 5 program it includes semantic tags like header, footer & nav.
Answer:
<!Doctype Html>
<html>
<head>
<title> Html 5 program it includes semantic tags like header, footer & nav </title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=yellow>
<header>
<h1>HTML5 includes new semantics</h1>
<p>It includes semantic tags like header, footer, nav </header>
<header>
<h1>Example of complete HTML5 Basics</h1>
<h2>The markup of the future under development.</h2>
</header>
<nav>
<h1><p>The nav element represents a section of navigation links. It is suitable for either site navigation or a table of contents.</p></h1>
<a href=”/”>http://www.gmail.com</a><br><a href=”http://www.facebook.com”>Facebook website</a><br>
</nav>
<aside>
<h1>Other education based websites of State</h1>
<a href=”http://mahahsscboard.ac.in”>State Board website</a><br>
<a href=”http://examinfo.mhhsc.ac.in”>Online Exam Website<a/><br>
</aside>
<section>
<h1>Impressive Web Designing</h1>
<p>The aside element is for content that is tangentially related to the content around it, and is typically useful for marking up sidebars.</p></section><section> <h1>Articles on:Article tag</h1>
</section>
<article>
<p>The article element represents an independent section of a document, page or site. It is suitable for content like news or blog articles, forum posts or individual comments.</p>
</article>
<footer>© 2020 Reliable.</footer>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8A Q9

8B. Write a program in Javascript.

Question 1.
Write a JavaScript program to calculate the multiplication of two numbers.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>multiplication of two numbers</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”yellow”>
<h1>Program to calculate multiplication of two numbers </h1>
<script language=”javascript”>
var a,b,c;
a=75; b=100.45;
c=a*b;
document.write(“<br><h1>multiplication of two numbers : “+c+”</h1>”);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q1

Question 2.
Write a program to calculate the area of a circle.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Area of circle</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=yellow>
<h1> Program to calculate area of circle </h1>
<script language=”javascript”>
var r,area;
r=prompt(“Enter the radius of circle”);
area=3.14*r*r;
document.write(“<h1>you entered radius value: </h1>” +r);
document.write(“<h1>Area of circle is: </h1>”+area);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q2.1

Question 3.
Write a Program to check number is even or odd.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>Program to check number is even or odd</title>
</head>
<body bgcolor=”green”>
<h1> Program to check number is even or odd </h1>
<script language=”javascript”> var a,b
a=prompt(“Enter your value:-“);
b=parseInt(a);
// input is converted into number data type
if(b%2==0)
alert(“Number is even”); else
alert(“Number is odd”);
</script>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3.1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q3.2

Question 4.
Write a Java Script Program which contains Conditional Statement.
Answer:
<!DOCTYPE html>
<html>
<head>
<title>conditional statement</title>
<script language=”javascript”>
function check()
{
var age;
age=form1.t1.value;
if(age>=18)
alert(“Qualifies for driving”);
else
alert(”Does not qualifies for driving”);
}
</script>
</head>
<body>
<form name=”form 1″>
<center>Enter your age:-<input type=”text” name=”t1″><br><br>
<input type=”button” value=”SUBMIT” onClick=”check()”>
</form>
</body>
</html>

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.1
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 3 Impressive Web Designing 8B Q4.3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
A ___________ often abbreviated as DB.
Answer:
Database

Question 2.
___________ is collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
Database

Question 3.
Full for of DBMS is ___________
Answer:
Database Management System

Question 4.
A ___________ is a software for creating and managing databases.
Answer:
Database Management System

Question 5.
The ___________ provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
Answer:
Database Management System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 6.
___________ holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
CHAR

Question 7.
___________ holds a variable length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
VARCHAR

Question 8.
___________ can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
Answer:
DECIMAL

Question 9.
___________ is used for storing integer values.
Answer:
INT

Question 10.
___________ holds the date including day, month and year.
Answer:
DATE

Question 11.
___________ holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
Answer:
TIME()

Question 12.
This logical structure of database is known as a ___________
Answer:
Model

Question 13.
___________ define how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
Answer:
Data model

Question 14.
___________ describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
Answer:
Data model

Question 15.
___________ is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
Answer:
Relational data model

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 16.
___________ is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
Answer:
Relational data model

Question 17.
___________ ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
Answer:
Atomicity

Question 18.
___________ ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
Answer:
Consistency

Question 19.
___________ enables transactions to operate independently of and transparent to each other.
Answer:
Isolation

Question 20.
___________ ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
Answer:
Durability

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for ___________
Answer:
Relational Database Management System

Question 22.
In ___________ a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
Relational Database Management System

Question 23.
The ___________ is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
Answer:
Table

Question 24.
___________ consists of columns and rows.
Answer:
Table

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 25.
A ___________ consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
Answer:
Database

Question 26.
___________ designer decides the name of the table and titles of columns.
Answer:
Database

Question 27.
A ___________ is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
Answer:
Record

Question 28.
Record is also called as a ___________
Answer:
Tuple

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a ___________ of the table.
Answer:
Key

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its ___________
Answer:
Primary Key

Question 31.
___________ is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
Answer:
Foreign Key

Question 32.
___________ link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
Answer:
Relationships

Question 33.
A ___________ in the context of databases, is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
Answer:
Relationship

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 34.
In a ___________ relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
Answer:
One-to-One

Question 35.
___________ relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at it.
Answer:
One-to-Many

Question 36.
A ___________ relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
Answer:
Many-to-Many

Question 37.
Full form of SQL is ___________
Answer:
Structured Query Language

Question 38.
___________ is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
Structured Query Language

Question 39.
Full form of DDL is ___________
Answer:
Data Definition Language

Question 40.
___________ statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
Answer:
Data Definition Language

Question 41.
Full form of DML is ___________
Answer:
Data Manipulation Language

Question 42.
___________ statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
Answer:
Data Manipulation Language

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 43.
Full form of DCL is ___________
Answer:
Data Control Language

Question 44.
___________ is used to control user access in a database.
Answer:
Data Control Language

2. True or False.

Question 1.
A database is often abbreviated as DB.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Hardware is a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
The full form of DBMS is Database Management System.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
A Database Management System is software for creating and managing databases.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 5.
Information Technology provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
DECIMAL holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
False

Question 7.
VARCHAR holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
Answer:
True

Question 8.
CHAR can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
INT is used for storing integer values.
Answer:
True

Question 10.
TIME() holds the date including day, month, and year.
Answer:
False

Question 11.
DATE holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
Answer:
False

Question 12.
This logical structure of the database is known as a computer.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
Information Technology defines how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 14.
The data model describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
The relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
Answer:
True

Question 16.
The relational data model is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Consistency ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Atomicity ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
Isolation enables transactions to operate independently of and be transparent to each other.
Answer:
True

Question 20.
Durability ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
In Relational Database Management System a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
The Table is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
Answer:
True

Question 24.
The table consists of columns and rows.
Answer:
True

Question 25.
A record consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 26.
The record designer decides the name of the table and the titles of columns.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
A Tuple is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
Answer:
False

Question 28.
Record is also called a Tuple.
Answer:
True

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a Key of the table.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its Primary Key.
Answer:
True

Question 31.
Foreign Key is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
Answer:
True

Question 32.
Relationships link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
Answer:
True

Question 33.
A Relationship in the context of databases is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
In a Many-to-Many relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 35.
One-to-Many relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at them.
Answer:
True

Question 36.
A One-to-One relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
Answer:
False

Question 37.
The full form of SQL is Structured Query Language.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
Data Definition Language is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
Answer:
False

Question 39.
The full form of DDL is Data Definition Language.
Answer:
True

Question 40.
Structured Query Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
Answer:
False

Question 41.
The full form of DML is Data Manipulation Language.
Answer:
True

Question 42.
Data Definition Language statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
Answer:
False

Question 43.
The full form of DCL is Data Control Language.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 44.
Data Manipulation Language is used to control user access in a database.
Answer:
False

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
A ___________ often abbreviated as DB.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Direct Bank
Answer:
(A) Database

Question 2.
___________ is a collection of interrelated data.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Direct Bank
Answer:
(A) Database

Question 3.
Full form of DBMS is ___________
(A) Database Machine System
(B) Direct Banking Management System
(C) Data Bank Management
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Question 4.
A ___________ is a software for creating and managing databases.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 5.
The ___________ provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.
(A) Database
(B) Direct Banking
(C) Data Bank
(D) Database Management System
Answer:
(D) Database Management System

Question 6.
___________ holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(A) CHAR

Question 7.
___________ holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(B) VARCHAR

Question 8.
___________ can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(C) DECIMAL

Question 9.
___________ is used for storing integer values.
(A) CHAR
(B) VARCHAR
(C) DECIMAL
(D) INT
Answer:
(D) INT

Question 10.
___________ holds the date including day, month and year.
(A) DATE
(B) TIME()
(C) CHAR
(D) VARCHAR
Answer:
(A) DATE

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 11.
___________ holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.
(A) DATE
(B) TIME()
(C) CHAR
(D) VARCHA
Answer:
(B) TIME()

Question 12.
This logical structure of database is known as a ___________
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(A) Model

Question 13.
___________ define how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(B) Data model

Question 14.
___________ describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(B) Data model

Question 15.
___________ is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(D) Relational data model

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 16.
___________ is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.
(A) Model
(B) Data model
(C) Storage and Processing
(D) Relational data model
Answer:
(D) Relational data model

Question 17.
___________ ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(A) Atomicity

Question 18.
___________ ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(B) Consistency

Question 19.
___________ enables transactions to operate independently of and transparent to each other.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(C) Isolation

Question 20.
___________ ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.
(A) Atomicity
(B) Consistency
(C) Isolation
(D) Durability
Answer:
(D) Durability

Question 21.
RDBMS stands for ___________
(A) Relational Database Management System
(B) Regional Database Management System
(C) Recovery Database Management System
(D) Recovery Database Microsoft System
Answer:
(A) Relational Database Management System

Question 22.
In ___________ a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.
(A) Relational Database Management System
(B) Regional Database Management System
(C) Recovery Database Management System
(D) Recovery Database Microsoft System
Answer:
(A) Relational Database Management System

Question 23.
The ___________ is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(A) Table

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 24.
___________ consists of columns and rows.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(A) Table

Question 25.
A ___________ consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(B) Database

Question 26.
___________ designer decides the name of the table and titles of columns.
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(B) Database

Question 27.
A ___________ is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(C) Record

Question 28.
Record is also called as a ___________
(A) Table
(B) Database
(C) Record
(D) Tuple
Answer:
(D) Tuple

Question 29.
A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a ___________ of the table.
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Key

Question 30.
The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its ___________
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(B) Primary Key

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 31.
___________ is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.
(A) Key
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(C) Foreign Key

Question 32.
___________ link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
(A) Relationships
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Relationships

Question 33.
A ___________ in the context of databases, is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.
(A) Relationship
(B) Primary Key
(C) Foreign Key
(D) Table
Answer:
(A) Relationship

Question 34.
In a ___________ relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(A) One-to-One

Question 35.
___________ relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at it.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(B) One-to-Many

Question 36.
A ___________ relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.
(A) One-to-One
(B) One-to-Many
(C) Many-to-Many
(D) Database
Answer:
(C) Many-to-Many

Question 37.
Full form of SQL is ___________
(A) Structured Query Language
(B) Structured Question Language
(C) Sequence Question Language
(D) Simple Query Language
Answer:
(A) Structured Query Language

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 38.
___________ is the standard language for Relational Database Management System.
(A) Structured Query Language
(B) Structured Question Language
(C) Sequence Question Language
(D) Simple Query Language
Answer:
(A) Structured Query Language

Question 39.
Full form of DDL is ___________
(A) Data Definition Language
(B) Database Device Language
(C) Device Definition Language
(D) Data Division Language
Answer:
(A) Data Definition Language

Question 40.
___________ statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
(A) Data Definition Language
(B) Database Device Language
(C) Device Definition Language
(D) Data Division Language
Answer:
(A) Data Definition Language

Question 41.
Full form of DML is ___________
(A) Data Manipulation Language
(B) Data Machine Language
(C) Data Management Language
(D) Device Manipulation Language
Answer:
(A) Data Manipulation Language

Question 42.
___________ statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
(A) Data Manipulation Language
(B) Data Machine Language
(C) Data Management Language
(D) Device Manipulation Language
Answer:
(A) Data Manipulation Language

Question 43.
Full form of DCL is ___________
(A) Dynamic Control Language
(B) Data Control Language
(C) Data Control List
(D) Dynamic Control List
Answer:
(B) Data Control Language

Question 44.
___________ is used to control user access in a database.
(A) Dynamic Control Language
(B) Data Control Language
(C) Data Control List
(D) Dynamic Control List
Answer:
(B) Data Control Language

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answers.

Question 1.
A Database Management System is a software for ___________ and ___________ databases.
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Managing
(E) Processing
Answer:
(A) Creating, (D) Managing

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 2.
Data model describes the method of ___________ and ___________ the data.
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Managing
(E) Processing
Answer:
(B) Storing, (C) Retrieving

Question 3.
Relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for ___________ and ___________
(A) Creating
(B) Storing
(C) Retrieving
(D) Data storage
(E) Processing
Answer:
(D) Data storage, (E) Processing

Question 4.
Relational data model is simple and has all the ___________ and ___________ required to process data with storage efficiency.
(A) Properties
(B) Capabilities
(C) Retrieving
(D) Data storage
(E) Processing
Answer:
(A) Properties, (B) Capabilities

Question 5.
A table consists of information which is stored under different headings, called as ___________ or ___________
(A) Properties
(B) Fields
(C) Capabilities
(D) Retrieving
(E) Columns
Answer:
(B) Fields, (E) Columns

Question 6.
Table consists of ___________ and ___________
(A) Properties
(B) Fields
(C) Capabilities
(D) Columns
(E) Rows
Answer:
(D) Columns, (E) Rows

Question 7.
A Database consists of one or more ___________ according to which ___________ is stored in a table.
(A) Tables
(B) Data
(C) Capabilities
(D) Columns
(E) Rows
Answer:
(A) Tables, (B) Data

Question 8.
Database designer decides the name of the ___________ and ___________ of columns.
(A) Schema
(B) Table
(C) Fields
(D) Titles
(E) Capabilities
Answer:
(B) Table, (D) Titles

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 9.
Data Definition Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your ___________ or ___________
(A) Table
(B) Schema
(C) Fields
(D) Titles
(E) Capabilities
Answer:
(A) Table, (B) Schema

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Database Management System stores data in such a way that it becomes easier to ___________, ___________ and ___________
(A) Retrieve
(B) Hierarchical
(C) Manipulate
(D) Update Information
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Retrieve, (C) Manipulate, (D) Update Information

Question 2.
There are different data models like ___________ model, ___________ model and ___________ model.
(A) Network
(B) Hierarchical
(C) Relational
(D) Retrieve
(E) Manipulate
Answer:
(A) Network, (B) Hierarchical, (C) Relational

Question 3.
There are 3 types of relationships in relational database design ___________, ___________ & ___________
(A) Retrieve
(B) Manipulate
(C) One-to-One
(D) One-to-Many (or Many-to-One)
(E) Many-to-Many
Answer:
(C) One-to-One, (D) One-to-Many (or Many-to-One), (E) Many-to-Many

Question 4.
SQL is Structured Query Language, which is a computer language for ___________, ___________ and ___________ data stored in a relational database.
(A) Relational
(B) Storing
(C) Manipulating
(D) Retrieving
(E) Network
Answer:
(B) Storing, (C) Manipulating, (D) Retrieving

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Database (A) Raw facts
(2) Data (B) Creating and managing databases
(3) Information (C) Collection of interrelated data
(4) DBMS (D) Processed data

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Database (C) Collection of interrelated data
(2) Data (A) Raw facts
(3) Information (D) Processed data
(4) DBMS (B) Creating and managing databases

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Advantages of DBMS (A) Authorised users
(2) Data integrity (B) Data is accurate and consistent
(3) Data Security (C) Reducing Data Redundancy
(4) Backup and Recovery (D) Restores the database

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Advantages of DBMS (C) Reducing Data Redundancy
(2) Data integrity (B) Data is accurate and consistent
(3) Data Security (A) Authorised users
(4) Backup and Recovery (D) Restores the database

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) CHAR (A) It is used for storing integer values
(2) VARCHAR (B) It can represent numbers
(3) DECIMAL (C) Holds a variable-length string
(4) INT (D) Holds a fixed-length string

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) CHAR (D) Holds a fixed-length string
(2) VARCHAR (C) Holds a variable-length string
(3) DECIMAL (B) It can represent numbers
(4) INT (A) It is used for storing integer values

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) DATE (A) It holds the date
(2) TIME (B) It holds time
(3) Model (C) Logical structure of database
(4) Relational data model (D) Primary data model

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) DATE (A) It holds the date
(2) TIME (B) It holds time
(3) Model (C) Logical structure of database
(4) Relational data model (D) Primary data model

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Atomicity (A) Successfully committed transaction
(2) Consistency (B) Completed successfully
(3) Isolation (C) Persists in case of a system failure
(4) Durability (D) Operate independently

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Atomicity (B) Completed successfully
(2) Consistency (A) Successfully committed transaction
(3) Isolation (D) Operate independently
(4) Durability (C) Persists in case of a system failure

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) RDBMS (A) Storage unit in a Relational database
(2) Table (B) Collection of interrelated data
(3) Database designer (C) Tuple
(4) Record (D) Decides the name of the table and titles of Columns

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) RDBMS (B) Collection of interrelated data
(2) Table (A) Storage unit in a Relational database
(3) Database designer (D) Decides the name of the table and titles of Columns
(4) Record (C) Tuple

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Key (A) Managing data within tables
(2) Structured Query Language (B) Uniquely identify each row
(3) Data Definition Language (C) Storing, manipulating, and retrieving data
(4) Data Manipulation Language (D) Define and modify the database

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Key (B) Uniquely identify each row
(2) Structured Query Language (C) Storing, manipulating, and retrieving data
(3) Data Definition Language (D) Define and modify the database
(4) Data Manipulation Language (A) Managing data within tables

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) SELECT (A) Extracts data from a table
(2) UPDATE (B) Updates data in a table
(3) DELETE (C) Deletes data from a table
(4) INSERT INTO (D) Insert data into a table

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) SELECT (A) Extracts data from a table
(2) UPDATE (B) Updates data in a table
(3) DELETE (C) Deletes data from a table
(4) INSERT INTO (D) Insert data into a table

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
What are Database and DBMS?
Answer:

  1. A Database is often abbreviated as DB.
  2. A database is a collection of interrelated data.
  3. Full form of DBMS is Database Management System
  4. A Database Management System is software for creating and managing databases.
  5. The Database Management System provides users and programmers with a systematic way to create, retrieve, update and manage data.

Question 2.
Discuss the various Data types.
Answer:

  1. CHAR holds a fixed-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
  2. VARCHAR holds a variable-length string (can contain letters, numbers, and special characters).
  3. DECIMAL can represent numbers with or without the fractional part.
  4. INT is used for storing integer values.
  5. DATE holds the date including day, month, and year.
  6. TIME() holds time. Format: HH:MM:SS.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 3.
Explain Data Model and Relational Model.
Answer:

  1. This logical structure of the database is known as a Model.
  2. The data model defines how the data is connected to each other and how they are processed and stored inside the system.
  3. The data model describes the method of storing and retrieving the data.
  4. The relational data model is the primary data model, which is used widely around the world for data storage and processing.
  5. The relational data model is simple and has all the properties and capabilities required to process data with storage efficiency.

Question 4.
Write down the Properties of Transactions.
Answer:

  1. Atomicity ensures that all operations within the work unit are completed successfully.
  2. Consistency ensures that the database properly changes states upon a successfully committed transaction.
  3. Isolation enables transactions to operate independently of and be transparent to each other.
  4. Durability ensures that the result or effect of a committed transaction persists in case of a system failure.

Question 5.
Explain the concept of RDBMS.
Answer:

  1. RDBMS stands for Relational Database Management System.
  2. In Relational Database Management System a database is considered as a collection of interrelated data.

Question 6.
Discuss the basic database concept.
Answer:

  1. The Table is the basic data storage unit in a Relational database.
  2. The table consists of columns and rows.
  3. A database consists of one or more tables according to which data is stored in a table.
  4. The database designer decides the name of the table and the titles of columns.
  5. A record is composed of fields and contains all the data about one particular person, company, or item in a database.
  6. Record is also called a Tuple,
  7. A column or a combination of columns that can be used to identify one or more rows (tuples) in a table is called a Key of the table.
  8. The group of one or more columns used to uniquely identify each row of a relation is called its Primary Key.
  9. Foreign Key is a field (or collection of fields) in one table that refers to the Primary Key in another table.

Question 7.
Explain Relationships in the database.
Answer:

  1. Relationships link data from individual tables to increase the usefulness of the database.
  2. A Relationship in the context of databases is a situation that exists between two relational database tables.

Question 8.
Discuss the types of relationships in Relational Database Design.
Answer:

  1. In a One-to-One relationship, one record in a table is associated with one and only one record in another table.
  2. One-to-Many relationships can also be viewed as Many-to-One relationships, depending on which way you look at them.
  3. A Many-to-Many relationship occurs when multiple records in a table are associated with multiple records in another table.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 2 Introduction to DBMS

Question 9.
What is SQL and categories of SQL commands?
Answer:

  1. The full form of SQL is Structured Query Language.
  2. Structured Query Language is the standard language for Relational Database Management Systems.
  3. The full form of DDL is Data Definition Language.
  4. Data Definition Language statements or commands are used to define and modify the database structure of your tables or schema.
  5. The full form of DML is Data Manipulation Language.
  6. Data Manipulation Language statements or commands are used for managing data within tables.
  7. The full form of DCL is Data Control Language.
  8. Data Control Language is used to control user access in a database.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 1.
What is the percentage of C02 in the atmosphere?
Answer:
The atmosphere contains only about 0.03 percent C02 by volume.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 2.
Define photosynthesis and give its reaction with the help of solar energy trapped by pigments like chlorophyll.
Answer:
Photosynthesis is defined as the synthesis of carbohydrates (glucose) from inorganic materials like CO2 and H2O with the help of solar energy trapped by pigments like chlorophyll.

Question 3.
Explain diagrammatically the ultrastructure of the chloroplast.
Answer:

  1. The chloroplasts are discoid and lens shaped in higher plants. Chloroplast is bounded by a double membrane.
  2. System of chlorophyll bearing a double-membrane sac is present inside the stroma. These are stacked one above the other to form grana.
  3. Individual sacs in each granum is are known as thylakoid.
  4. All the pigments chlorophylls, carotenes and xanthophylls are located in thylakoid membranes.
  5. These pigments are fat soluble and are present in lipid part of membrane also they absorb light of specific spectrum in the visible regions.

Question 4.
Distinguish between grana and stroma.
Answer:

Grana Stroma
1. These are formed of stacks of thylakoids. It is the matrix of chloroplast.
2. Light reaction occurs in grana. Dark reaction occurs in stroma.

Question 5.
Describe a structure of a chlorophyll molecule.
Answer:
1. Chemically chlorophyll molecule consists of two parts head of tetrapyrrole the porphyrin ring and a long hydrocarbon tail called phytol attached to the porphyrin group.
2. Both chlorophyll-a and chlorophyll-b are similar in their molecular structure, except that the methyl group (-CH3) in chlorophyll-a is replaced with an aldehyde group (-CHO) in chlorophyll-b.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 6.
What are Carotenoids?
Answer:

  1. Carotenoids are lipid compound present universally in almost all the higher plants and several microorganisms.
  2. They are usually red, orange, yellow, brown, and are associated with chlorophyll. They are of two types – the carotenes and xanthophylls.
  3. The carotenes (C40H56) are orange red and xanthophylls contain oxygen.
  4. The light energy absorbed by the carotenoids is transferred to chlorophyll-a to be utilized in photosynthesis.
  5. All photosynthetic plants have these pigments that absorb light between the red and blue region of the
    spectrum.
  6. Carotenoids found mainly in higher plants, absorb primarily in the violet to blue regions of the spectrum.
  7. They not only absorb light energy and transfer it to chlorophyll but also protect the chlorophyll molecule from photo-oxidation.

Question 7.
Write a short note on nature of light.
Answer:

  1. Light is a form of energy.
  2. It travels as stream of tiny particles called photons.
  3. A photon contains a quantum of light.
  4. Light has different wavelengths having different colors.
  5. One can see electromagnetic radiation with wavelengths ranging from 390nm to 730nm. This part of the spectrum is called the Visible light.
  6. It lies between wavelengths of ultraviolet and infra-red.

Question 8.
Draw neat and labelled diagram of absorption and action spectrum.
Answer:
Absorption and action spectra

Question 9.
Write the chemical reaction given by Van Niel in case of bacteria that use H2S and C02 to synthesize carbohydrates. Write his postulate.
Answer:
Chemical reaction given by Van Niel:
6C02 + 12H2S → C6H1206 + 6H20 + 12S ↓
Van Niel’s postulate:
Green plants use water in place of H2S and 02 is evolved in place of sulphur.

Question 10.
What was used by Ruben to confirm that the source of oxygen evolved in photosynthesis is water?
Answer:
Ruben used heavy isotope of oxygen (1802) to confirm that the source of oxygen evolved in photosynthesis is water.

Question 11.
Explain Hill reaction.
Answer:
In this experiment, Hill cultured isolated chloroplasts in a medium containing C02 free water, haemoglobin and ferric compound.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 12.
Give reason. Why photosynthesis is a redox reaction?
Answer:
Photosynthesis is considered as a redox reaction as it involves both reduction and oxidation reactions.
Water is oxidized by the removal of H+ while C02 is reduced by the addition of H+.
The redox reactions of photosynthesis are necessary for the conversion of light energy into chemical energy.

Question 13.
Which are the two reactions involved in the process of photosynthesis.
Answer:

  1. The process of photosynthesis is an oxidation and reduction process in which water is oxidized (to release 02) and C02 is reduced to form sugar. It consists of two successive series of reactions.
  2. The first reaction requires light and is called Light reaction.
  3. Second reaction does not require light and is called Dark or Blackman reaction.
  4. Of the two reactions, the former is a photochemical reaction, while the latter is a biochemical reaction.

Question 14.
What is light reaction?
Answer:
1. The light reaction is a reaction in which solar energy is trapped by chlorophyll and stored in the form of chemical energy as ATP and in the form of reducing power as NADPH2.
2. Oxygen is evolved in the light reaction by splitting of water.

Question 15.
Define: Quantum energy
Answer:
A certain minimum quantity of energy a photon must have to boost an electron is called quantum energy.

Question 16.
What is excited state?
Answer:
A molecule that has absorbed a photon is in energy rich excited state. An excited state of an atom means that the valence electron has moved from its ground state orbital to high energy orbital.

Question 17.
What is ground state?
Answer:
When the light source is turned off, the high energy electrons return rapidly to their normal low energy orbitals as the excited molecule reverts to its original stable condition, called the ground state.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 18.
Explain the structure of reaction centre.
Answer:
Solar energy is trapped by chlorophyll and stored in the form of chemical energy as ATP and in the form of reducing power as NADPH2. Oxygen is evolved in the light reaction by splitting of water. The components of light reaction are as follows:

Reaction centre:

  1. The light absorbing pigments present in thylakoid membranes are arranged in clusters of chlorophyll and accessory pigments.
  2. P-680 and P-700 are the special type of chlorophyll molecules which form the reaction centres or photocentres.
  3. Solar energy is harvested by accessory pigments and other chlorophyll molecule and is passed on to the reaction centre.
  4. These (accessory pigments) are known as light harvesting or antenna molecule. Their function is to absorb light energy and transmit at a very high rate to the reaction centre where the photochemical reactions occur.

Question 19.
What are the two types of photosystems?
Answer:
1. Photosystems:
a. Two kinds of photosystems are present in thylakoid membranes of chloroplasts.
b. Each has its own set of light harvesting chlorophyll and carotenoid molecules.
c. Chlorophyll and accessory pigments help to capture light energy over large area and pass it on to the photocenters.
d. Thus, a photon absorbed anywhere in the harvesting zone of P-680 center can pass its energy to the P680 molecule.
e. The cluster of pigments which transfer their energy to P-680 absorb at or below 680nm.
f. Together with P-680 they form Photosystem – II.
g. Likewise, P-700 forms Photosystem – I along with pigment molecule which absorbs light at or below 700 nm.

2. Photosystem II:
a. Photolysis of water and release of oxygen takes place in this system.
b. In this process, when PS-II absorbs light, electrons are released and chlorophyll molecule is oxidized.
c. Electrons emitted by P680 (PS-II) are ultimately trapped by P700 (PS -1).
d. Oxygen is the byproduct by the photosynthesizing plants.
e. Protons accumulate inside the thylakoid resulting in a Proton gradient.
f. When the protons diffuse across the thylakoid membrane into stroma against the H+ gradient, energy, is released.
g. This is used to produce ATP.

3. Photosystem 1:
a. Upon absorption of light quanta by PS-I (P700) reaction center emits energy rich electrons.
b. These flow down a chain of electron carriers to NADP along with the proton generated by splitting of water.
c. This result in the formation of NADPH.
d. Hydrogen attached to NADPH is used for reduction of C02 in dark reaction also called as reducing power of the cell.

Question 20.
The oxidized P-680 regains its electrons by the photolysis of water. Mention the reactions related to the same.
Answer:
The oxidized P-680 regains its electrons by the photolysis of water as follows:

  1. 4H2O → 4H+ + 40H
  2. 4OH → 4(OH) + 4e
  3. 4OH → 2H20 + 02
  4. 4H2O → 2H2O + 02 ↑ + 4H+ 4e Overall reaction

Question 21.
Distinguish between Photosystem I and Photosystem II
Answer:

  1. The movement of ions across a selectively permeable membrane, down their electrochemical gradient is called chemiosmosis.
  2. The movement of hydrogen ions across a membrane during cellular respiration in mitochondria and during photosynthesis in chloroplasts, leads to the generation of ATP.
  3. These membranes are thylakoids and the protons accumulate in the lumen during photosynthesis.
  4. An electrochemical concentration gradient forms when hydrogen ions (protons) diffuse from an area of higher proton concentration to an area of lower proton concentration.
  5. This electrochemical concentration gradient of protons across a membrane can be utilized to make
    ATP.
  6. ATP synthase is the enzyme that makes ATP by chemiosmosis.
  7. It allows protons to pass through the membrane using the kinetic energy to phosphorylate ADP making ATP.
  8. Splitting of water molecule on the inner side of the membrane results in the accumulation of hydrogen ions within the lumen of thylakoids.
  9. The enzyme, NADP reductase, is located in the stroma side of the membrane.
  10. For reduction of NADP to NADPH2, protons are required along with electrons that come from ferredoxin.
  11. Thus, within the chloroplast, the protons in the stroma decrease in number, while in the lumen, the number of protons increases.
  12. This creates a proton gradient across the thylakoid membrane.
  13. Energy,generated by the subsequent spontaneous movement of protons is used for the synthesis of ATP.

Question 22.
Draw neat and labelled diagram representing ATP synthesis through chemiosmosis.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 23.
What is photophosphorylation?
Answer:
Formation of ATP in the chloroplasts in presence of light is called photophosphorylation, light
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 2

Question 24.
Mention the light reactions occurring in in granum.
Answer:

  1. 24H2O → 24OH + 24H+
  2. 24OH → 240H + 24e
  3. 24e + 24H+ + 12NADP+ → 12NADPH2
  4. 18ADP + 18Pi → 18 ATP
  5. 240H → 12H2O + 6O2

Question 25.
Write the dark reaction occurring in stroma.
Answer:
602+ 18ATP + 12NADPH2 → C6H12O2 + 6H2O + 18ADP +18Pi+ 12NADP+

Question 26.
Name the following:
1. Name the first compound formed during C3 pathway.
2. Carbon fixation occurs in?
Answer:
1. 3-phosphoglyceric acid.
2. Stroma

Question 27.
Where does this reaction take place?
6C02 + 18ATP + 12NADPH2 → C6H12O6 + 6H20 + 18ADP + 18Pi + 12NADP+
Answer:
In stroma of a chloroplast.

Question 28.
Who discovered the Carbon fixation pathway? How was the pathway studied?
Answer:

  1. The path of carbon fixation in dark reaction through intermediate compounds leading to the formation of sugar and starch was discovered by Calvin, Benson and their co-workers discovered the carbon fixation pathway.
  2. Path of carbon was studied with the help of radioactive tracer technique using Chlorella, a unicellular green alga and radioactive 14C02.
  3. With the help of radioactive carbon, it becomes possible to trace the intermediate steps of fixation of 14C02.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 29.
When does photorespiration occur?
Answer:
1. Photorespiration occurs under the conditions like high temperature, bright light, high oxygen and low C02 concentration. It is a wasteful process linked with C3-Cycle, where instead of fixation of C02, it is given out.
2. Photorespiration is a respiratory process in many higher plants by which they take up oxygen in the light and give outiearbon dioxide.

Question 30.
Diagrammatically explain the process of photorespiration.
Answer:
Mechanism:

  1. Photorespiration involves three organelles chloroplast, peroxisomes and mitochondria and occurs in a series of cyclic reactions which is also called PCO cycle. (Photosynthetic Carbon Cycle)
  2. Enzyme Rubisco acts as oxygenase at higher concentration of O2 and photorespiration begins.
  3. When RuBP reacts with 02 rather than C02 to form a 3-carbon compound (PGA) and 2-carbon compound phosphoglycolate.
  4. Phosphoglycolate is then converted to glycolate which is shuttled out of the chloroplast into the peroxisomes.
  5. In Peroxisomes, glycolate is converted into glyoxylate by enzyme glycolate oxidase.
  6. Glyoxylate is further converted into amino acid glycine by transamination.
  7. In mitochondria, two molecules of glycine are converted into serine (amino acid) and C02 is given out.
  8. Thus, it loses 25% of photosynthetically fixed carbon.
  9. Serine is transported back to peroxisomes and converted into glycerate.
  10. It is shuttled back to chloroplast to undergo phosphorylation and utilized in formation of 3-PGA, which get utilized in C3 pathway.

Question 31.
Explain Hatch – Slack pathway.
Answer:
1. M. D. Hatch and C. R. Slack while working on sugarcane found four carbon compounds (dicarboxylic acid) as the first stable product of photosynthesis.
2. It occurs in tropical and sub-tropical grasses and some dicotyledons.
3. The first product of this cycle is a 4-carbon compound oxaloacetic acid. Hence it is also called as C4 pathway and plants are called C4 plants.
Mechanism:

  1. C02 taken from atmosphere is accepted by a 3-carbon compound, phosphoenolpyruvic acid in the chloroplasts of mesophyll cells, leading to the formation of 4-C compound, oxaloacetic acid with the help of enzyme phosphoenolpyruvate carboxylase.
  2. It is converted to another 4-C compound, malic acid.
  3. It is transported to the chloroplasts of bundle sheath cells.
  4. Malic acid (4-C) is converted to pyruvic acid (3-C) with the release of C02 in the cytoplasm.
  5. Thus, concentration of C02 increases in the bundle sheath cells.
  6. Chloroplasts of these cells contain enzymes of Calvin cycle.
  7. Because of high concentration of C02, RuBP carboxylase participates in Calvin cycle and not photorespiration.
  8. Sugar formed in Calvin cycle is transported into the phloem.
  9. Pyruvic acid generated in the bundle sheath cells re-enter mesophyll cells and regenerates
    phosphoenolpyruvic acid by consuming one ATP.
  10. Since this conversion results in the formation of AMP (not ADP), two ATP are required to regenerate ATP from AMP. Thus, C4 pathway needs 12 additional ATP.
  11. The C3 pathway requires 18 ATP for the synthesis of one glucose molecule, whereas C4 pathway requires 30 ATP.
  12. Thus, C4 plants are better photosynthesizers as compared to C3 plants as there is no photorespiration in these plants.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 3

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 32.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of Kranz anatomy of C4 plant.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 4

Question 33.
Name the following:
1. Name the first product of C02 fixation in Hatch – Slack Pathway.
2. C4 plant leaf shows which type of anatomy?
3. Example of a C4 Plant
Answer:
1. Oxaloacetic acid.
2. Kranz Anatomy
3. Maize, Sugarcane, Sorghum, etc.

Question 34.
Short note on Kranz Anatomy of a C4 plant.
Answer:

  1. Anatomy of leaves of C4 plants is different from leaves of C3 plants.
  2. C4 plants show Kranz anatomy.
  3. In the leaves of such plants, there is a bundle sheath around the vascular bundles.
  4. The chloroplasts in the bundle – sheath cells are large and without or less developed grana, where as in the mesophyll cells the chloroplasts are small but with well-developed grana.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 35.
Short note on: Crassulacean Acid Metabolism.
Answer:
Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM).

  1. It is one more alternative pathway of carbon fixation found in desert plants.
  2. It was first reported in the family Crassulaceae, therefore called as CAM (Crassulacean Acid Metabolism).
  3. In CAM plants, stomata are scotoactive i.e. active during night, hence initial C02 fixation occurs in night.
  4. Thus, C4 pathway fix C02 at night and reduce C02 in day time via the C3 pathway by using NADPH formed during the day.
  5. PEP caboxylase and Rubisco are present in the mesophyll cell (no Kranz anatomy).
  6. Formation of malic acid during dark is called acidification (phase I).
  7. Malate is stored in vacuoles during the night.
  8. Malate releases C02 during the day for C3 pathway within the same cell is called deacidification (phase II).
  9. Examples of CAM plants: Kalanchoe, Opuntia, Aloe etc.
  10. The Chemical reactions of the carbon dioxide fixation and its assimilation are similar to that of C4 plants.

Question 36.
1. Draw a neat labelled diagram of CAM pathway.
2. In CAM plants, why does acid concentration increase during night?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 5
2. In CAM plants, malic acid accumulates during night, which is formed from Oxaloacetic acid in presence of the enzyme malate dehydrogenase.

Question 37.
What are the external factors which affects photosynthesis?
Answer:
External factors which affect photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Light:
a. It is an essential factor as it supplies the energy necessary for photosynthesis.
b. Quality and intensity of light affects the photosynthesis.
c. Highest rate of photosynthesis takes place in red light followed by blue light.
d. The rate of photosynthesis considerably decreases in plants which are growing under a forest canopy.
e. In most of the plants, photosynthesis is maximum in bright diffused sunlight.
f. Uninterrupted and continuous photosynthesis for a very long period of time may be sustained without any visible damage to the plant.

2. Carbon dioxide:
The main source of C02 in land plants is the atmosphere, which contains only 0.3% of the gas.
b. Under normal conditions of temperature and light, carbon dioxide acts as a limiting factor in photosynthesis.
c. Increase in concentration of CO2 increases the photosynthesis.
d. Increase in C02 to about 1% is advantageous to most of the plants.
e. Higher concentration of the gas has an inhibitory effect on photosynthesis.

3. Temperature:
a. Like all other physiological processes, photosynthesis also needs a suitable temperature.
b. The optimum temperature at which the photosynthesis is maximum is 25-30 °C. Except in plants like Opuntia, photosynthesis takes place at as high as 55 °C.
c. This is the maximum temperature. Minimum temperature is temperature at which photosynthesis process just starts.
d. In the presence of sufficient light and CO2, photosynthesis increases with the rise of temperature till it becomes maximum. After that there is a decrease or fall in the rate of the process.

4. Water:
a. Water is necessary for photosynthetic process.
b. An increase in water content of the leaf results in the corresponding increase in the rate of photosynthesis.
c. Thus, the limiting effect of water is not direct but indirect.
d. It is mainly due to the fact that it helps in maintaining the turgidity of the assimilatory cells and the proper hydration of their protoplasm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 38.
What are the internal factors which affects photosynthesis?
Answer:
Internal factors which affects photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Chlorophyll:
a. Though presence of chlorophyll is essential for photosynthesis but rate of photosynthesis is proportional to the quantity of chlorophyll present.
b. It is because of the fact that chlorophyll merely acts as a biocatalyst and hence a small quantity is quite enough to maintain the large bulk of the reacting substances.
2. Sugar:
The final product in the photosynthesis reaction is sugar and its accumulation in the cells slow down the process of photosynthesis.
3. Internal structures:
The thickness of cuticle and epidermis of the leaf, the size and distribution of intercellular spaces and the distribution of the stomata and the development of chlorenchyma and other tissues also affects the rate of photosynthesis.

Question 39.
State and explain the Blackman’s law of limiting factor.
Answer:

  1. The Blackman’s law of limiting factors states that when a process is conditioned as to its rapidity by a number of separate factors, the rate of the process is controlled by the pace of the “slowest factor”.
  2. The slowest factor is that factor which is present in the lowest or minimum concentration in relation to others.
  3. The law of limiting factor can be explained by taking two external factors such as carbon dioxide and light.
  4. For example, a plant photosynthesizing at a fixed light intensity sufficient to utilize 10mg of C2 per hour only.
  5. Photosynthetic rate goes on increasing when concentration of CO2 increases.
  6. Further increase in CO2 concentration will not increase the rate of photosynthesis. In this case light becomes the limiting factor. Therefore, under such circumstances rate of photosynthesis can be increased only by increasing the light intensity.
  7. This proves that the rate of photosynthesis responds to one factor alone at a time and there would be a sharp break in the curve and a plateau formed exactly at the point where another factor becomes limiting.
  8. If any one of the other factors which is kept constant (e.g. Light) is increased, the photosynthetic rate increases again reaching the optimum where again another factor becomes limiting.

Question 40.
Give the significance of Photosynthesis.
Answer:

  1. Photosynthesis is anabolic process which uses inorganic substances and produces food for all life directly or indirectly.
  2. This process transforms solar energy into chemical energy.
  3. The released by product 02 is necessary not only for aerobic respiration in living organisms but also used in forming protective ozone layer around earth.
  4. It also helps us in providing fossil fuels, coals, petroleum and natural gas.

Question 41.
Apply Your Knowledge:

Question 1.
1. Identify ‘x’, ‘y’ and ‘z’ in the given diagrammatic representation of cyclic photophosphorylation.
2. During which steps ATP molecules are formed?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 6
1. ‘x’ is ferredoxin, ‘y’ is cytochrome-b6 and ‘z’ is plastocyanin.
2. During conversion of ferredoxin to cytochrome-b6 and from cytochrome-b6 to cytochrome-f ATP molecules are formed.

Question 42.
Quick Review

Cyclic and Non-cyclic photophosphorylation:

Cyclic Non-cyclic
Used Photons
1 ADP
1 Phosphate group
Photons
1 ADP1 Phosphate group
1 H20
1 NADP+
Produced 2 ATP 1 ATP
2 NADPH + H+
\(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)O2
Accomplished Captured energy in the form of ATP Captured energy in the form of ATP and NADPH2
Transfers hydrogen (as NADPH) to the dark reactions

Calvin’s Cycle:

Used (Reactants) Produced (Products)
6CO2 12 PGAL (2 become 1 glucose)
6 RUBP 18 Phosphates (return to light reactions)
18 ATP (from light reactions) 18 ADP (returns to light reactions)
12 NADPH (from light reactions) 12 NADP+ (return to light reactions)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis 7

Abbrevations

ATP Adenosine triphosphate RuBisCO Ribulose bisphosphate carboxylase
ADP Adenosine diphosphate PGA Phosphoglyceric acid
Co-Q Co-enzyme quinone PGAL Phosphoglyceraldehyde
FRS Ferredoxin Reducing Substance DHAP Dihydroxyacetone phosphate
PC Plastocyanin NADP Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate
PQ Plastoquinone NADPH2 Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide hydrogen phosphate
RUBP Ribulose-1, 5-bisphosphate PEPA Phosphoenol pyruvic acid
RUMP Ribulose monophosphate OAA Oxaloacetic acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 43.
Exercise:

Question 1.
Why photosynthesis is known as redox reaction?
Answer:

  1. Photosynthesis is considered as a redox reaction as it involves both reduction and oxidation reactions.
  2. Water is oxidized by the removal of H+ while C02 is reduced by the addition of H.
  3. The redox reactions of photosynthesis are necessary for the conversion of light energy into chemical energy.

Question 2.
Sketch and label ‘Ultrastructure of Chloroplast’.
Answer:

  1. The chloroplasts are discoid and lens shaped in higher plants. Chloroplast is bounded by a double membrane.
  2. System of chlorophyll bearing a double-membrane sac is present inside the stroma.
  3. These are stacked one above the other to form grana.
  4. Individual sacs in each granum is are known as thylakoid.
  5. All the pigments chlorophylls, carotenes and xanthophylls are located in thylakoid membranes.
  6. These pigments are fat soluble and are present in lipid part of membrane also they absorb light of specific spectrum in the visible regions.

Question 3.
Name the various photosynthetic pigments.
Answer:

  1. Chemically chlorophyll molecule consists of two parts head of tetrapyrrole the porphyrin ring and a long hydrocarbon tail called phytol attached to the porphyrin group.
  2. Both chlorophyll-a and chlorophyll-b are similar in their molecular structure, except that the methyl group (-CH) in chlorophyll-a is replaced with an aldehyde group (-CHO) in chlorophyll-b.
  3. Carotenoids are lipid compound present universally in almost all the higher plants and several microorganisms.
  4. They are usually red, orange, yellow, brown, and are associated with chlorophyll. They are of two types – the carotenes and xanthophylls.
  5. The carotenes (C40H5) are orange red and xanthophylls contain oxygen.
  6. The light energy absorbed by the carotenoids is transferred to chlorophyll-a to be utilized in photosynthesis.
  7. All photosynthetic plants have these pigments that absorb light between the red and blue region of the
    spectrum.
  8. Carotenoids found mainly in higher plants, absorb primarily in the violet to blue regions of the spectrum.
  9. They not only absorb light energy and transfer it to chlorophyll but also protect the chlorophyll molecule from photo-oxidation. Xanthophylls (C40H56O2) are yellow pigments found in fruits and vegetables.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 4.
What is the main function of accessory pigment?
Answer:
1. Accessory pigments are light absorbing molecules which are found in photosynthetic organisms.
2. They transfer the absorbed light to chlorophyll-a and thus increasing the photosynthetic rate.
3. In absence of accessory pigments less amount of light will be absorbed and also there would be no protection provided to chlorophyll molecule from photo-oxidation.

Question 5.
Explain the nature of light.
Answer:

  1. Light is a form of energy.
  2. It travels as stream of tiny particles called photons.
  3. A photon contains a quantum of light.
  4. Light has different wavelengths having different colors.
  5. One can see electromagnetic radiation with wavelengths ranging from 390nm to 730nm. This part of the spectrum is called the Visible light.
  6. It lies between wavelengths of ultraviolet and infra-red.

Question 6.
Which instrument is used for studying the absorption spectrum of photosynthetic pigments?
Answer:
In absorption spectrum, absorption of different wavelengths of light pigments can be measured by spectrophotometer.

Question 7.
Explain Hill’s reaction.
Answer:
Robert Hill proved that the source of oxygen evolved during photosynthesis is water and not carbon dioxide. Hence, it is called Hill’s Reaction.

  1. In this experiment, Hill cultured isolated chloroplasts in a medium containing C02 free water, haemoglobin and ferric compound.
  2. Ferric salts and haemoglobin were added in the medium as hydrogen and oxygen acceptors respectively.
  3. When the suspension was illuminated, he observed that haemoglobin turned into oxyhaemoglobin (red colour).
  4. This confirmed that water must have oxidized releasing 02, that reacted with haemoglobin. Reduction of ferric compound was also indicated by change in colour.
  5. The H2O molecule oxidized to evolve 02 as a by-product. Thus, Hill proved that the source of evolving 02 is H20 and not C02.
  6. This process of splitting up of water molecules under the influence of light in the presence of chlorophyll is called Photolysis of water or Hill Reaction.

Question 8.
Describe photoexcitation of chlorophyll-a.
Answer:

  1. Chlorophyll-a is an essential photosynthetic pigment as it converts light energy into chemical energy and acts as a reaction centre.
  2. Initially, it lies at ground state or singlet state but when it absorbs or receives photons (solar energy), it gets activated and goes in excited state or excited second singlet state.
  3. In the excited state, chlorophyll-a emits an electron. The emitted electron is energy rich, i.e. has extra amount of energy.
  4. Due to the loss of electron (e), chlorophyll-a becomes positively charged. This is the ionized state.
  5. Chlorophyll-a molecule cannot remain in the ionized state for more than 10‘9 seconds. Hence the photo-chemical reaction or electron transfer occurs very fast.
  6. The energy rich electron is then transferred through various electron acceptors and donors (carriers).
  7. During the transfer, the electron emits energy which is utilized for the synthesis of ATP. This shows that light energy is converted into chemical energy in the form of ATP.

Question 9.
Write the wavelengths required for proper functioning of PS-I and PS-II respectively?
Answer:
1. Together with P-680 they form Photosystem – II.
2. Likewise, P-700 forms Photosystem – I along with pigment molecule which absorbs light at or below 700 nm.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 10.
Differentiate between PS-IandPS-II.
Answer:

  1. The movement of ions across a selectively permeable membrane, down their electrochemical gradient is called chemiosmosis.
  2. The movement of hydrogen ions across a membrane during cellular respiration in mitochondria and during photosynthesis in chloroplasts, leads to the generation of ATP.
  3. These membranes are thylakoids and the protons accumulate in the lumen during photosynthesis.
  4. An electrochemical concentration gradient forms when hydrogen ions (protons) diffuse from an area of higher proton concentration to an area of lower proton concentration.
  5. This electrochemical concentration gradient of protons across a membrane can be utilized to make
    ATP.
  6. ATP synthase is the enzyme that makes ATP by chemiosmosis. .
  7. It allows protons to pass through the membrane using the kinetic energy to phosphorylate ADP making ATP.
  8. Splitting of water molecule on the inner side of the membrane results in the accumulation of hydrogen ions within the lumen of thylakoids.
  9. The enzyme, NADP reductase, is located in the stroma side of the membrane.
  10. For reduction of NADP to NADPH2, protons are required along with electrons that come from ferredoxin.
  11. Thus, within the chloroplast, the protons in the stroma decrease in number, while in the lumen, the number of protons increases.
  12. This creates a proton gradient across the thylakoid membrane.
  13. Energy,generated by the subsequent spontaneous movement of protons is used for the synthesis of ATP.

Question 11.
Define photophosphorylation.
Answer:
Formation of ATP in the chloroplasts in presence of light is called photophosphorylation, light

Question 12.
Give graphic representation of cyclic photophosphorylation.
Answer:
Cyclic photophosphorylation:
a. Illumination of photosystem-I causes electrons to move continuously out of the reaction center of photosystem-I and back to it.
b. The cyclic electron-flow is accompanied by the photophosphorylation of ADP to yield ATP. This is termed as Cyclic photophosphorylation.
c. Since this process involves only pigment system I, photolysis of water and consequent evolution of oxygen does not take place.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 13.
Give graphic representation of noncyclic photophosphorylation.
Answer:
Non-cyclic photophosphorylation:
a. It involves both photosystems- PS-I and PS-II.
b. In this case, electron transport chain starts with the release of electrons from PS-II.
c. In this chain high energy electrons released from PS-II do not return to PS-II but, after passing through an electron transport chain, reach PS-I, which in turn donates it to reduce NADP to NADPH.
d. The reduced NADP+ (NADPH) is utilized for the reduction of CO2 in the dark reaction.
e. Electron-deficient PS-II brings about oxidation of water-molecule. Due to this, protons, electrons and oxygen atom are released.
f. Electrons are taken up by PS-II itself to return to reduced state, protons are accepted by NADP+ whereas oxygen is released.
g. As in this process, high energy electrons released from PS-II do not return to PS-II and it is accompanied with ATP formation, this is called Non-cyclic photophosphorylation.

Question 14.
Write the link between light dependent and dark reactions.
Answer:
Link between light-dependent and dark reactions:

  1. The light reaction gives rise to two important products, a reducing agent NADPH2 and an energy-rich compound ATP. Both these are utilized in the dark phase of photosynthesis.
  2. ATP and NADPH2 molecules function as vehicles for transfer of energy of sunlight into dark reaction leaving to carbon fixation. In this reaction C02 is reduced to carbohydrate.
  3. During dark reaction, ATP and NADPH2 are transformed into ADP, iP and NADP which are transferred to the grana in which light reaction takes place.

Question 15.
Write the dark reaction occurring in stroma.
Answer:
602+ 18ATP + 12NADPH2 → C6H12O2 + 6H2O + 18ADP +18Pi+ 12NADP+

Question 16.
Explain how light and dark reactions of photosynthesis are interdependent.
Answer:
Link between light-dependent and dark reactions:

  1. The light reaction gives rise to two important products, a reducing agent NADPH2 and an energy-rich compound ATP. Both these are utilized in the dark phase of photosynthesis.
  2. ATP and NADPH2 molecules function as vehicles for transfer of energy of sunlight into dark reaction leaving to carbon fixation. In this reaction C02 is reduced to carbohydrate.
  3. During dark reaction, ATP and NADPH2 are transformed into ADP, iP and NADP which are transferred to the grana in which light reaction takes place.

Question 17.
Give schematic representation of Calvin Cycle.
Answer:
1. The entire process of dark reaction was traced by Dr. Melvin Calvin along with his co-worker, Dr. Benson. Hence, the process is called as Calvin cycle or Calvin- Benson cycle. Since the first stable product formed is a 3-carbon compound, it is also called as C3 pathway and the plants are called C14 plants.
2. Calvin carried out experiments on unicellular green algae (Chlorella), using radioactive isotope of carbon, C14 as a tracer. It is also called synthesis phase or second phase of photosynthesis.

The cycle is divided into the following phases:
1. Carboxylation phase:
a. Carbon dioxide reduction starts with a five-carbon sugar ribulose-l,5-bisphosphate (RuBP). It is a 5- carbon sugar with two phosphate groups attached to it.
b. RuBP reacts with CO2 to produce an unstable 6 carbon intermediate in the presence of Rubisco.
c. It immediately splits into 3 carbon compounds called 3-phosphoglyceric acid.
d. RuBisCO is a large protein molecule and comprises 16% of the chloroplast proteins.

2. Glycolytic reversal:
a. 3-phosphoglyceric acid form 1,3-diphosphoglyceric acid by utilizing ATP molecule.
b. These are then reduced to glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate (3-PGA) by NADPH supplied by the light reactions of photosynthesis.
c. In order to keep Calvin cycle continuously running there must be sufficient number of RuBP and regular supply of ATP and NADPH.
d. Out of 12 molecules of 3-phosphoglyceraldehyde, two molecules are used for synthesis of one glucose molecule.

3. Regeneration of RuBP:
a. 10 molecules of 3-phosphoglyceraldehyde are used for the regeneration of 6 molecules of RuBP at the cost of 6 ATP.
b. Therefore, six turns of Calvin cycle are needed to get one molecule of glucose.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 18.
Describe Calvin cycle and its significance.
Answer:
Significance:
1. Carboxylation: RuBisCO is the most abundant enzyme in the world. It is responsible for fixing carbon in the form of C02 into sugar. As a result of Carboxylation, the first stable product of carbon fixation i.e. 3- PGA is synthesized.
2. Reduction/Glycolytic reversal: NADPH2 donates electrons to 1, 3-Bisphoshoglycerate to form 3- phosphoglyceraldehyde molecules. During this process ADP and NADP are generated which are used in light reaction.
3. Regeneration of RuBP: Some 3-phosphoglyceraldehyde molecules are involved in production of glucose while others are recycled to regenerate the 5-carbon compound RuBP which used to accept new carbon molecules. Thus, regeneration of RuBP is required for Calvin cycle to run continuously.

Question 19.
How was the carbon fixation pathway studied?
Answer:
1. Path of carbon was studied with the help of radioactive tracer technique using Chlorella, a unicellular green alga and radioactive 14C02.
2. With the help of radioactive carbon, it becomes possible to trace the intermediate steps of fixation of 14C02.

Question 20.
Describe photorespiration with the help of diagrammatic representation.
Answer:
Mechanism:

  1. Photorespiration involves three organelles chloroplast, peroxisomes and mitochondria and occurs in a series of cyclic reactions which is also called PCO cycle. (Photosynthetic Carbon Cycle)
  2. Enzyme Rubisco acts as oxygenase at higher concentration of O2 and photorespiration begins.
  3. When RuBP reacts with 02 rather than C02 to form a 3-carbon compound (PGA) and 2-carbon compound phosphoglycolate.
  4. Phosphoglycolate is then converted to glycolate which is shuttled out of the chloroplast into the peroxisomes.
  5. In Peroxisomes, glycolate is converted into glyoxylate by enzyme glycolate oxidase.
  6. Glyoxylate is further converted into amino acid glycine by transamination.
  7. In mitochondria, two molecules of glycine are converted into serine (amino acid) and C02 is given out.
  8. Thus, it loses 25% of photosynthetically fixed carbon.
  9. Serine is transported back to peroxisomes and converted into glycerate.
  10. It is shuttled back to chloroplast to undergo phosphorylation and utilized information of 3-PGA, which get utilized in C3 pathway.

Question 21.
Give significance of C4 pathway.
Answer:

  1. C4 plants have special type of leaf anatomy called Kranz anatomy.
  2. In C4 plants, C02 fixation occurs twice.
  3. In these plants, chloroplasts of mesophyll cells contain enzyme PEP carboxylase which fixes atmospheric C02. Thus, first C02 fixation occurs in mesophyll cells.
  4. Decarboxylation of malic acid in bundle sheath cells results in increase in C02 concentration.
  5. Thus, RuBisCO acts as carboxylase and brings about carboxylation of RuBP.
  6. Due to this oxygenation of RuBP and photorespiration is prevented.
  7. Thus, despite of having less number of bundle sheath cells carrying out Calvin cycle, C4 plants are highly productive.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 22.
Who proposed C4 pathway?
Answer:
1. M. D. Hatch and C. R. Slack while working on sugarcane found four carbon compounds (dicarboxylic acid) as the first stable product of photosynthesis.
2. It occurs in tropical and sub-tropical grasses and some dicotyledons.
3. The first product of this cycle is a 4-carbon compound oxaloacetic acid. Hence it is also called as C4 pathway and plants are called C4 plants.
Mechanism:

  1. C02 taken from atmosphere is accepted by a 3-carbon compound, phosphoenolpyruvic acid in the chloroplasts of mesophyll cells, leading to the formation of 4-C compound, oxaloacetic acid with the help of enzyme phosphoenolpyruvate carboxylase.
  2. It is converted to another 4-C compound, malic acid. It is transported to the chloroplasts of bundle sheath cells.
  3. Malic acid (4-C) is converted to pyruvic acid (3-C) with the release of C02 in the cytoplasm.
  4. Thus, concentration of C02 increases in the bundle sheath cells.
  5. Chloroplasts of these cells contain enzymes of Calvin cycle.
  6. Because of high concentration of C02, RuBP carboxylase participates in Calvin cycle and not photorespiration.
  7. Sugar formed in Calvin cycle is transported into the phloem.
  8. Pyruvic acid generated in the bundle sheath cells re-enter mesophyll cells and regenerates
    phosphoenolpyruvic acid by consuming one ATP.
  9. Since this conversion results in the formation of AMP (not ADP), two ATP are required to regenerate ATP from AMP. Thus, C4 pathway needs 12 additional ATP.
  10. The C3 pathway requires 18 ATP for the synthesis of one glucose molecule, whereas C4 pathway requires 30 ATP.
  11. Thus, C4 plants are better photosynthesizers as compared to C3 plants as there is no photorespiration in these plants.

Question 23.
Give schematic representation of HSK pathway.
Answer:
1. M. D. Hatch and C. R. Slack while working on sugarcane found four-carbon compounds (dicarboxylic acid) as the first stable product of photosynthesis.
2. It occurs in tropical and sub-tropical grasses and some dicotyledons.
3. The first product of this cycle is a 4-carbon compound oxaloacetic acid. Hence it is also called as C4 pathway and plants are called C4 plants.

Mechanism:

  1. C02 taken from atmosphere is accepted by a 3-carbon compound, phosphoenolpyruvic acid in the chloroplasts of mesophyll cells, leading to the formation of 4-C compound, oxaloacetic acid with the help of enzyme phosphoenolpyruvate carboxylase.
  2. It is converted to another 4-C compound, malic acid. It is transported to the chloroplasts of bundle sheath cells.
  3. Malic acid (4-C) is converted to pyruvic acid (3-C) with the release of C02 in the cytoplasm. Thus, concentration of C02 increases in the bundle sheath cells.
  4. Chloroplasts of these cells contain enzymes of Calvin cycle.
  5. Because of high concentration of C02, RuBP carboxylase participates in Calvin cycle and not photorespiration.
  6. Sugar formed in Calvin cycle is transported into the phloem.
  7. Pyruvic acid generated in the bundle sheath cells re-enter mesophyll cells and regenerates
    phosphoenolpyruvic acid by consuming one ATP.
  8. Since this conversion results in the formation of AMP (not ADP), two ATP are required to regenerate ATP from AMP. Thus, C4 pathway needs 12 additional ATP.
  9. The C3 pathway requires 18 ATP for the synthesis of one glucose molecule, whereas C4 pathway requires 30 ATP.
  10. Thus, C4 plants are better photosynthesizers as compared to C3 plants as there is no photorespiration in these plants.

Question 24.
With the help of labelled diagram explain Kranz anatomy.
Answer:

  1. Anatomy of leaves of C4 plants is different from leaves of C3 plants.
  2. C4 plants show Kranz anatomy.
  3. In the leaves of such plants, there is a bundle sheath around the vascular bundles.
  4. The chloroplasts in the bundle – sheath cells are large and without or less developed grana, where as in the mesophyll cells the chloroplasts are small but with well-developed grana.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 25.
Give reason. Why C4 plants are favoured in tropical regions?
Answer:

  1. C4 plants are favoured in tropical regions as they require 30 ATP to produce 1 molecule of glucose.
  2. High temperature in tropical regions leads to closure of stomata to reduce rate of transpiration. Due to this availability of C02 decreases.
  3. PEP carboxylase present in mesophyll cells can fix C02 even at low concentration. This helps the plant in efficient assimilation of atmospheric carbon dioxide.
  4. C4 plants contain a special leaf anatomy called Kranz anatomy which minimizes the losses due to photorespiration.
  5. It helps C4 plants to survive in conditions of high daytime temperatures, intense sunlight and low moisture.

Question 26.
With the help of suitable flowchart explain CAM.
Answer:
Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM).

  1. It is one more alternative pathway of carbon fixation found in desert plants.
  2. It was first reported in the family Crassulaceae, therefore called as CAM (Crassulacean Acid Metabolism).
  3. In CAM plants, stomata are scotoactive i.e. active during night, hence initial C02 fixation occurs in night.
  4. Thus, C4 pathway fix C02 at night and reduce C02 in day time via the C3 pathway by using NADPH formed during the day.
  5. PEP caboxylase and Rubisco are present in the mesophyll cell (no Kranz anatomy).
  6. Formation of malic acid during dark is called acidification (phase I).
  7. Malate is stored in vacuoles during the night.
  8. Malate releases C02 during the day for C3 pathway within the same cell is called deacidification (phase II).
  9. Examples of CAM plants: Kalanchoe, Opuntia, Aloe etc.
  10. The Chemical reactions of the carbon dioxide fixation and its assimilation are similar to that of C4 plants.

Question 27.
Describe ‘any two’ factors affecting the rate of photosynthesis.
Answer:
External factors which affect photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Light:
a. It is an essential factor as it supplies the energy necessary for photosynthesis.
b. Quality and intensity of light affects the photosynthesis.
c. Highest rate of photosynthesis takes place in red light followed by blue light.
d. The rate of photosynthesis considerably decreases in plants which are growing under a forest canopy.
e. In most of the plants, photosynthesis is maximum in bright diffused sunlight.
f. Uninterrupted and continuous photosynthesis for a very long period of time may be sustained without any visible damage to the plant.

2. Carbon dioxide:
The main source of C02 in land plants is the atmosphere, which contains only 0.3% of the gas.
b. Under normal conditions of temperature and light, carbon dioxide acts as a limiting factor in photosynthesis.
c. Increase in concentration of CO2 increases the photosynthesis.
d. Increase in C02 to about 1% is advantageous to most of the plants.
e. Higher concentration of the gas has an inhibitory effect on photosynthesis.

3. Temperature:
a. Like all other physiological processes, photosynthesis also needs a suitable temperature.
b. The optimum temperature at which the photosynthesis is maximum is 25-30 °C. Except in plants like Opuntia, photosynthesis takes place at as high as 55 °C.
c. This is the maximum temperature. Minimum temperature is temperature at which photosynthesis process just starts.
d. In the presence of sufficient light and CO2, photosynthesis increases with the rise of temperature till it becomes maximum. After that there is a decrease or fall in the rate of the process.

4. Water:
a. Water is necessary for photosynthetic process.
b. An increase in water content of the leaf results in the corresponding increase in the rate of photosynthesis.
c. Thus, the limiting effect of water is not direct but indirect.
d. It is mainly due to the fact that it helps in maintaining the turgidity of the assimilatory cells and the proper hydration of their protoplasm.

Internal factors which affects photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Chlorophyll:
a. Though presence of chlorophyll is essential for photosynthesis but rate of photosynthesis is proportional to the quantity of chlorophyll present.
b. It is because of the fact that chlorophyll merely acts as a biocatalyst and hence a small quantity is quite enough to maintain the large bulk of the reacting substances.
2. Sugar:
The final product in the photosynthesis reaction is sugar and its accumulation in the cells slow down the process of photosynthesis.
3. Internal structures:
The thickness of cuticle and epidermis of the leaf, the size and distribution of intercellular spaces and the distribution of the stomata and the development of chlorenchyma and other tissues also affects the rate of photosynthesis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 28.
Enlist the factors that affect the rate of photosynthesis.
Answer:
External factors which affect photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Light:
a. It is an essential factor as it supplies the energy necessary for photosynthesis.
b. Quality and intensity of light affects the photosynthesis.
c. Highest rate of photosynthesis takes place in red light followed by blue light.
d. The rate of photosynthesis considerably decreases in plants which are growing under a forest canopy.
e. In most of the plants, photosynthesis is maximum in bright diffused sunlight.
f. Uninterrupted and continuous photosynthesis for a very long period of time may be sustained without any visible damage to the plant.

2. Carbon dioxide:
The main source of C02 in land plants is the atmosphere, which contains only 0.3% of the gas.
b. Under normal conditions of temperature and light, carbon dioxide acts as a limiting factor in photosynthesis.
c. Increase in concentration of CO2 increases the photosynthesis.
d. Increase in C02 to about 1% is advantageous to most of the plants.
e. Higher concentration of the gas has an inhibitory effect on photosynthesis.

3. Temperature:
a. Like all other physiological processes, photosynthesis also needs a suitable temperature.
b. The optimum temperature at which the photosynthesis is maximum is 25-30 °C. Except in plants like Opuntia, photosynthesis takes place at as high as 55 °C.
c. This is the maximum temperature. Minimum temperature is temperature at which photosynthesis process just starts.
d. In the presence of sufficient light and CO2, photosynthesis increases with the rise of temperature till it becomes maximum. After that there is a decrease or fall in the rate of the process.

4. Water:
a. Water is necessary for photosynthetic process.
b. An increase in water content of the leaf results in the corresponding increase in the rate of photosynthesis.
c. Thus, the limiting effect of water is not direct but indirect.
d. It is mainly due to the fact that it helps in maintaining the turgidity of the assimilatory cells and the proper hydration of their protoplasm.

Internal factors which affects photosynthesis are as follows:
1. Chlorophyll:
a. Though presence of chlorophyll is essential for photosynthesis but rate of photosynthesis is proportional to the quantity of chlorophyll present.
b. It is because of the fact that chlorophyll merely acts as a biocatalyst and hence a small quantity is quite enough to maintain the large bulk of the reacting substances.
2. Sugar:
The final product in the photosynthesis reaction is sugar and its accumulation in the cells slow down the process of photosynthesis.
3. Internal structures:
The thickness of cuticle and epidermis of the leaf, the size and distribution of intercellular spaces and the distribution of the stomata and the development of chlorenchyma and other tissues also affects the rate of photosynthesis.

Question 29.
Give the Blackman’s law of limiting factors.
Answer:

  1. The Blackman’s law of limiting factors states that when a process is conditioned as to its rapidity by a number of separate factors, the rate of the process is controlled by the pace of the “slowest factor”.
  2. The slowest factor is that factor which is present in the lowest or minimum concentration in relation to others.
  3. The law of limiting factor can be explained by taking two external factors such as carbon dioxide and light.
  4. For example, a plant photosynthesizing at a fixed light intensity sufficient to utilize 10mg of C2 per hour only.
  5. Photosynthetic rate goes on increasing when concentration of CO2 increases.
  6. Further increase in CO2 concentration will not increase the rate of photosynthesis. In this case light becomes the limiting factor. Therefore, under such circumstances rate of photosynthesis can be increased only by increasing the light intensity.
  7. This proves that the rate of photosynthesis responds to one factor alone at a time and there would be a sharp break in the curve and a plateau formed exactly at the point where another factor becomes limiting.
  8. If any one of the other factors which is kept constant (e.g. Light) is increased, the photosynthetic rate increases again reaching the optimum where again another factor becomes limiting.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 44.
Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
How many ATP molecules are required for synthesis of one glucose molecule using C4 pathway?
(A) 30
(B) 18
(C) 6
(D) 2
Answer:
(A) 30

Question 2.
Photosynthesis is ________ reaction.
(A) oxidation
(B) reduction
(C) redox
(D) electrochemical
Answer:
(C) redox

Question 3.
Photosynthesis is minimum in _______ light.
(A) green
(B) blue
(C) red
(D) yellow
Answer:
(A) green

Question 4.
From the visible spectrum of light, which component is reflected by the green leaves?
(A) Blue
(B) Red
(C) Green
(D) Orange
Answer:
(C) Green

Question 5.
Which of the following is not an accessory pigment?
(A) Chlorophyll-b
(B) Xanthophyll
(C) Chlorophyll-a
(D) Carotene
Answer:
(C) Chlorophyll-a

Question 6.
The reaction centre of PS-II is ________ .
(A) Chi-a, 700
(B) Chi-a, 680
(C) Chi- a, 673
(D) Chi-a, 650
Answer:
(B) Chi-a, 680

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 7.
Light reactions occur in ______________ .
(A) stroma
(B) grana
(C) matrix
(D) fret
Answer:
(B) grana

Question 8.
Dark reaction takes place in _____________ .
(A) Stroma
(B) Grana
(C) Matrix
(D) Thylakoid
Answer:
(A) Stroma

Question 9.
In dark reaction, the first compound to accept C02 is ___________ .
(A) RUMP
(B) RUBP
(C) PGAL
(D) PGA
Answer:
(B) RUBP

Question 10.
Which of the following is a photochemical reaction?
(A) Light reaction
(B) C3 pathway
(C) C4 pathway
(D) CAM pathway
Answer:
(A) Light reaction

Question 11.
Which of the following is a biochemical reaction?
(A) Light reaction
(B) Cyclic electron transfer
(C) Photolysis of water
(D) Dark phase
Answer:
(D) Dark phase

Question 12.
How many Calvin cycles are required to produce one molecule of glucose?
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
Answer:
(D) 6

Question 13.
The first C02 acceptor in C4 pathway is _______ .
(A) Pyruvic acid
(B) PEPA
(C) OAA
(D) Malic acid
Answer:
(B) PEPA

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 14.
In C4 pathway, fixation of metabolic C02 occurs in which of the following cells?
(A) Bundle sheath cells
(B) Mesophyll cells
(C) Epidermal cells
(D) Cortical cells
Answer:
(A) Bundle sheath cells

Question 15.
Which one of the following is C4 plant?
(A) Sunflower
(B) Soyabean
(C) Sugarcane
(D) Spinach
Answer:
(C) Sugarcane

Question 16.
Due to photorespiration, approximately __________ of photosynthetically fixed C02 is lost.
(A) 25%
(B) 50%
(C) 60%
(D) 80%
Answer:
(A) 25%

Question 17.
CAM plants are mostly ________________ .
(A) Tropical plants
(B) Succulents
(C) Monocots
(D) Mangroves
Answer:
(B) Succulents

Question 18.
Which of the following factors is not limiting?
(A) C02 concentration
(B) Light intensity
(C) Temperature
(D) Oxygen
Answer:
(D) Oxygen

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 45.
Competitive Corner

Question 1.
In Hatch and Slack pathway, the primary C02 acceptor is _______________ .
(A) Rubisco
(B) Oxaloacetic acid
(C) Phosphoglyceric acid
(D) Phosphoenol pyruvate
Answer:
(D) Phosphoenol pyruvate

Question 2.
One scientist cultured Cladophora in a suspension of Azotobacter and illuminated the culture by splitting light through a prism. He observed that bacteria accumulated mainly in the region of:
(A) Blue and red light
(B) Violet and green light
(C) Indigo and green light
(D) Orange and yellow light
Hint: Cladophora is green alga and Azotobacter is aerobic bacteria. Theodor Engelmann split light into its spectral components using a prism and detected that aerobic bacteria accumulated mainly in the region of blue and red light.
Answer:
(A) Blue and red light

Question 3.
Clil-a and Chl-b shown maximum absorption in ________ regions of visible light.
(A) blue, violet and red
(B) red, indigo and green
(C) yellow, blue and red
(D) blue, violet and green
Answer:
(A) blue, violet and red

Question 4.
The co-enzyme which acts as hydrogen acceptor during light reaction is ________ .
(A) PQ
(B) FAD
(C) COQ
(D) NADP
Answer:
(D) NADP

Question 5.
During cyclic photophosphorylation, formation of ATP occurs between which of the following two compounds?
(A) FRS → Ferredoxin
(B) Cytochrome b6 → Cytochrome f
(C) Cytochrome f → Plastocyanin
(D) Plastocyanin → Ionised Chi – a
Answer:
(B) Cytochrome b6 → Cytochrome f

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 6.
Which of the following is NOT a product of light reaction of photosynthesis?
(A) NADPH
(B) NADH
(C) ATP
(D) Oxygen
Answer:
(B) NADH

Question 7.
A part of photosynthetically fixed CO2 goes back to the atmosphere due to _______.
(A) cyclic photophosphorylation
(B) noncyclic photophosphorylation
(C) dark reaction
(D) photorespiration
Answer:
(D) photorespiration

Question 8.
The highest rate of Photosynthesis in green plants are in _____ and ______ region of light spectrum.
(A) yellow and orange
(B) green and violet
(C) red and blue
(D) violet and blue
Answer:
(C) red and blue

Question 9.
Which one of the following is an essential factor for photophosphorylation?
(A) Sunlight
(B) Carbohydrate
(C) Oxygen
(D) Water
Answer:
(A) Sunlight

Question 10.
Cyclic photophosphorylation will NOT take place in the absence of ________ .
(A) carotenoids
(B) chlorophyll-a
(C) xanthophylls
(D) phycoerythrin
Answer:
(B) chlorophyll-a

Question 11.
Dark reaction of photosynthesis is a cyclic process as _______ is regenerated.
(A) RuBP
(B) C02
(C) Glucose
(D) PGA
Answer:
(A) RuBP

Question 12.
Phosphoenol pyruvate (PEP) is the primary CO2 acceptor in:
(A) C3 plants
(B) C4 plants
(C) C2 plants
(D) C3 and C4 plants
Answer:
(B) C4 plants

Question 13.
In members of family Crassulaceae ________ is regenerated from starch during night.
(A) Phosphoenol pyruvic Acid
(B) Pyruvic Acid
(C) Malic Acid
(D) Oxalo Acetic Acid
Answer:
(A) Phosphoenol pyruvic Acid

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 12 Photosynthesis

Question 14.
With reference to factors affecting the rate of photosynthesis, which of the following statements are NOT correct?
(A) Light saturation for CO2 fixation occurs at 10% of full sunlight
(B) Increasing atmospheric CO2 concentration upto 0.05% can enhance C02 fixation rate
(C) C3 plants responds to higher temperatures with enhanced photosynthesis while C4 plants have much lower temperature optimum
(D) Tomato is a greenhouse crop which can be grown in CO2 enriched atmosphere for higher yield.
Answer:
(C) C3 plants responds to higher temperatures with enhanced photosynthesis while C4 plants have much lower temperature optimum.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Balbharati Maharashtra State Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

1. Fill in the Blanks.

Question 1.
______________ encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 2.
______________ refers to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
Answer:
Information Technology

Question 3.
Full form of ICT is ______________
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Question 4.
______________ concept involves transfer and use of all kinds of information.
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Question 5.
______________ is the foundation of economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
Answer:
Information and Communication Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
______________ can be any character, text, word, number or raw facts.
Answer:
Data

Question 7.
______________ is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Answer:
Information

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from a Latin word ______________
Answer:
Computare

Question 9.
An electronic device which accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it and gives the required result in the form of output, is a ______________
Answer:
Computer

Question 10.
A ______________ can process data, images, audio, video and graphics.
Answer:
Computer

Question 11.
______________ accepts data or instructions by way of input.
Answer:
Computer

Question 12.
______________ stores data.
Answer:
Computer

Question 13.
______________ can process data as required by the user.
Answer:
Computer

Question 14.
______________ gives results in the form of output.
Answer:
Computer

Question 15.
______________ controls all operations inside a computer.
Answer:
Computer

Question 16.
______________ is a specification detailing of how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
Answer:
Computer Architecture

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 17.
______________ refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
Answer:
Computer Architecture

Question 18.
______________ helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
Answer:
Input unit

Question 19.
The main function of ______________ devices is to direct commands and data into computer.
Answer:
Input

Question 20.
______________ is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
Answer:
Keyboard

Question 21.
A ______________ can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
Answer:
Mouse

Question 22.
Full form of CPU is ______________
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the ______________
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 24.
The ______________ further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit and Memory Unit.
Answer:
Central Processing Unit

Question 25.
Full form of ALU is ______________
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 26.
______________ part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 27.
______________ can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
Answer:
Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 28.
______________ is the back bone of computers.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 29.
______________ is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 30.
The ______________ collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 31.
______________ transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
Answer:
Control Unit

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its ______________
Answer:
Memory Unit

Question 33.
The ______________ uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
Answer:
Memory Unit

Question 34.
______________ is internal memory of the computer.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 35.
______________ is also known as main memory.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 36.
______________ holds the data and instruction on which computer is currently working.
Answer:
Primary Memory

Question 37.
RAM stands for ______________
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 38.
______________ is known as read/write memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 39.
______________ is generally referred to as main memory of the computer system.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 40.
______________ is a temporary memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Question 41.
______________ is also called as Volatile Memory.
Answer:
Random Access Memory

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 42.
ROM stands for ______________
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 43.
______________ is a Permanent Type memory.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 44.
______________ cannot be overwritten by the computer.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 45.
______________ is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
Answer:
Read Only Memory

Question 46.
______________ is an external memory of the computer.
Answer:
Secondary Memory

Question 47.
______________ is used to store the huge amount of different programs and information.
Answer:
Secondary Memory

Question 48.
______________ basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for user’s benefit.
Answer:
Output Unit

Question 49.
______________ is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
Answer:
Bit

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a ______________
Answer:
Nibble

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a ______________
Answer:
Byte

Question 52.
A ______________ is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
Answer:
Byte

Question 53.
1 Byte is ______________
Answer:
8 Bits

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 Bytes

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 KiloBytes

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 MegaBytes

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 GigaBytes

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 TeraBytes

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is ______________
Answer:
1,024 PetaBytes

Question 60.
______________ comprises of the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
Answer:
Computer hardware

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as a ______________
Answer:
Program

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called as ______________
Answer:
Software

Question 63.
______________ is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
Answer:
Software

Question 64.
______________ refers to the software which releases code in public domain for anyone to use.
Answer:
Open source software

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS ______________
Answer:
Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 66.
______________ and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
Answer:
Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 67.
In case of ______________, user has to purchase the software before using it.
Answer:
Closed Source Software

Question 68.
______________ is a program or group of programs designed for end users.
Answer:
Application Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 69.
______________ is also called end-user programs.
Answer:
Application Software

Question 70.
______________ is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
Answer:
System Software

Question 71.
______________ is a program that allows different applications and various components of hardware.
Answer:
Linux Operating System

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an ______________
Answer:
Operating System

Question 73.
An ______________ is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 74.
The ______________ boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 75.
The ______________ is also what runs the cell phone and most of the electronic devices.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 76.
The ______________ usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop or cell phone that user buy.
Answer:
Operating System

Question 77.
Full form of DOS is ______________
Answer:
Disk Operating System

Question 78.
______________ is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
Answer:
Windows

Question 79.
______________ is the most commonly used operating system.
Answer:
Windows

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called ______________
Answer:
Mac OS

Question 81.
______________ is an open-source operating system created by Google.
Answer:
Chrome OS

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 82.
______________ is an open-source, portable, multi- multiprogramming, operating system.
Answer:
Linux

Question 83.
______________ is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
Answer:
Android

Question 84.
______________ is used by Nokia phones. This is closed source OS.
Answer:
Asha

Question 85.
______________ is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
Answer:
Blackberry

Question 86.
______________ is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad and second-generation Apple TVs.
Answer:
Iphone Operating System

Question 87.
______________ Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
Answer:
Windows

Question 88.
______________ is used as the predominantly backbone of the Internet.
Answer:
Linux

Question 89.
______________ is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distribution.
Answer:
Ubuntu

Question 90.
Full form of GUI is ______________
Answer:
Graphical User Interface

Question 91.
Full form of CLI ______________
Answer:
Command Line Interface

Question 92.
The ______________ is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
Answer:
Graphical User Interface

Question 93.
The ______________ option is used for quick search of the application.
Answer:
Search

Question 94.
The ______________ folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
Answer:
Home

Question 95.
The ______________ is when user interacts with the computer using text.
Answer:
Command Line Interface

Question 96.
The ______________ are programs that are run when user types command name.
Answer:
Commands

Question 97.
______________ is Free and Open Source.
Answer:
Linux

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 98.
______________ Operating System is free from viruses.
Answer:
Linux

Question 99.
______________ Operating Systems can update themselves.
Answer:
Proprietary

Question 100.
______________ is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
Answer:
Repositories

Question 101.
The ______________ manager updates the operating system as well as other softwares periodically.
Answer:
Package

Question 102.
______________ is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
Answer:
Computer Network

Question 103.
A ______________ consists of a collection of computers, printers and other equipment that is connected together.
Answer:
Computer Network

Question 104.
Full form of LAN is ______________
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 105.
Full form of MAN is ______________
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 106.
Full form of WAN is ______________
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 107.
______________ type of network covers the smallest area.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 108.
______________ covers an area larger than LAN.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 109.
______________ type of network comprises the largest of all.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 110.
In ______________ usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 111.
______________ covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 112.
______________ type of network is easy to setup.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 113.
In ______________ data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked are limited.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 114.
______________ is a less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
Answer:
Local Area Network

Question 115.
______________ connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is ______________
Answer:
Internet Service Provider

Question 117.
______________ covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 118.
______________ type of network is hard to design and maintain.
Answer:
Metropolitan Area Network

Question 119.
______________ is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 120.
In ______________ type of network the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for ______________ is Telephone Network or Satellite Link.
Answer:
Wide Area Network

Question 122.
______________ is the design of a computer network.
Answer:
Network Architecture

Question 123.
A ______________ network has no dedicated servers.
Answer:
Peer-to-Peer

Question 124.
______________ type of architecture is most suitable for larger network.
Answer:
Client-Server

Question 125.
A computer which is seeking any resource from another computer is a ______________ computer.
Answer:
Client

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource which is served to another computer, it is a ______________ computer.
Answer:
Server

Question 127.
______________ means connecting computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
Answer:
Internet

Question 128.
The ______________ is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
Answer:
Internet

Question 129.
The ______________ is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
Answer:
Internet

Question 130.
With the help of the ______________, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
Answer:
Internet

Question 131.
It can be said that ______________ provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
Answer:
Internet

Question 132.
Full form of ARPANET is ______________
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 134.
______________ used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
Answer:
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 135.
Full form of TCP/IP is ______________
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 136.
______________ communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 137.
Full form of WWW is ______________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the ______________
Answer:
World Wide Web

Question 139.
A ______________ is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
Answer:
Protocol

Question 140.
______________ breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 141.
Full form of DNS is ______________
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 142.
______________ translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
Answer:
Domain Name System

Question 143.
DHCP stands for ______________
Answer:
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 144.
______________ can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
Answer:
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 145.
FTP stands for ______________
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 146.
______________ is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
Answer:
File Transfer Protocol

Question 147.
Full form of HTTP is ______________
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 148.
______________ is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
Answer:
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 149.
Full form of IMAP is ______________
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 150.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail messages from server on the Internet.
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 151.
______________ maintains a copy of all the emails on server.
Answer:
Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 152.
Full form of IRC is ______________
Answer:
Internet Relay Chat

Question 153.
______________ facilitates communication in the form of text.
Answer:
Internet Relay Chat

Question 154.
POP3 stands for ______________
Answer:
Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 155.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
Answer:
Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 156.
______________ is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
Answer:
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Question 157.
Full form of ITES is ______________
Answer:
IT Enabled Services

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as ______________
Answer:
Web Enabled Services

Question 159.
______________ covers the entire amount of operations which exploit Information Technology for improving efficiency of an organization.
Answer:
IT Enabled Services

Question 160.
______________ can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP and various other programming languages.
Answer:
Web Designer

Question 161.
It is possible to have career as a ______________ with the scripting skills.
Answer:
Software Developer

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a ______________
Answer:
Database Manager

Question 163.
______________ are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
Answer:
Information Security Analyst

Question 164.
______________ using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
Answer:
Professional Accountant

Question 165.
______________ after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
Answer:
Financial Advisor

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful ______________ using one’s own creation and innovation.
Answer:
Animator

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a ______________
Answer:
Games Developer

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an ______________, one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
Answer:
Audio/Video Editor

Question 169.
______________ is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 170.
The goals of ______________ are similar to green chemistry.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 171.
______________ is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to largescale data centers.
Answer:
Green Computing

Question 172.
Full form of IOT is ______________
Answer:
Internet of Things

Question 173.
The ______________ is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
Answer:
Internet of Things

Question 174.
______________ is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
Answer:
Cloud Computing

Question 175.
______________ is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
Answer:
Data Analytics

Question 176.
______________ technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more-informed business decisions.
Answer:
Data Analytics

Question 177.
______________ is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence

Question 178.
Computer science defines ______________ research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
Answer:
Artificial Intelligence

Question 179.
______________ is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
Answer:
Machine Learning

Question 180.
______________ refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
Answer:
Big Data

Question 181.
______________ is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
Answer:
Blockchain

2. True or False.

Question 1.
Information Technology encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Programmers refer to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
The full form of ICT is Information and Communication Technology:
Answer:
True

Question 4.
The Computer Science concept involves the transfer and use of all kinds of information.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
Information and Communication Technology is the foundation of the economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
Data can be any character, text, word, number, or raw facts.
Answer:
True

Question 7.
The virus is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from the Latin word Komptom.
Answer:
False

Question 9.
An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a Typewriter.
Answer:
False

Question 10.
A computer can process data, images, audio, video, and graphics.
Answer:
True

Question 11.
Computer accepts data or instructions by way of input.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
Computer stores data.
Answer:
True

Question 13.
The computer can process data as required by the user.
Answer:
True

Question 14.
The computer gives results in the form of output.
Answer:
True

Question 15.
Machine controls all operations inside a computer.
Answer:
False

Question 16.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 17.
Website refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
Answer:
False

Question 18.
Storage Unit helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
The main function of hardware devices is to direct commands and data into computers.
Answer:
False

Question 20.
The keyboard is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
A Mouse can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
Answer:
True

Question 22.
The full form of CPU is Central Processing Unit.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
Answer:
False

Question 24.
The Central Processing Unit further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit, and Memory Unit.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 25.
The full form of ALU is the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
Answer:
True

Question 26.
The Control Unit part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
Answer:
True

Question 28.
The arithmetic and Logic Unit is the backbone of computers.
Answer:
False

Question 29.
The Control unit is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 30.
The Control Unit collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
Answer:
True

Question 31.
Control Unit transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
Answer:
True

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its Control Unit.
Answer:
False

Question 33.
The memory unit uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
Answer:
True

Question 34.
Secondary Memory is the internal memory of the computer.
Answer:
False

Question 35.
Secondary Memory is also known as main memory.
Answer:
False

Question 36.
Secondary Memory holds the data and instructions on which computer is currently working.
Answer:
False

Question 37.
RAM stands for Random Access Memory.
Answer:
True

Question 38.
Random Access Memory is known as reading/write memory.
Answer:
True

Question 39.
Random Access Memory is generally referred to as the main memory of the computer system.
Answer:
True

Question 40.
Random Access Memory is a temporary memory.
Answer:
True

Question 41.
Read-Only Memory is also called Volatile Memory.
Answer:
False

Question 42.
ROM stands for Read-Only Memory.
Answer:
True

Question 43.
Random Access Memory is a Permanent Type of memory.
Answer:
False

Question 44.
Random Access Memory cannot be overwritten by the computer.
Answer:
False

Question 45.
Random Access Memory is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
Answer:
False

Question 46.
Secondary Memory is an external memory of the computer.
Answer:
True

Question 47.
Secondary Memory is used to store a huge amount of different programs and information.
Answer:
True

Question 48.
Does the input Unit basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for the user’s benefit?
Answer:
False

Question 49.
A bit is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a Nibble.
Answer:
True

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a Kilobyte.
Answer:
False

Question 52.
A Byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
Answer:
True

Question 53.
1 Byte is 8 Bits.
Answer:
True

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is 1,024 Bytes.
Answer:
True

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is 1 Terabyte.
Answer:
False

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is 1024 bites.
Answer:
False

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is 1,024 GigaBytes.
Answer:
True

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is 1,024 TeraBytes.
Answer:
True

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is 1024 Megabytes.
Answer:
False

Question 60.
The program comprises the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
Answer:
False

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as hardware.
Answer:
False

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called Hardware.
Answer:
False

Question 63.
Hardware is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
Answer:
False

Question 64.
Open-source software refers to the software which releases code in the public domain for anyone to use.
Answer:
True

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS Free Open Source Software Policy.
Answer:
True

Question 66.
Free Open Source Software Policy and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
Answer:
True

Question 67.
In the case of Closed source software, a user has to purchase the software before using it.
Answer:
True

Question 68.
The machine is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
Answer:
False

Question 69.
Hardware is also called end-user programs.
Answer:
False

Question 70.
Pen Drive is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
Answer:
False

Question 71.
Linux Operating system is a program that allows different applications and various components of the hardware.
Answer:
True

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 73.
An operating system is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
Answer:
True

Question 74.
The operating system boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
Answer:
True

Question 75.
The operating system is also what runs the cell phone and most electronic devices.
Answer:
True

Question 76.
The operating systems usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop, or cell phone that the user buys.
Answer:
True

Question 77.
The full form of DOS is Disk Operating System.
Answer:
True

Question 78.
Linux is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 79.
Windows is the most commonly used operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called Mac OS.
Answer:
True

Question 81.
Chrome OS is an open-source operating system created by Google.
Answer:
True

Question 82.
Linux is an open-source, portable, multi-multiprogramming, operating system.
Answer:
True

Question 83.
Asha is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
Answer:
False

Question 84.
Android is used by Nokia phones. This is a closed source OS.
Answer:
False

Question 85.
Blackberry is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
Answer:
True

Question 86.
Windows is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, and second-generation Apple TVs.
Answer:
False

Question 87.
IOS Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
Answer:
False

Question 88.
Linux is used as the predominant backbone of the Internet.
Answer:
True

Question 89.
Ubuntu is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distributions.
Answer:
True

Question 90.
The full form of GUI is Graphical User Interface.
Answer:
True

Question 91.
Full form of CLI Command Line Interface.
Answer:
True

Question 92.
The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
Answer:
True

Question 93.
The Home option is used for a quick search of the application.
Answer:
False

Question 94.
The Search folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
Answer:
False

Question 95.
The Command is when the user interacts with the computer using text.
Answer:
False

Question 96.
The command-line interface is programs that are run when a user types the command name.
Answer:
False

Question 97.
Proprietary is Free and Open Source.
Answer:
False

Question 98.
Linux Operating System is free from viruses.
Answer:
True

Question 99.
Repositories Operating Systems can update themselves.
Answer:
False

Question 100.
The repository is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
Answer:
True

Question 101.
The Package manager updates the operating system as well as other software periodically.
Answer:
True

Question 102.
Local Area Network is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
Answer:
False

Question 103.
A Metropolitan Area Network consists of a collection of computers, printers, and other equipment that is connected together.
Answer:
False

Question 104.
The full form of LAN is the Local Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 105.
The full form of MAN is Metropolitan Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 106.
The full form of WAN is a Wide Area Network.
Answer:
True

Question 107.
Wide Area Network type of network covers the smallest area.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 108.
Metropolitan Area Network covers an area larger than LAN.
Answer:
True

Question 109.
Local Area Network type of network comprises the largest of all.
Answer:
False

Question 110.
In Local Area Network, usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
Answer:
True

Question 111.
Metropolitan Area Network covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
Answer:
False

Question 112.
Local Area Network type of network is easy to set up.
Answer:
True

Question 113.
In Local Area Network data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked is limited.
Answer:
True

Question 114.
Local Area Network is less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
Answer:
True

Question 115.
Metropolitan Area Network connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
Answer:
True

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is Internet Service Provider.
Answer:
True

Question 117.
Metropolitan Area Network covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
Answer:
True

Question 118.
Metropolitan Area Network type of network is hard to design and maintain.3
Answer:
True

Question 119.
A Wide Area Network is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
Answer:
True

Question 120.
In the Wide Area Network type of network, the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
Answer:
True

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for Wide Area networks is Telephone networks or Satellite Link.
Answer:
True

Question 122.
Client-Server is the design of a computer network.
Answer:
False

Question 123.
A Peer-to-Peer network has no dedicated servers.
Answer:
True

Question 124.
Client-Server type of architecture is most suitable for larger networks.
Answer:
True

Question 125.
A computer that is seeking any resource from another computer is a Client computer.
Answer:
False

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource that is served to another computer, it is a client computer.
Answer:
False

Question 127.
Memory means connecting a computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 128.
The Internet is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
Answer:
True

Question 129.
The Internet is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
Answer:
True

Question 130.
With the help of the Internet, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
Answer:
True

Question 131.
It can be said that services provide a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
Answer:
False

Question 132.
The full form of ARPANET is Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
Answer:
True

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960s with the creation of HTML.
Answer:
False

Question 134.
Packets used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
Answer:
False

Question 135.
The full form of TCP/IP is Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 136.
HTML communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
Answer:
False

Question 137.
The full form of WWW is World Wide Web.
Answer:
True

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the World Wide Web.
Answer:
True

Question 139.
A DNS is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network. Protocol.
Answer:
False

Question 140.
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
Answer:
True

Question 141.
The full form of DNS is Domain Name System.
Answer:
True

Question 142.
Protocol translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
Answer:
False

Question 143.
DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 144.
DNS can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
Answer:
False

Question 145.
FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 146.
HTTP is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 147.
The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 148.
HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
Answer:
True

Question 149.
The full form of IMAP is Internet Message Access Protocol.
Answer:
True

Question 150.
FTP is used for receiving e-mail messages from servers on the Internet.
Answer:
False

Question 151.
HTTP maintains a copy of all the emails on the server.
Answer:
False

Question 152.
The full form of IRC is Internet Relay Chat.
Answer:
True

Question 153.
FTP facilitates communication in the form of text.
Answer:
False

Question 154.
POP3 stands for Post Office Protocol Version 3.
Answer:
True

Question 155.
Post Office Protocol Version 3 is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
Answer:
True

Question 156.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
Answer:
True

Question 157.
The full form of ITES is IT Enabled Services.
Answer:
True

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as Information Technology.
Answer:
False

Question 159.
IT Enabled Services covers the entire amount of operations that exploit Information Technology for improving the efficiency of an organization.
Answer:
True

Question 160.
Database Manager can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP, and various other programming languages.
Answer:
False

Question 161.
It is possible to have a career as a Financial Advisor with scripting skills.
Answer:
False

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a Web Designer.
Answer:
False

Question 163.
Professional Accountant is responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
Answer:
False

Question 164.
Information Security Analyst using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
Answer:
False

Question 165.
Software developers after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
Answer:
False

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own creation and innovation.
Answer:
True

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a games developer.
Answer:
True

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an Audio/Video Editor, one should be good at tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
Answer:
True

Question 169.
Internet of Things is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
Answer:
False

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 170.
The goals of Cloud Computing are similar to green chemistry.
Answer:
False

Question 171.
Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to large-scale data centers.
Answer:
True

Question 172.
The full form of IoT is the Internet of Things.
Answer:
True

Question 173.
Data Analytics is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
Answer:
False

Question 174.
Artificial Intelligence is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
Answer:
False

Question 175.
Machine Learning is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
Answer:
False

Question 176.
Data analytics technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more informed business decisions.
Answer:
True

Question 177.
Artificial Intelligence is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
Answer:
True

Question 178.
Computer science defines Blockchain research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
Answer:
False

Question 179.
Machine Learning is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
Answer:
True

Question 180.
Big Data refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
Answer:
True

Question 181.
Blockchain is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
Answer:
True

3. Multiple Choice Question (Single Choice)

Question 1.
______________ encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information.
(A) Information Technology
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Information Technology

Question 2.
______________ refers to hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks.
(A) Hardware
(B) Software
(C) Information Technology
(D) Computer Programs
Answer:
(C) Information Technology

Question 3.
Full form of ICT is ______________
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Question 4.
______________ concept involves transfer and use of all kinds of information.
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Question 5.
______________ is the foundation of economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.
(A) Information and Computer Technology
(B) Internet and Communication Technology
(C) Information and Communication Technology
(D) Information and Carrier Technology
Answer:
(C) Information and Communication Technology

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.
______________ can be any character, text, word, number or raw facts.
(A) Character
(B) Data
(C) Text
(D) Facts
Answer:
(B) Data

Question 7.
______________ is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way
(A) Information
(B) Information Technology
(C) System
(D) Programming
Answer:
(A) Information

Question 8.
The word Computer is derived from a Latin word ______________
(A) Computare
(B) Audio
(C) Video
(D) Graphics
Answer:
(A) Computare

Question 9.
An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a ______________
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 10.
A ______________ can process data, images, audio, video and graphics.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 11.
______________ accepts data or instructions by way of input.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 12.
______________ stores data.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 13.
______________ can process data as required by the user.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 14.
______________ gives results in the form of output.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 15.
______________ controls all operations inside a computer.
(A) Audio
(B) Video
(C) Graphics
(D) Computer
Answer:
(D) Computer

Question 16.
______________ is a specification detailing of how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
(A) Computer Architecture
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Computer Architecture

Question 17.
______________ refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.
(A) Computer Architecture
(B) Hardware
(C) Software
(D) System
Answer:
(A) Computer Architecture

Question 18.
______________ helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(C) Input Unit

Question 19.
The main function of ______________ devices is to direct commands and data into computer.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(D) Input

Question 20.
______________ is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(A) Keyboard

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 21.
A ______________ can be an input device for entering directions and commands.
(A) Keyboard
(B) Mouse
(C) Input Unit
(D) Input
Answer:
(B) Mouse

Question 22.
Full full for CPU is ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Computer Processing Unit
(C) Central Programmer Unit
(D) Computer Programmer Unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 23.
After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 24.
The ______________ further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit and Memory Unit.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(A) Central Processing Unit

Question 25.
Full form of ALU is ______________
(A) Asian Learning Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Arithmetic Learning Unit
(D) Arithmetic Lesson unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 26.
______________ part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 27.
______________ can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit

Question 28.
______________ is the backbone of computers.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 29.
______________ responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 30.
The ______________ collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Question 31.
______________ transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(C) Control Unit

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 32.
Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its ______________
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory unit
Answer:
(D) Memory Unit

Question 33.
The ______________ uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.
(A) Central Processing Unit
(B) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
Answer:
(D) Memory Unit

Question 34.
______________ is internal memory of the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary memory

Question 35.
______________ is also known as main memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary memory

Question 36.
______________ holds the data and instruction on which computer is currently working.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(A) Primary Memory

Question 37.
RAM stands for ______________
(A) Random Access Memory
(B) Read Access Memory
(C) Ram Access Memory
(D) Random Access Machine
Answer:
(A) Random Access Memory

Question 38.
______________ is known as read/write memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 39.
______________ is generally referred to as main memory of the computer system.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 40.
______________ is a temporary memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 41.
______________ is also called as Volatile Memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory

Question 42.
ROM stands for ______________
(A) Read-Only Memory
(B) Read Only Machine
(C) Rom Only Memory
(D) Ram Only Memory
Answer:
(A) Read-Only Memory

Question 43.
______________ is a Permanent Type memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 44.
______________ cannot be overwritten by the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 45.
______________ is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(C) Read-Only Memory

Question 46.
______________ is an external memory of the computer.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(D) Secondary Memory

Question 47.
______________ is used to store the huge amount of different programs and information.
(A) Primary memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Read-Only Memory
(D) Secondary Memory
Answer:
(D) Secondary Memory

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 48.
______________ basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for user’s benefit.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(A) Output unit

Question 49.
______________ is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(B) Bit

Question 50.
A group of 4 bits is called a ______________
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(C) Nibble

Question 51.
A group of 8 bits is called a ______________
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(D) Byte

Question 52.
A ______________ is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
(A) Output unit
(B) Bit
(C) Nibble
(D) Byte
Answer:
(D) Byte

Question 53.
1 Byte is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(A) 8 Bits

Question 54.
1 KiloByte (KB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(B) 1,024 Bytes

Question 55.
1 MegaByte (MB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes

Question 56.
1 GigaByte (GB) is ______________
(A) 8 Bits
(B) 1,024 Bytes
(C) 1,024 KiloBytes
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes
Answer:
(D) 1,024 MegaBytes

Question 57.
1 TeraByte (TB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes

Question 58.
1 PetaByte (PB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes

Question 59.
1 ExaByte (EB) is ______________
(A) 1,024 GigaBytes
(B) 1,024 TeraBytes
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes
(D) MegaBytes
Answer:
(C) 1,024 PetaBytes

Question 60.
______________ comprises of the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(A) Computer hardware

Question 61.
A set of instructions given to the computer is known as a ______________
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(B) Program

Question 62.
Program or set of programs are called as ______________
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(C) Software

Question 63.
______________ is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(C) Software

Question 64.
______________ refers to the software which releases code in public domain for anyone to use.
(A) Computer hardware
(B) Program
(C) Software
(D) Open source software
Answer:
(D) Open source software

Question 65.
Full form of FOSS ______________
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) First Open Source Software Policy
Answer:
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 66.
______________ and it enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) First Open Source Software Policy
Answer:
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy

Question 67.
In case of ______________, user has to purchase the software before using it.
(A) Free Open Source Software Policy
(B) Free Open System Source Policy
(C) Free Open Source System Policy
(D) Closed Source Software
Answer:
(D) Closed Source Software

Question 68.
______________ is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(A) Application Software

Question 69.
______________ is also called end-user programs.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(A) Application Software

Question 70.
______________ is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(B) System Software

Question 71.
______________ is a program that allows different applications and various components of hardware.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating system
Answer:
(C) Linux Operating System

Question 72.
A computer would not be able to function correctly without an ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 73.
An ______________ is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 74.
The ______________ boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 75.
The ______________ is also what runs the cell phone and most of the electronic devices.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating system
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 76.
The ______________ usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop or cell phone that user buy.
(A) Application Software
(B) System Software
(C) Linux Operating System
(D) Operating System
Answer:
(D) Operating System

Question 77.
Full form of DOS is ______________
(A) Disk Operating System
(B) Disk Open System
(C) Dynamic Operating System
(D) Dynamic Open System
Answer:
(A) Disk Operating System

Question 78.
______________ is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(A) Windows

Question 79.
______________ is the most commonly used operating system.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(A) Windows

Question 80.
Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called ______________
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(B) Mac OS

Question 81.
______________ is an open-source operating system created by Google.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(C) Chrome OS

Question 82.
______________ is an open-source, portable, multi-multiprogramming, operating system.
(A) Windows
(B) Mac OS
(C) Chrome OS
(D) Linux
Answer:
(D) Linux

Question 83.
______________ is a free and open source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(A) Android

Question 84.
______________ is used by Nokia phones. This is closed source OS.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(B) Asha

Question 85.
______________ is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) IOS
Answer:
(C) Blackberry

Question 86.
______________ is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad and second-generation Apple TVs.
(A) Android
(B) Asha
(C) Blackberry
(D) iPhone Operating System
Answer:
(D) Iphone Operating System

Question 87.
______________ Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(A) Windows

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 88.
______________ is used as the predominantly backbone of the Internet.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(C) Linux

Question 89.
______________ is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distribution.
(A) Windows
(B) Android
(C) Linux
(D) Ubuntu
Answer:
(D) Ubuntu

Question 90.
Full form of GUI is ______________
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Graphic Using Internet
(C) Game Using Internet
(D) Game User Internet
Answer:
(A) Graphical User Interface

Question 91.
Full form of CLI ______________
(A) Command Line Internet
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Central Line Interface
(D) Computer Line Interface
Answer:
(B) Command Line Interface

Question 92.
The ______________ is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(A) Graphical User Interface

Question 93.
The ______________ option is used for quick search of the application.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(C) Search

Question 94.
The ______________ folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(D) Home

Question 95.
The ______________ is when user interacts with the computer using text.
(A) Graphical User Interface
(B) Command Line Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(B) Command Line Interface

Question 96.
The ______________ are programs that are run when user types command name.
(A) Commands
(B) Graphical User Interface
(C) Search
(D) Home
Answer:
(A) Commands

Question 97.
______________ is Free and Open Source.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(A) Linux

Question 98.
______________ Operating System is free from viruses.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(A) Linux

Question 99.
______________ Operating Systems can update themselves.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(B) Proprietary

Question 100.
______________ is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(C) Repositories

Question 101.
The ______________ manager updates the operating system as well as other softwares periodically.
(A) Linux
(B) Proprietary
(C) Repositories
(D) Package
Answer:
(D) Package

Question 102.
______________ is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Computer Network

Question 103.
A ______________ consists of a collection of computers, printers and other equipment that is connected together.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Computer Network

Question 104.
Full form of LAN is ______________
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Local Access Network
(C) Live Area Network
(D) Live Access Network
Answer:
(A) Local Area Network

Question 105.
Full form of MAN is ______________
(A) Metropolitan Area Network
(B) Metropolitan Access network
(C) Mobile Area Network
(D) Mobile Access Network
Answer:
(A) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 106.
Full form of WAN is ______________
(A) Wide Area Network
(B) World Area Network
(C) Wonder Area Network
(D) Wide Access Network
Answer:
(A) Wide Area Network

Question 107.
______________ type of network covers the smallest area.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 108.
______________ covers an area larger than LAN.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 109.
______________ type of network comprises the largest of all.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 110.
In ______________ usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 111.
______________ covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 112.
______________ type of network is easy to setup.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 113.
In ______________ data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked are limited.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 114.
______________ is a less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(B) Local Area Network

Question 115.
______________ connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 116.
Full for of ISP is ______________
(A) Internet Service Provider
(B) International Service Provider
(C) Indian Server Provider
(D) Internet Server Provider
Answer:
(A) Internet Service Provider

Question 117.
______________ covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 118.
______________ type of network is hard to design and maintain.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(D) Metropolitan Area Network

Question 119.
______________ is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 120.
In ______________ type of network the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 121.
A Communication medium used for ______________ is Telephone Network or Satellite Link.
(A) Computer Network
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(C) Wide Area Network

Question 122.
______________ is the design of a computer network.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(A) Network Architecture

Question 123.
A ______________ network has no dedicated servers.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(B) Peer-to-Peer

Question 124.
______________ type of architecture is most suitable for larger network.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(C) Client-Server

Question 125.
A computer which is seeking any resource from another computer is a ______________ computer.
(A) Network architecture
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(D) Client

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 126.
If a computer has a resource which is served to another computer, it is a ______________ computer.
(A) Server
(B) Peer-to-Peer
(C) Client-Server
(D) Client
Answer:
(A) Server

Question 127.
______________ means connecting computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 128.
The ______________ is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 129.
The ______________ is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 130.
With the help of the ______________, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 131.
It can be said that ______________ provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.
(A) Internet
(B) Local Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Metropolitan Area Network
Answer:
(A) Internet

Question 132.
Full form of ARPANET is ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Advanced Research Project Area Network
(C) Advanced Research Project Access Network
(D) Advance Recovery Project Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 133.
The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 134.
______________ used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Question 135.
Full form of TCP/IP is ______________
(A) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(B) Transfer Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) Transmission Control Password and Internet Password
(D) Transfer Control Process and Internet Password
Answer:
(A) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 136.
______________ communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol

Question 137.
Full form of WWW is ______________
(A) World Wide Website
(B) Web Wide World
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Wide Web World
Answer:
(C) World Wide Web

Question 138.
Tim Berners-Lee invented the ______________
(A) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(B) Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol
(C) World Wide Web
(D) Local Area Network
Answer:
(C) World Wide Web

Question 139.
A ______________ is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(A) Protocol

Question 140.
______________ breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 141.
Full form of DNS is ______________
(A) Domain Name System
(B) Dynamic Name System
(C) Domain Name Service
(D) Dynamic Name Service
Answer:
(A) Domain Name System

Question 142.
______________ translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(C) Domain Name System

Question 143.
DHCP stands for ______________
(A) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(B) Domain Host Configuration Protocol
(C) Dynamic Host Configuration Process
(D) Domain Host Configuration Process
Answer:
(A) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 144.
______________ can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
(A) Protocol
(B) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol
(C) Domain Name System
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Answer:
(D) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

Question 145.
FTP stands for ______________
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) File Transfer Process
(C) File Time Pass
(D) File Time Protocol
Answer:
(A) File Transfer Protocol

Question 146.
______________ is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(A) File Transfer Protocol

Question 147.
Full form of HTTP is ______________
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Test Transfer Protocol
(C) Hyper Transfer Text
(D) Hyper Text Transfer Process
Answer:
(A) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 148.
______________ is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Question 149.
Full form of IMAP is ______________
(A) Internet Message Access Protocol
(B) Internet Message Access Process
(C) Internet Message Access Program
(D) Information Message Access Protocol
Answer:
(A) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 150.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail messages from server on the Internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) HyperText Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 151.
______________ maintains a copy of all the emails on server.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol

Question 152.
Full form of IRC is ______________
(A) Internet Relay Chat
(B) International Relay Chat
(C) Internet Regional Chat
(D) Internet Random Chat
Answer:
(A) Internet Relay Chat

Question 153.
______________ facilitates communication in the form of text.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Internet Relay Chat
Answer:
(D) Internet Relay Chat

Question 154.
POP3 stands for ______________
(A) Post Office Protocol Version 3
(B) Post Office Process Version 3
(C) Protocol Office Post Version 3
(D) Process Office Protocol Version 3
Answer:
(A) Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 155.
______________ is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Post Office Protocol Version 3
Answer:
(D) Post Office Protocol Version 3

Question 156.
______________ is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Answer:
(D) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Question 157.
Full form of ITES is ______________
(A) IT Enabled Services
(B) IT Encrypted Service
(C) IT Essential Service
(D) IT Safe Service
Answer:
(A) IT Enabled Services

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 158.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as ______________
(A) Web Enabled Services
(B) Word Enabled Services
(C) Wide Enabled Services
(D) Web Engineer Services
Answer:
(A) Web Enabled Services

Question 159.
______________ covers the entire amount of operations which exploit Information Technology for improving efficiency of an organization.
(A) File Transfer Protocol
(B) Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(C) Internet Message Access Protocol
(D) IT Enabled Services
Answer:
(D) IT Enabled Services

Question 160.
______________ can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP and various
other programming languages.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(A) Web Designer

Question 161.
It is possible to have career as a ______________ with the scripting skills.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(B) Software Developer

Question 162.
After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a ______________
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(C) Database Manager

Question 163.
______________ are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
(A) Web Designer
(B) Software Developer
(C) Database Manager
(D) Information Security Analyst
Answer:
(D) Information Security Analyst

Question 164.
______________ using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(A) Professional Accountant

Question 165.
______________ after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(B) Financial Advisor

Question 166.
It is possible to become a successful ______________ using one’s own creation and innovation.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(C) Animator

Question 167.
Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a ______________
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Games Developer
Answer:
(D) Games Developer

Question 168.
As a career opportunity, to become an ______________, one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.
(A) Professional Accountant
(B) Financial Advisor
(C) Animator
(D) Audio/Video Editor
Answer:
(D) Audio/Video Editor

Question 169.
______________ is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Question 170.
The goals of ______________ are similar to green chemistry
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 171.
______________ is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to largescale data centers.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(A) Green Computing

Question 172.
Full form of IOT is ______________
(A) Internet of Time
(B) Internet of Things
(C) International of Time
(D) Intelligent of Things
Answer:
(B) Internet of Things

Question 173.
The ______________ is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(B) Internet of Things

Question 174.
______________ is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(C) Cloud Computing

Question 175.
______________ is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(D) Data Analytics

Question 176.
______________ technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable
organizations to make more-informed business decisions.
(A) Green Computing
(B) Internet of Things
(C) Cloud Computing
(D) Data Analytics
Answer:
(D) Data Analytics

Question 177.
______________ is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(A) Artificial Intelligence

Question 178.
Computer science defines ______________ research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(A) Artificial Intelligence

Question 179.
______________ is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(B) Machine Learning

Question 180.
______________ refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(C) Big Data

Question 181.
______________ is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.
(A) Artificial Intelligence
(B) Machine Learning
(C) Big Data
(D) Blockchain
Answer:
(D) Blockchain

4. Multiple Choice Two Correct Answer.

Question 1.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing of how a set of ______________ and ______________ technology standards interact to form a computer system
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Commands
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Software (E) Hardware

Question 2.
Input unit helps users to enter ______________ and ______________ into a computer system.
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Commands
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Data (D) Commands

Question 3.
The main function of input devices is to ______________ and ______________ into computer.
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Direct Commands
(D) Data
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(C) Direct Commands (D) Data

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 4.
Keyboard is an input device that enters ______________ and ______________
(A) Software
(B) Numbers
(C) Data
(D) Characters
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(B) Numbers (D) Characters

Question 5.
A Mouse can be an input device for entering ______________ and ______________
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(A) Directions (B) Commands

Question 6.
After receiving ______________ and ______________ from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Central Processing Unit.
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(B) Commands (C) Data

Question 7.
Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform ______________ functions like the ______________ of data.
(A) Directions
(B) Commands
(C) Data
(D) Logical
(E) Comparison
Answer:
(D) Logical (E) Comparison

Question 8.
There are two types of memory ______________ & ______________
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(A) Primary Memory (C) Secondary Memory

Question 9.
Primary memory is generally of two types ______________ & ______________
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Random Access Memory
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Random Access Memory (D) Read Only Memory

Question 10.
Primary Memory holds the ______________ and ______________ on which computer is currently working.
(A) Primary Memory
(B) Instruction
(C) Secondary Memory
(D) Read-Only Memory
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Instruction (E) Data

Question 11.
______________ and ______________ is often measured in Megabytes (MB) and Gigabytes (GB).
(A) Computer storage
(B) Megabytes (MB)
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(A) Computer storage (C) Memory

Question 12.
Computer storage and memory is often measured in ______________ and ______________
(A) Computer storage
(B) Megabytes (MB)
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Megabytes (MB) (D) Gigabytes (GB)

Question 13.
A byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a ______________ item or a ______________
(A) Computer storage
(B) Character
(C) Memory
(D) Gigabytes (GB)
(E) Data
Answer:
(B) Character (E) Data

Question 14.
Computer hardware comprises of the ______________ components that a computer system requires to ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(B) Physical (D) Function

Question 15.
Computer software can be classified into two types based on its utility ______________ & ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Application Software (C) System Software

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 16.
Linux Operating system is a program that allows different ______________ and various components of ______________
(A) Application
(B) Physical
(C) System Software
(D) Function
(E) Hardware
Answer:
(A) Application (E) Hardware

Question 17.
An operating system is a software program that empowers the ______________ to communicate and operate with the ______________
(A) Application Software
(B) Physical
(C) Computer Hardware
(D) Function
(E) Computer Software
Answer:
(C) Computer Hardware (E) Computer Software

Question 18.
Windows is a series of ______________ that are designed by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Microsoft
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(A) Operating Systems (C) Microsoft

Question 19.
Chrome OS is an ______________ system created by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Microsoft
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(B) Open-Source Operating (D) Google

Question 20.
Linux is an open-source, ______________, ______________, operating system.
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Portable
(D) Google
(E) Multi-User-Multiprogramming
Answer:
(C) Portable (E) Multi-User-Multiprogramming

Question 21.
Android is a free and ______________ for mobile phones provided by ______________
(A) Operating Systems
(B) Open-Source Operating
(C) Multi- Multiprogramming
(D) Google
(E) Portable
Answer:
(B) Open-Source Operating (D) Google

Question 22.
Asha is used by ______________ phones. This is ______________ OS.
(A) Nokia
(B) Microsoft
(C) Closed Source
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(A) Nokia (C) Closed Source

Question 23.
Blackberry is a closed source operating system for ______________ and ______________
(A) Smartphone
(B) Tablet Devices
(C) Microsoft
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(A) Smartphone (B)Tablet Devices

Question 24.
Windows Phone is developed by ______________ as a ______________ for mobile phones.
(A) Nokia
(B) Microsoft
(C) Closed Source Operating System
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(B) Microsoft (C) Closed Source Operating System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 25.
UNIX was trademarked in 1969 by a group of AT&T employees at Bell Labs as a ______________ and ______________ computer operating system.
(A) Smartphone
(B) Tablet Devices
(C) Microsoft
(D) Multitasking
(E) Multi-User
Answer:
(D) Multitasking (E) Multi-User

Question 26.
The Search option is used for ______________ search of the ______________
(A) Quick
(B) Personal
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Software
Answer:
(A) Quick (C) Application

Question 27.
The Home folder is where all the ______________ documents and ______________ are stored.
(A) Quick
(B) Personal
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Software
Answer:
(B) Personal (D) Settings

Question 28.
Repositories is a collection of ______________ for a ______________ distribution on the server.
(A) Quick
(B) Software
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Linux
Answer:
(B) Software (E) Linux

Question 29.
The Package manager updates the ______________ as well as other ______________ periodically.
(A) Operating System
(B) Softwares
(C) Application
(D) Settings
(E) Linux
Answer:
(A) Operating System (B) Softwares

Question 30.
Computer Network is a group of ______________ or ______________ to have communication within themselves.
(A) Interconnected Computers
(B) Devices
(C) High Speed
(D) Relatively Expensive
(E) Telephone Network
Answer:
(A) Interconnected Computers (B) Devices

Question 31.
In Wide Area Network type of network the technology is ______________ and ______________
(A) Interconnected Computers
(B) Devices
(C) High Speed
(D) Relatively Expensive
(E) Telephone Network
Answer:
(C) Highspeed (D) Relatively Expensive

Question 32.
A Communication medium used for WAN is ______________ or ______________
(A) Devices
(B) High Speed
(C) Relatively Expensive
(D) Telephone Network
(E) Satellite Link
Answer:
(D) Telephone Network (E) Satellite Link

Question 33.
Two of the most widely used types of network architecture are ______________ and ______________
(A) Peer-to-Peer
(B) Devices
(C) Client/Server
(D) High Speed
(E) Relatively Expensive
Answer:
(A) Peer-to-Peer (C) Client/Server

Question 34.
There are two types of machines in network, ______________ and ______________
(A) Client
(B) Devices
(C) Server
(D) High Speed
(E) Relatively Expensive
Answer:
(A) Client (C) Server

Question 35.
The first workable prototype of the ______________ came in the late 1960’s with the creation of ______________
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packet
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Internet (B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 36.
Advanced Research Projects Agency Network used ______________ switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a ______________ network.
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packet
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(C) Packet (D) Single

Question 37.
Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into ______________ and sends them out into the ______________
(A) Internet
(B) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(C) Packets
(D) Single
(E) Network
Answer:
(C) Packets (E) Network

Question 38.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol can automatically assign internet addresses to ______________ and ______________
(A) Computers
(B) Internet
(C) Advanced Research Projects Agency Network
(D) Users
(E) Network
Answer:
(A) Computers (D) Users

Question 39.
File Transfer Protocol is used to ______________ and ______________ files on the internet.
(A) Transfer
(B) Sending
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(A) Transfer (C) Manipulate

Question 40.
HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for ______________ and ______________ web pages.
(A) Transfer
(B) Sending
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(B) Sending (D) Receiving

Question 41.
The outcome of an IT Enabled Service is in two forms ______________ & ______________
(A) Direct Improved Service
(B) Indirect Benefits
(C) Manipulate
(D) Receiving
(E) HTML
Answer:
(A) Direct Improved Service (B) Indirect Benefits

Question 42.
Web Designer can develop interactive websites using knowledge of ______________, ______________ and various other programming languages.
(A) Direct Improved Service
(B) Indirect Benefits
(C) HTML
(D) Receiving
(E) PHP
Answer:
(C) HTML (E) PHP

Question 43.
Professional Accountant using ______________ software can successfully handle ______________ work.
(A) Computerized Accounting
(B) Accounting
(C) HTML
(D) Receiving
(E) PHP
Answer:
(A) Computerized Accounting (B) Accounting

Question 44.
It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own ______________ and ______________
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Data
(E) Algorithms
Answer:
(A) Creation (C) Innovation

Question 45.
Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from ______________ systems to largescale ______________ centers.
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Data
(E) Algorithms
Answer:
(B) Handheld (D) Data

Question 46.
Machine Learning is the scientific study of ______________ and ______________ models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
(A) Creation
(B) Handheld
(C) Innovation
(D) Algorithms
(E) Statistical
Answer:
(D) Algorithms (E) Statistical

Question 47.
Blockchain is a growing list of records, called ______________, which are linked using ______________
(A) Blocks
(B) Creation
(C) Handheld
(D) Innovation
(E) Cryptography
Answer:
(A) Blocks (E) Cryptography

5. Multiple Choice Three Correct Answers.

Question 1.
Information technology refers to ______________, ______________, and ______________
(A) Hardware
(B) Input Unit
(C) Output Unit
(D) Software (computer programs)
(E) Computer Networks
Answer:
(A) Hardware (D) Software (computer programs) (E) Computer networks

Question 2.
Computer Architecture is a specification detailing of how a set of ______________ and ______________ technology standards interact to form a ______________
(A) Software
(B) Hardware
(C) Computer System
(D) Input Unit
(E) Output Unit
Answer:
(A) Software (B) Hardware (C) Computer System

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 3.
Every computer system has the following three basic components ______________, ______________ & ______________
(A) Data
(B) Commands
(C) Input Unit
(D) Central Processing Unit
(E) Output Unit
Answer:
(C) Input Unit (D) Central Processing Unit (E) Output Unit

Question 4.
Input unit helps users to enter ______________ and ______________ into a ______________
(A) Data
(B) Commands
(C) Input Unit
(D) Central Processing Unit
(E) Computer System
Answer:
(A) Data (B) Commands (E) Computer System

Question 5.
The CPU further uses these three elements ______________, ______________ & ______________
(A) Arithmetic and Logic Unit
(B) Image
(C) Control Unit
(D) Memory Unit
(E) Icons
Answer:
(A) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Control Unit (D) Memory Unit

Question 6.
The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using ______________ , ______________, and ______________
(A) Images
(B) Icons
(C) Dialog Boxes
(D) Computers
(E) Printers
Answer:
(A) Images (B) Icons (C) Dialog Boxes

Question 7.
A computer network consists of a collection of ______________, ______________ and ______________ that is connected together.
(A) Computers
(B) Printers
(C) Metropolitan Area Network
(D) Wide Area Network
(E) Other equipment
Answer:
(A) Computers (B) Printers (E) Other equipment

Question 8.
______________, ______________ & ______________ are three types of network based on the geographical area they cover.
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Metropolitan Area Network
(C) Wide Area Network
(D) Web enabled services
(E) Remote services
Answer:
(A) Local Area Network (B) Metropolitan Area Network (C) Wide Area Network

Question 9.
IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called ______________ or ______________ or ______________
(A) Local Area Network
(B) Wide Area Network
(C) Web Enabled Services
(D) Remote Services
(E) Tele-Working
Answer:
(C) Web Enabled Services (D) Remote Services (E) Tele-Working

6. Match the following.

Question 1.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Computer (A) Input device
(2) Keyboard (B) Computare
(3) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Arithmetic Operations
(4) Memory Unit (D) Pre-programmed instructions

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Computer (B) Computare
(2) Keyboard (A) Input device
(3) Arithmetic and Logic Unit (C) Arithmetic Operations
(4) Memory Unit (D) Pre-programmed instructions

Question 2.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Memory (A) Non-Volatile Memory
(2) RAM (B) Volatile Memory
(3) ROM (C) Internal memory
(4) Binary Digit (D) 0 or 1

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Primary Memory (C) Internal memory
(2) RAM (B) Volatile Memory
(3) ROM (A) Non-Volatile Memory
(4) Binary Digit (D) 0 or 1

Question 3.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) 4 bits (A) Software
(2) 8 bits (B) Physical components
(3) Computer hardware (C) Byte
(4) Program or set of programs (D) Nibble

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) 4 bits (D) Nibble
(2) 8 bits (C) Byte
(3) Computer hardware (B) Physical components
(4) Program or set of programs (A) Software

Question 4.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Open source software (A) Public domain
(2) Closed source software (B) Purchase the software
(3) Applications software (C) Operating system
(4) System Software (D) End-user programs

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Open source software (A) Public domain
(2) Closed source software (B) Purchase the software
(3) Applications software (D) End-user programs
(4) System Software (C) Operating system

Question 5.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Apple Corporation’s (A) Mac OS
(2) Google (B) Android
(3) Asha (C) Nokia Phones
(4) Microsoft (D) Windows Phone

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Apple Corporation’s (A) Mac OS
(2) Google (B) Android
(3) Asha (C) Nokia Phones
(4) Microsoft (D) Windows Phone

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 6.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ubuntu (A) Free from viruses
(2) Linux Operating System (B) GNU/Linux
(3) Repositories (C) Collection of Software

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Ubuntu (B) GNU/Linux
(2) Linux Operating System (A) Free from viruses
(3) Repositories (C) Collection of Software

Question 7.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) LAN (A) Covers the smallest area
(2) MAN (B) The largest of all
(3) WAN (C) Covers an area larger than LAN

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) LAN (A) Covers the smallest area
(2) MAN (C) Covers an area larger than LAN
(3) WAN (B) The largest of all

Question 8.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Peer-to-Peer Architecture (A) Connecting millions of computers
(2) Client-Server Architecture (B) Client and server
(3) Internet (C) World Wide Web
(4) Tim Berners-Lee (D) Same Status

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Peer-to-Peer Architecture (D) Same Status
(2) Client-Server Architecture (B) Client and server
(3) Internet (A) Connecting millions of computers
(4) Tim Berners-Lee (C) World Wide Web

Question 9.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Domain Name System (A) Sending and receiving web pages
(2) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (B) Transfer and manipulate files
(3) File Transfer Protocol (C) Automatically assign internet addresses
(4) HyperText Transfer Protocol (D) Translates Network Address

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Domain Name System (D) Translates Network Address
(2) Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (C) Automatically assign internet addresses
(3) File Transfer Protocol (B) Transfer and manipulate files
(4) HyperText Transfer Protocol (A) Sending and receiving web pages

Question 10.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Internet Message Access Protocol (A) Receiving e-mail messages from the server
(2) Internet Relay Chat (B) Used for Internet chat
(3) Post Office Protocol Version 3 (C) Receiving an e-mail from remote mail servers
(4) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (D) Sending e-mail messages to the Server
(5) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol (E) Breaks down the message into packets

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Internet Message Access Protocol (A) Receiving e-mail messages from the server
(2) Internet Relay Chat (B) Used for Internet chat
(3) Post Office Protocol Version 3 (C) Receiving an e-mail from remote mail servers
(4) Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (D) Sending e-mail messages to the Server
(5) Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol (E) Breaks down the message into packets

Question 11.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Enabled Services (ITES) (A) HTML & PHP
(2) Web Designer and Developer (B) Web Enabled Services
(3) Software Developer (C) Scripting Skill
(4) Database Manager (D) SQL Skills

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) IT Enabled Services (ITES) (B) Web Enabled Services
(2) Web Designer and Developer (A) HTML & PHP
(3) Software Developer (C) Scripting Skill
(4) Database Manager (D) SQL Skills

Question 12.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Information Security Analyst (A) Networks are watertight
(2) Professional Accountant (B) Handle accounting work
(3) Financial Advisor (C) Investing the money
(4) Animator (D) Creation and innovation

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Information Security Analyst (A) Networks are watertight
(2) Professional Accountant (B) Handle accounting work
(3) Financial Advisor (C) Investing the money
(4) Animator (D) Creation and innovation

Question 13.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Green Computing (A) Computing Services
(2) Internet of Things (IoT) (B) Network of Physical Devices
(3) Cloud Computing (C) Green Chemistry
(4) Data Analytics (D) Examining Data

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Green Computing (C) Green Chemistry
(2) Internet of Things (IoT) (B) Network of Physical Devices
(3) Cloud Computing (A) Computing Services
(4) Data Analytics (D) Examining Data

Question 14.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Artificial Intelligence (A) Blocks
(2) Machine Learning (B) Too large or complex
(3) Big Data (C) Algorithms and Statistical Models
(4) Blockchain (D) Intelligent Agents

Answer:

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Artificial Intelligence (D) Intelligent Agents
(2) Machine Learning (C) Algorithms and Statistical Models
(3) Big Data (B) Too large or complex
(4) Blockchain (A) Blocks

7. Answer Briefly.

Question 1.
Define Information Technology.
Answer:
Information Technology encompasses all of the technologies that we use in order to create, collect, process, protect and store information. Information Technology refers to “hardware, software (computer programs), and computer networks”.

Question 2.
Explain ICT.
Answer:

  • The full form of ICT is Information and Communication Technology.
  • The information and Communication Technology concept involves the transfer and use of all kinds of information.
  • Information and Communication Technology is the foundation of the economy and a driving force of social changes in the 21st century.

Question 3.
What are Data and Information?
Answer:
Data can be any character, text, word, number, or raw facts.
Examples of Data:
Mumbai, 1234, Aditya, MG Road, Maharashtra, 9444444441, 411004

Information is data formatted in a manner that allows it to be utilized by human beings in some significant way.
Examples of Information:
Aditya, 1234, MG Road, Mumbai 400004,
Maharashtra, 944444444114.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 4.
What is Computer and Computer System?
Answer:

  1. The word Computer is derived from the Latin word Computare.
  2. An electronic device that accepts input from the user, processes it according to the instructions given to it, and gives the required result in the form of output, is a Computer.
  3. The computer can process data, images, audio, video, and graphics.
  4. Computer accepts data or instructions by way of input.
  5. Computer stores data.
  6. A computer can process data as required by the user.
  7. The computer gives results in the form of output.
  8. The computer controls all operations inside a computer.

Question 5.
What is Computer Architecture?
Answer:

  1. Computer Architecture is a specification detailing how a set of software and hardware technology standards interact to form a computer system.
  2. Computer Architecture refers to how a computer system is designed and how it works.

Question 6.
Explain Input Unit
Answer:

  1. Input unit helps users to enter data and commands into a computer system.
  2. The main function of input devices is to direct commands and data into the computer.
  3. The keyboard is an input device that enters numbers and characters.
  4. A mouse can be an input device for entering directions and commands.

Question 7.
Briefly explain the CPU and its element.
Answer:

  1. After receiving data and commands from users, a computer system has to process it according to the instructions provided. Here, it has to rely on a component called the Central Processing Unit.
  2. The Central Processing Unit further uses these three elements Arithmetic and Logic Unit, Control Unit, and Memory Unit.
  3. The full form of ALU is the Arithmetic and Logic Unit.
  4. The arithmetic and Logic Unit part of the CPU performs arithmetic operations.
  5. Arithmetic and Logic Unit can even perform logical functions like the comparison of data.
  6. The Control Unit is the backbone of computers.
  7. The Control Unit is responsible for coordinating tasks between all components of a computer system.
  8. The Control Unit collects data from input units and sends it to processing units depending on its nature.
  9. Control Unit transmits processed data to output units to facilitate users.
  10. Once a user enters data using input devices, the computer system stores this data in its Memory unit.
  11. The Memory unit uses a set of pre-programmed instructions to further transmit this data to other parts of the CPU.

Question 8.
Explain the types of memory.
Answer:
There are two types of memory (1) Primary Memory (2) Secondary Memory

  1. Primary Memory is the internal memory of the computer.
  2. Primary Memory is also known as main memory.
  3. Primary Memory holds the data and instructions on which computer is currently working.
  4. RAM stands for Random Access Memory.
  5. Random Access Memory is known as reading/write memory.
  6. Random Access Memory is generally referred to as the main memory of the computer system.
  7. Random Access Memory is a temporary memory.
  8. Random Access Memory is also called Volatile Memory.
  9. Read-Only Memory is a Permanent Type memory.
  10. Read-Only Memory cannot be overwritten by the computer.
  11. Read-Only Memory is also called Non-Volatile Memory.
  12. Secondary Memory is an external memory of the computer.
  13. Secondary Memory is used to store a huge amount of different programs and information.

Question 9.
What is the Output unit and units of memory?
Answer:

  1. Output units basically reproduce the data formatted by the computer for the user’s benefit.
  2. The bit is a binary digit that holds only one of two values.
  3. A group of 4 bits is called a Nibble.
  4. A group of 8 bits is called a Byte.
  5. A Byte is the smallest unit, which can represent a data item or a character.
  6. 1 Byte is 8 Bits.
  7. 1 KiloByte (KB) is 1,024 Bytes.
  8. 1 MegaByte (MB) is 1,024 KiloBytes.
  9. 1 GigaByte (GB) is 1,024 MegaBytes.
  10. 1 TeraByte (TB) is 1,024 GigaBytes.
  11. 1 PetaByte (PB) is 1,024 TeraBytes.
  12. 1 ExaByte (EB) is 1,024 PetaBytes.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 10.
Explain concepts of hardware and software.
Answer:

  1. Computer hardware comprises the physical components that a computer system requires to function.
  2. A set of instructions given to the computer is known as Program.
  3. Program or set of programs are called Software.
  4. Software is a generic term used to describe computer programs.
  5. Open-source software refers to the software which releases code in the public domain for anyone to use.
  6. The full form of FOSS is FOSS Free Open Source Software Policy.
  7. Free Open Source Software Policy and enabled them to save some millions of rupees each year in licensing costs.
  8. In the case of Closed Source Software user has to purchase the software before using it.

Question 11.
Write down the classification of software based on its utility.
Answer:

  1. Application software is a program or group of programs designed for end-users.
  2. Applications software is also called end-user programs.
  3. System Software is a set of instructions required for a computer to work.
  4. Linux Operating system is a program that allows different applications and various components of the hardware.
  5. A computer would not be able to function correctly without an operating system.
  6. An operating system is a software program that empowers the computer hardware to communicate and operate with the computer software.
  7. The operating system boots up the computer and makes sure that everything is operational.
  8. The operating system is also what runs the cell phone and most electronic devices.
  9. The operating systems usually come preloaded on any computer, tablet, laptop, or cell phone that the user buys.

Question 12.
Explain Operating Systems for Personal Computers and Mobile Phones.
Answer:

  1. The full form of DOS is Disk Operating System.
  2. Windows is a series of operating systems that are designed by Microsoft.
  3. Windows is the most commonly used operating system.
  4. Apple Corporation’s registered operating system is called Mac OS.
  5. Chrome OS is an open-source operating system created by Google.
  6. Linux is an open-source, portable, multi- multiprogramming, operating system.
  7. Android is a free and open-source operating system for mobile phones provided by Google.
  8. Asha is used by Nokia phones. This is a closed source OS.
  9. Blackberry is a closed source operating system for smartphone and tablet devices.
  10. IOS is Apple’s closed source operating system for Apple’s iPhone, iPod Touch, iPad, and second-generation Apple TVs.
  11. Windows Phone is developed by Microsoft as a closed source operating system for mobile phones.
  12. Linux is used as the predominant backbone of the Internet.
  13. Ubuntu is one of the most popular GNU/Linux distributions.

Question 13.
Explain GUI and CLI.
Answer:

  1. The full form of GUI is Graphical User Interface.
  2. Full form of CLI Command Line Interface.
  3. The graphical user interface is when the user interacts with the computer using images, icons, and dialog boxes.
  4. The Search option is used for a quick search of the application.
  5. The Home folder is where all the personal documents and settings are stored.
  6. The Command-line interface is when the user interacts with the computer using text.
  7. The Commands are programs that are run when a user types the command name.

Question 14.
Explain the advantages of GNU/Linux.
Answer:

  1. Linux is Free and Open Source.
  2. Linux Operating System is free from viruses.
  3. Proprietary Operating Systems can update themselves.
  4. The repository is a collection of software for a Linux distribution on the server.
  5. The Package manager updates the operating system as well as other software periodically.

Question 15.
Define Computer networks and different types of networks.
Answer:

  1. Computer Network is a group of interconnected computers or devices to have communication within themselves.
  2. A Computer Network consists of a collection of computers, printers, and other equipment that is connected together.
  3. The full form of LAN is the Local Area Network.
  4. The full form of MAN is Metropolitan Area Network.
  5. The full form of WAN is a Wide Area Network.
  6. Local Area Network type of network covers the smallest area.
  7. Metropolitan Area Network covers an area larger than LAN.
  8. Wide Area Network type of network comprises the largest of all.
  9. In Local Area Network, usage area is limited to areas such as an office building, home, hospital, schools, etc.
  10. Local Area Network covers a short distance, and so the error and noise are minimized.
  11. Local Area Network type of network is easy to set up.
  12. In Local Area Network data transmits at a very fast rate as the number of computers linked is limited.
  13. Local Area Network is less expensive hardware and maintenance cost is also low.
  14. Metropolitan Area Network connects two or more separate computers that reside in the same or different cities.
  15. Full for of ISP is Internet Service Provider.
  16. Metropolitan Area Network covers a large geographical area and may serve as an ISP.
  17. Metropolitan Area Network type of network is hard to design and maintain.
  18. A Wide Area Network is a computer network that extends over a large geographical area.
  19. In the Wide Area Network type of network, the technology is high speed and relatively expensive.
  20. A Communication medium used for Wide Area networks is Telephone networks or Satellite Link.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 16.
Explain Network Architecture.
Answer:

  1. Network architecture is the design of a computer network.
  2. A Peer-to-Peer network has no dedicated servers.
  3. Client-Server type of architecture is most suitable for larger networks.
  4. A computer that is seeking any resource from another computer is a Client computer.
  5. If a computer has a resource that is served to another computer, it is a Server computer.

Question 17.
What is Internet?
Answer:

  1. Internet means connecting a computer to any other computer anywhere in the world.
  2. The Internet is generally defined as a global network connecting millions of computers.
  3. The Internet is a massive network of networks, a networking infrastructure.
  4. With the help of the Internet, one can easily be in touch with anyone in the whole world by sending electronic mail, by chatting.
  5. It can be said that the Internet provides a very strong connection or network between computers globally.

Question 18.
Write down the history of the Internet.
Answer:

  1. The full form of ARPANET is Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
  2. The first workable prototype of the internet came in the late 1960s with the creation of the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network.
  3. Advanced Research Projects Agency Network used packet switching to allow multiple computers to communicate on a single network.
  4. The full form of TCP/ IP is Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol.
  5. Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol communications model that set standards for how data could be transmitted between multiple networks.
  6. The full form of WWW is World Wide Web.
  7. Tim Berners-Lee invented the World Wide Web.

Question 19.
Define Protocol with examples.
Answer:

  1. A Protocol is a set of rules that governs the communications between computers on a network.
  2. Transmission Control Protocol & Internet Protocol breaks down the message into packets and sends them out into the network.
  3. The full form of DNS is Domain Name System.
  4. Domain Name System translates network address into terms understood by humans and vice-versa.
  5. DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
  6. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol can automatically assign internet addresses to computers and users.
  7. FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol.
  8. File Transfer Protocol is used to transfer and manipulate files on the internet.
  9. The full form of HTTP is HyperText Transfer Protocol.
  10. HyperText Transfer Protocol is an internet-based protocol for sending and receiving web pages.
  11. The full form of IMAP is Internet Message Access Protocol.
  12. Internet Message Access Protocol is used for receiving e-mail messages from servers on the Internet.
  13. Internet Message Access Protocol maintains a copy of all the emails on the server.
  14. The full form of IRC is Internet Relay Chat.
  15. Internet Relay Chat facilitates communication in the form of text.
  16. POP3 stands for Post Office Protocol Version 3.
  17. Post Office Protocol Version 3 is used for receiving e-mail from remote mail servers.
  18. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used for sending e-mail messages to the Server on the Internet.

Question 20.
Explain the meaning of ITES.
Answer:

  1. The full form of ITES is IT Enabled Services.
  2. IT Enabled Services (ITES), also called as Web-Enabled Services.
  3. IT Enabled Services covers the entire amount of operations that exploit Information Technology for improving the efficiency of an organization.

Question 21.
Discuss various careers opportunities in IT.
Answer:

  1. Web Designer can develop interactive websites using knowledge of HTML, PHP, and various other programming languages.
  2. It is possible to have a career as a software developer with scripting skills.
  3. After getting knowledge about Database management one can work as a Database Manager.
  4. Information Security Analysts are responsible for ensuring that networks are watertight.
  5. Professional Accountant using computerized accounting software can successfully handle accounting work.
  6. Financial Advisor after getting IT knowledge one can advise and guide others in investing the money in various investment schemes.
  7. It is possible to become a successful Animator using one’s own creation and innovation.
  8. Perhaps one of the trendiest and most fun jobs in the sector, a games developer.
  9. As a career opportunity, to become an Audio / Video Editor one should be good in tools such as Kdenlive, Audacity.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Information Technology Important Questions Chapter 1 Basics of Information Technology

Question 22.
Write down the recent trends in IT.
Answer:

  1. Green Computing is the study and practice of environmentally sustainable computing or IT.
  2. The goals of green computing are similar to green chemistry.
  3. Green computing is important for all classes of systems, ranging from handheld systems to large-scale data centers.
  4. The full form of IoT is the Internet of Things.
  5. The Internet of Things is the network of physical devices, vehicles, home appliances, and other items embedded with electronics, software, sensors, actuators, and connectivity.
  6. Cloud Computing is the delivery of computing services over the internet.
  7. Data Analytics is the process of examining data sets in order to draw conclusions about the information.
  8. Data Analytics technologies and techniques are widely used in commercial industries to enable organizations to make more informed business decisions.
  9. Artificial Intelligence is intelligence demonstrated by machines, in contrast to the natural intelligence displayed by humans and other animals.
  10. Computer science defines Artificial Intelligence research as the study of “intelligent agents”.
  11. Machine Learning is the scientific study of algorithms and statistical models that computer systems use to effectively perform a specific task.
  12. Big Data refers to data sets that are too large or complex for traditional data-processing application software.
  13. Blockchain is a growing list of records, called blocks, which are linked using cryptography.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 1.
How did a magnet derive its name? What was its ancient use?
Answer:
The characteristic of a magnet to attract iron is called its attractive property. This property was discovered in a rock found in the ancient mineral-rich region of Magnesia (modern Turkey). The word magnet is derived from this Magnesian rock.

The rock when floated on water (by tying it to a piece of wood) or suspended freely was found to align approximately in the north-south direction. Because this directional property was used by some ancient travellers to locate the geographic north, it was also called the leading stone or lodestone.

The Magnesian rock is the naturally magnetized iron ore magnetite (Fe3O4). It is hard, black or brownish-black with a metallic luster.

Question 2.
Explain the directional characteristic of a bar magnet.
Answer:
When a bar magnet is suspended so as to rotate freely in a horizontal plane, it comes to rest in approximately the North-South direction.

The end of the magnet directed towards the Earth’s geographic North Pole is called the north-seeking pole or the north pole, and the other end which is directed towards the Earth’s geographic South Pole is called the south-seeking pole or the south pole.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 1
The cause for this alignment is seen when we consider the turning moment on a bar magnet suspended in a uniform magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\), as shown in below figure. The north pole (pole strength + m) and the south pole (pole strength – m) of the bar magnet experience equal and opposite forces of magnitude mB. If the lines of action of these two forces are not the same, they constitute a couple whose effect is to produce rotation.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 3.
State the expression for the torque acting on a magnetic dipole in a uniform magnetic field.
Answer:
When a magnetic dipole of magnetic dipole moment \(\vec{M}\) is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\), it experiences a torque whose magnitude is
τ = MB sin θ
where θ is the smaller angle between the magnetic axis and \(\vec{B}\).
[Note: When the dipole is placed with its axis at right-angles to the field, i.e, θ = 90°,
τ = MB or M = \(\frac{\tau}{B}\)
This is the defining equation for the magnetic dipole moment.]

Question 4.
Derive an expression for the torque acting on a magnetic dipole placed in a region of uniform magnetic induction. Express it in vector form.
Answer:
Consider a magnetic dipole consisting of two point poles of pole strength m a distance 2l apart with its axis inclined at an angle θ to a uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\), shown in figure. The magnetic force on the positive (or north) pole is m\(\vec{B}\), while that on the negative (or south) pole is – m\(\vec{B}\). These two forces, equal in magnitude, opposite in direction and separated by a finite distance, constitute a couple which tends to line up the magnetic dipole moment with the field \(\vec{B}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 3
The torque of the couple in the clockwise sense in above figure in magnitude, is
τ = (mB) d
where d is the distance between the lines of action of the forces.
∴ τ = (mB)2lsin θ = MB sin θ (∵ m = \(\frac{M}{2 l}\))
Expressed as a vector product,
\(\vec{\tau}=\vec{M} \times \vec{B}\)
The torque has a maximum magnitude, (m2l)B, when sin θ = 1, i.e., when the magnet is perpendicular to the field. The torque vanishes when the magnet is parallel to the field, where sin θ = 0.

Question 5.
A current-carrying coil with magnetic moment \(\vec{M}\) (M = 5 A∙m2) is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) (B = 0.2 Wb/m2) such that the angle between \(\vec{M}\) and \(\vec{B}\) is 30°. What is the torque acting on the coil ?
Answer:
τ = MB sin θ = (5) (0.2) sin 30° = 0.5 N∙m is the torque acting on the coil.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 6.
Explain what is meant by magnetic potential energy of a bar magnet kept in a uniform magnetic field. Discuss the cases when
(1) θ = 0°
(2) θ = 180°
(3) θ = 90°.
Answer:
A magnet free to rotate in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) aligns its dipole moment \(\vec{M}\) with \(\vec{B}\). Work must be done to rotate the magnet from this equilibrium position. The work done is stored as the magnetic potential energy, also called its orientation energy. In a finite angular displacement from 0 to θ, the
magnetic potential energy
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 4

  1. When θ = 0°, cos θ = cos 0° = 1, Uθ = – MB. At this position, the magnetic moment of the bar magnet is lined up with the field and its magnetic potential energy is minimum. This is its most stable equilibrium position.
  2. When θ = 180°, cos θ = cos 180° = – 1, Uθ = MB. At this position, the magnetic moment is antiparallel to the field and its magnetic potential energy is maximum. This is its most unstable position.
  3. When θ = 90°, cos θ = cos 90° = 0, Uθ = 0. At this position, the bar magnet is perpendicular to the
    magnetic field. Its magnetic potential energy is zero.

Question 7.
What is the nature of the graph between the magnetic potential energy of a bar magnet kept in a uniform magnetic field and angular position of the magnet ?
OR
Draw a graph of magnetic potential energy as a function of angular displacement.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 5

Question 8.
Derive the expression for the time period of angular oscillations of a bar magnet kept in a uniform magnetic field.
Answer:
Consider a bar magnet of magnetic dipole moment \(\vec{M}\), suspended by a light twistless fibre in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\) in such a way that it is free to rotate in a horizontal plane. In the rest position θ = 0, \(\vec{M}\) is parallel to \(\vec{B}\).

If magnet is given a small angular displacement θ from its rest position and released, the magnet performs angular or torsional oscillations about the rest position.

Let I be the moment of inertia of the bar magnet about the axis of oscillation and α the angular acceleration. The deflecting torque (in magnitude) is
τd = Iα = I \(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) …………….. (1)
However, the restoring torque tries to bring back the oscillating bar magnet in the rest position. The restoring torque (in magnitude) is, τr = – MB sin θ …………. (2)
The minus sign in Eq. (2) indicates that restoring torque is opposite in direction to the angular deflection.
In equilibrium, both the torques balance each other. From Eqs. (1) and (2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 6
Eq. (4) represents angular simple harmonic motion.
Writing ω2 = \(\frac{M B}{I}\) , the angular frequency ω of the motion is
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{M B}{I}}\) ………….. (5)
The time period of oscillations of the bar magnet is
T = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\omega}=2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{I}{M B}}\) ……………… (6)
This is the required expression.

9. Solve the following
Question 1.
Find the magnitude of the magnetic moment of a magnet if a couple exerting torque 0.5 N.m is required to hold the magnet with its axis perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of induction 2 × 10-3 T.
Solution:
Data : τ = 0.5 N∙m, B = 2 × 10-3 T, θ = 90°
τ = MB sin θ
∴ M = \(\frac{\tau}{B \sin \theta}=\frac{0.5 \mathrm{~N} \cdot \mathrm{m}}{\left(2 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~T}\right) \sin 90^{\circ}}\)
= 250 A∙m2
The magnitude of the magnetic moment of the magnet is 250 A∙m2.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 2.
A magnetic dipole of magnetic moment 5 A∙m2 is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction 10-3 T. Find the magnitude of the maximum torque acting on the dipole.
Solution:
Data : M = 5 A∙m2, B = 10-3 T
Torque, τ = MB sin θ
The magnitude of the torque is maximum when θ = 90°.
∴ τmax = MB = 5 × 10-3 N∙m

Question 3.
A bar magnet of magnetic length 0.12 m and pole strength 10 A-m is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction 3 × 10-2 tesla. If the angle between the magnetic induction and the magnetic moment is 30°, find the magnitude of the torque acting on the magnet.
Solution:
Data : 2l = 0.12 m, m = 10 A∙m, B = 3 × 10-2 T,
θ = 30°
The magnitude of the torque,
τ = MB sin θ = m (2l) B sin θ
= (10 A∙m) (0.12 m)(3 × 10-2 T) sin 30°
= 3.6 × 10-2 × \(\frac{1}{2}\)
= 1.8 × 10-2 N∙m

Question 4.
A bar magnet of moment 10 A∙m is suspended such that it can rotate freely in a horizontal plane. The horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field at the place is 36 µT. Calculate the magnitude of the torque when its angular displacement with respect to the direction of the field is 8C and magnetic potential energy.
Solution:
Data : M = 10 A∙m2, Bh = 36µT = 3.6 × 10-5 T,
θ = 8°
The magnitude of the torque is
τ = MBh sin θ
= (10) (3.6 × 10-5) sin 8°
= (36 × 10-5) (0.1391) = 5.007 × 10-5 N∙m
The magnetic potential energy of the bar magnet is
Uθ = MBh cos θ
= (36 × 10-5) cos 8°
= (36 × 10-5) (0.99) = 3.564 × 10-4 J

Question 5.
The time period of angular oscillation of a bar magnet in a horizontal magnetic field is 3.14 s. If the horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field at the place is 40 µT and the moment of inertia of the magnet is 10-4 kg∙m2, calculate the magnetic moment of the magnet.
Solution:
Data : T = 3.14 s, Bh = 40 µT = 4 × 10-5 T,
I = 10-4 kg∙m2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 7

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 6.
A bar magnet of moment 10 A∙m2 is suspended such that it can rotate freely in a horizontal plane. The horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field at the place is 36 µT. Calculate the magnitude of the torque when its angular displacement with respect to the direction of the field is 8° and magnetic potential energy.
Solution:
Data : M = 10 A∙m2, Bh = 36 µT = 3.6 × 10-5 T, θ = 8°
The magnitude of the torque is
τ = MBh sin θ
=(10)(3.6 × 10-5)sin8°
=(36 × 10-5)(0.1391) = 5.007 × 10-5 N∙m
The magnetic potential energy of the bar magnet is
Uθ = MBh cos θ
=(36 × 10-5)cos8°
=(36 × 10-5)(0.99) = 3.564 × 10-4 J

Question 10.
As the electron revolves in the second Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom, the corresponding current is (about) 1.3 × 10-4 A. If the area of the orbit is (about) 1.4 × 10-19 m2, what is the (approximate) equivalent magnetic moment?
Answer:
M = IA = (1.3 × 10-4)(1.4 × 10-19)
= 1.82 × 10-23 A∙m2 is the (approximate) equivalent magnetic moment.

Question 11.
What is the magnetic moment of an electron due to its orbital motion?
Answer:
The orbital magnetic moment of an electron, of charge e and revolving with speed v in an orbit of radius r, is \(\frac{1}{2}\) evr.

Question 12.
If the frequency of revolution of a proton (q = 1.6 × 10-19 C) in a uniform magnetic induction is 106 Hz, what is the corresponding electric current?
Answer:
I = \(\frac{q}{T}\) = qf = (1.6 × 10-19)(106)
= 1.6 × 10-13 A
is the corresponding electric current.

Question 13.
The frequency of revolution of the electron in the second Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom is 8.22 × 1014 Hz. What is the corresponding electric ’ current? [e = 1.6 × 10-19 C]
Answer:
I = \(\frac{e}{T}\) = ef
= (1.6 × 10-19)(8.22 × 1014)
= 1.315 × 10-4A
is the corresponding electric current.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 14.
A coil has 1000 turns, each of area 0.5 m2. What is the magnetic moment of the coil when it carries a current of 1 mA ?
Answer:
Magnetic moment M = NIA
= 1000 × 1 × 10-3 × 0.5
= 0.5 A∙m2

Question 15.
What is the gyromagnetic ratio of an orbital electron ? State its dimensions and the SI unit.
Answer:
The ratio of the magnitude of the orbital magnetic moment to that of the orbital angular momentum of an electron in an atom is called its gyromagnetic ratio γ0. If \(\vec{M}_{\mathrm{o}}\) is the orbital magnetic moment of the electron with orbital angular momentum \(\vec{L}_{\mathrm{o}}\),
γ0 = \(\frac{M_{\mathrm{o}}}{L_{\mathrm{o}}}=\frac{e}{2 m_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
where e and me are the electronic charge and electron mass, respectively.
Dimensions : [γ0] = \(\frac{[\text { charge }]}{[\text { mass }]}=\frac{[T I]}{[M]}\) = [M-1TI].
SI unit : The coulomb per kilogram (C/kg).
[Note : γ0 = 8.794 × 1010 C/kg. The gyromagnetic ratio of electron spin is nearly twice that of an orbital electron.]

16. Solve the following
Question 1.
A circular coil of 300 turns and diameter 14 cm carries a current of 15 A. What is the magnitude of the magnetic moment associated with the coil?
Solution :
Data : N = 300, d = 14 cm, I = 15 A
r = \(\frac{d}{2}\) = 7 cm = 7 × 10-2 m
The magnitude of the magnetic moment associated with the coil is
M = NIA = NI(πr2)
= (300)(15)(3.142)(7 × 10-2)2
= 4500 × 3.142 × 49 × 10-4
= 69.28 A∙m2

Question 2.
A coil has 300 turns, each of area 0.05 m2.
(i) Find the current through the coil for which the magnetic moment of the coil will be 4.5 A∙m2.
(ii) It is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction 0.2 T with its magnetic moment making an angle of 30° with \(\vec{B}\). Calculate the magnitude of the torque experienced by the coil.
Solution:
Data : N = 300, A = 0.05 m2, M = 4.5 A∙m2, B = 0.2 T, θ = 30°
(i) M = NIA
∴ The current in the coil,
I = \(\frac{M}{N A}=\frac{4.5}{300 \times 0.05}\) = 0.3 A

(ii) The magnitude of the torque,
τ = MB sin θ = 4.5 × 0.2 × sin 30°
= 0.9 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.45 N∙m

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 3.
An electron in an atom revolves around the nucleus in an orbit of radius 0.5 Å. Calculate the equivalent magnetic moment if the frequency of revolution of the electron is 1010 MHz.
Solution:
Data : r = 0.5 Å = 5 × 10-11 m,
f = 1010 MHz = 1016 Hz, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
Equivalent current, I = \(\frac{e}{T}\) = ef
The equivalent magnetic moment is
M = IA = ef(πr2)
= (1.6 × 10-19)(1016)(3.142)(5 × 10-11)2
= 1.6 × 3.142 × 25 × 10-25
= 1.257 × 10-23 A∙m2

Question 4.
Calculate the orbital magnetic dipole moment of the electron in the second Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom. The radius of the orbit is 2.126 Å and the orbital speed of the electron in the orbit is 1.09 × 106 m/s.
Solution:
Data : r = 2.126 Å = 2.126 × 10-10 m,
v = 1.09 × 106 m/s, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
The orbital magnetic dipole moment of the electron,
M0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) evr
=(1.6 × 10-19)(1.09 × 106)(2.126 × 10-10)
=1.6 × 1.09 × 1.063 × 10-23
= 1.854 × 10-23 A∙m2

Question 5.
An electron in an atom revolves around the nucleus in an orbit of radius 0.53 Å. If the frequency of revolution of an electron is 9 × 109 MHz, calcu-late the orbital angular momentum. [Charge on an electron = 1.6 × 10-19 C, gyromagnetic ratio = 8.8 × 1010 C/kg, π = 3.142]
Solution:
Data : r = 0.53 Å = 0.53 × 10-10 m,
f = 9 × 109 MHz = 9 × 1015 Hz, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, gyromagnetic ratio = 8.8 × 1010 C / kg, π = 3.142
Magnetic moment, M0 =IA = efπr2
= 1.6 × 10-19 × 9 × 1015 × 3.142 × (0.53 × 10-10)2
= 14.4 × 3.142 × (0.53)2 × 10-19 × 1015× 1020
= 1.272 × 10-23 A∙m2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 8

Question 6.
The specific charge (charge-to-mass ratio) of an electron is 1.759 × 1011 C/kg.
(i) What is the gyromagnetic ratio of an orbital electron?
(ii) If the measured component of its orbital angular momentum is 2.11 × 10-34 kg∙m3/s. what Is the associatcd orbital magnetic dipole moment?
Solution:
Data: \(\frac{e}{m_{e}}\) = 1.759 × 1011 C/kg,
L = 2.11 × 10-34 kg∙m2/s

(i) The gyromag1etic ratio of an orbital electron,
γ0 = \(\frac{e}{2 m_{\mathrm{e}}}=\frac{1.759 \times 10^{11}}{2}\) =8.795 × 1010 C/kg

(ii) For the given component of the orbital angular momentum, the associated magnetic dipole moment is
Mo = \(\frac{e}{2m_{e}}\) L0 = γ0L0
= (8.795 × 1010 )(2.11 × 10-34)
= 1.856 × 10-23 A∙m2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 7.
An electron performs uniform circuLar motion in a uniform magnetic field of induction 1.2T In a plane perpendicular to the field. Its kinetic energy is 6 × 10-20 J and its motion is subject only to the magnetic force due to the field. What is the magnetic dipole moment associated with the motion of the electron?
Solution:
Data:B = 1.2T, KE ≡ Ek = 6 × 10-20 J
The centripetal force on the electron is the magnetic force. If r and e are respectively the radius of the path and linear speed of the electron,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 9

Question 8.
If the magnetic moment of an electron revolving in an orbit of radius 0.4 Å is 9 × 10-24 A∙m2 then find the linear momentum of the electron in that orbit. (e/m = 1.76 × 1011 C/kg]
Solution:
Data: r = 0.5 Å = 5 × 10-11 m, I = 1.1 × 10-3 A,
x = 100 Å = 10-8 m, \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\) = 10-7 T∙m/A
The magnitude of the magnetic induction at an axial point of a current loop,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 10

Question 9.
The magnetic moment of an electron revolving in a circular orbit of radius 2.2 Å is 5.024 × 10-24 A∙m2. Calculate the frequency of revolution of the electron in that orbit.
Solution:
Data: d = 0.2 m, B = 4 × 10-4 T,
2l = 5 cm = 5 × 10-2 m, A = 2 cm2 = 2 × 10-4 m2,
\(\frac{\mu_{0}}{4 \pi}\) = 10-7 T∙m/A
The magnitude of the magnetic induction at an axial point of a bar magnet.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 11

Question 17.
Explain magnetization of a material.
Answer:
In an atom, the orbital and spin magnetic moments of its electrons may or may not add up to zero, depending on the electronic configuration. In some materials, their atoms have a net magnetic moment. When such a material is placed in an external magnetic field of induction \(\overrightarrow{B_{0}}\) , the field exerts a torque on each atomic magnet. These torques tend to align the magnetic moments with the applied field. Due to this, the material as a whole acquires a net magnetic moment \(\vec{M}_{\text {net }}\) along \(\overrightarrow{B_{0}}\) and the material is said to be magnetized.

The net magnetic moment per unit volume is called the magnetization \(\vec{M}_{z}\) of the material.
\(\vec{M}_{\mathrm{z}}=\vec{M}_{\text {net }} / V\)
where V is the volume of the material.

Even when the atomic magnetic moment is zero, application of magnetic field induces magnetism in the material. In this case, the magnetization has direction opposite to that of the applied field.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 18.
Define magnetization.
State its dimensions and the SI unit.
OR
Define magnetization. State its formula and SI unit.
Answer:
Magnetization : The net magnetic moment per unit volume of a material is called the magnetization of the material.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 12
SI unit: The ampere per metre (A/m).

Question 19.
A bar magnet (volume 1.5 × 10-5 5m3) has a uniform magnetization of 6000 Aim. What is its magnetic dipole moment?
Answer:
Mz = \(\)
∴ M = MzV = (6000)(1.5 × 10-5)
= 9 × 10-2 A∙m2 is the magnetic dipole moment of the magnet.

Question 20.
Define magnetic intensity.
State its dimensions and the SI unit.
Answer:
Magnetic intensity: The magnetic intensity is defined as the magnetic induction in an isotropic medium divided by the permeability of the medium.

The magnetic intensity is a quantitative characteristic of a magnetic field independent of the magnetic properties of the medium. In a medium, it determines the contribution to the magnetic induction in the medium by the external magnetic field.

Dimensions: Within a toroid without a core, which has n windings per unit length carrying a current I, the magnetic intensity, H = nI.
∴ [H] = [n][I] = [L-1][I] = [L-1I]
SI unit : The ampere per metre (A/m).
[Note : The magnetic intensity (also called the magnetic field strength), \(\vec{H}\), is defined as
\(\vec{H}=\frac{\vec{B}}{\mu_{0}}-\overrightarrow{M_{z}}\)
where \(\vec{B}\) is the magnetic induction, \(\vec{M}_{z}\) is the magnetization and μ0 is the permeability of free space.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 21.
What is the magnetic susceptibility of a medium?
Answer:
The magnetic susceptibility of a medium is a dimensionless quantity which signifies the contribution made by the medium when subjected to a magnetic field to the magnetic induction inside the medium. For a material in which the magnetization Mz is proportional to the magnetic intensity H, the magnetic susceptibility of the medium is
χm = Mz/H
It is equal to the fractional change in the magnetic induction due to the medium.
Magnetic susceptibility of some materials

Substance χ Substance χ
Silicon -4.2 × 10-6 Aluminium 2.3 × 10-5
Bismuth -1.66 × 10-5 Calcium 1.9 × 10-5
Copper -9.8 × 10-6 Choromium 2.7 × 10-4
Diamond -2.2 × 10-5 Lithium 2.1 × 10-5
Gold -3.6 × 10-5 Magnesium 1.2 × 10-5
Lead -1.7 × 105 Niobium 2.6 × 10-5
Mercury -2.9 × 10-5 Oxygen (STP) 2.1 × 10-6
Nitrogen -5.0 × 10-9 Platinum 2.9 ×10-4

Question 22.
Discuss magnetization of a rod of material having net magnetic moment with the help of a solenoid.
OR
Discuss magnetization of an iron rod placed in a solenoid.
OR
Discuss magnetization of a magnetic material placed in a solenoid.
Answer:
Consider an ideal air-cored solenoid carrying a steady current I. The magnitude of the magnetic induction inside the solenoid is
B0 = \(\frac{\mu_{0} N I}{2 \pi r}\) = μonI ………….. (1)
where n = \(\frac{N}{2 \pi r}\) is the number of turns per unit length and p0 is the permeability of free space.

When a core of magnetic material (such as iron) is present, the magnetic field within the solenoid due to the current in the winding magnetizes the material of the core. With the core, the magnetic induction \(\vec{B}\) inside the solenoid is greater than \(\vec{B}_{0}\), so that
B = B0 + Bm ……………. (2)
where Bm is the contribution of the iron core. Bm is proportional to the magnetization Mz of the material.
Bm = μoMz …………… (3)

While discussing magnetic materials, it is customary to call \(\frac{B_{0}}{\mu_{0}}\) as the magnetizing field or magnetic field intensity, denoted by H, which produces the magnetization.
∴ B0 = μoH …………. (4)
Substituting for B0 and BM in Eq. (1),
B = μ0H + μ0Mz = μ0(H + Mz) …………….. (5)
For materials in which the magnetization is pro-portional to the magnetic intensity,
Mz ∝ H or Mz = χmH ………. (6)
where the constant of proportionality χm is called the magnetic susceptibility.
∴ B = μ0(H + χmH) = μ0(1 + χm)H = μH …………. (7)
where p = μ0(1 + χm) is called the permeability of the material.

[Notes : (1) Mz ∝ H only for diamagnetic and paramagnetic materials. Among ferromagnetic materials, the linear relation in Eq. (6) holds good only for initial magnetization of magnetically softer materials; for magnetically harder materials, Mz is not a single-valued function of H, and depends on the magnetic intensity that the material has been previously exposed to (a phenomenon known as hysteresis). (2) H is defined for convenience; B is more fundamental.]

Question 23.
What is the relation between permeability and magnetic susceptibility of a medium? What is relative permeability of a medium ?
Answer:
If χm is the magnetic susceptibility of a medium, the permeability of the medium is
μ = μ0 (1 + χm)
where μ0 is the permeability of free space.
The ratio of the permeability of a medium to that of free space is called the relative permeability of the medium, denoted by μr.
μr = μ/μ0 = 1 + χm

Question 24.
Write the relation between relative permeability and magnetic susceptibility.
Answer:
μr = 1 – χm, where μr is the relative permeability and χm is the magnetic susceptibility of a substance.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 25.
Why do magnetic lines of force prefer to pass through iron than air?
Answer:
The permeability of air (≅ 1.00000037) is negligible relative to that of iron, which typically has μ of several hundreds or thousands. That is, permeability of iron is much more than that of air. Hence, magnetic lines of force prefer to pass through iron than air.

[Note : Air is paramagnetic due to the oxygen it contains. Reference for μair: B. D. Cullity and C. D. Graham (2008), Introduction to Magnetic Materials, 2nd edition, p. 16.]

Question 26.
Is magnetic susceptibility a dimensionless quantity? Why?
Answer:
In a magnetizing field of intensity H, a material for which its magnetization Mz ∝ H, we write . Mz = χmH, where the proportionality constant χm is called the magnetic susceptibility. Since both magnetization and magnetic intensity have the same dimensions and units, χm is a dimensionless quantity.
OR
The relative permeability of a medium,
μr = \(\frac{\mu}{\mu_{0}}\) = 1 + χm
where μ and χm are the permeability and magnetic susceptibility of the medium and μ0 is the permeability of free space. Hence, both μ0 and χm are dimensionless quantities.

27. Solve the following
Question 1.
A cylindrical magnet 5 cm long has a diameter of 1 cm and a uniform magnetization of 5000 A/m. Find its magnetic dipole moment.
Solution:
Data : L = 5 × 10-2 m, d = 1 × 10-2 m,
Mz = 5 × 103 A/m .
Volume, V = πr2L = \(\frac{\pi d^{2}}{4}\) L
Mz = \(\frac{M}{V}\)
∴ The magnetic dipole moment,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 13

Question 2.
A bar magnet made of steel has magnetic moment 2.5 A∙m2 and mass 6.6 × 10-3 kg. Given that the density of steel is 7.9 × 103 kg/m3, find the intensity of magnetization of the magnet. (2 marks )
Solution:
Data : M = 2.5 A∙m2, m = 6.6 × 10-3 kg, ρ = 7.9 × 103 kg/m3
Volume, V = \(\frac{m}{\rho}\)
The intensity of magnetization of the magnet is
Mz = \(\) = M ∙ \(\frac{\rho}{m}\)
= 2.5 x \(\frac{M}{V}\) = 2.992 × 106 A/m
[Note : Intensity of magnetization = magnetization.]

Question 3.
Find the magnetization of a bar magnet of length 10 cm and cross-sectional area 4 cm2, if the magnetic moment is 2 A∙m2.
Solution:
Data : L = 0.1 m, A = 4 × 10-4 m2, M = 2 A∙m2
Magnetization, Mz = \(\frac{M}{V}\)
= \(\frac{M}{L A}=\frac{2}{(0.1)\left(4 \times 10^{-4}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{10^{4}}{0.2}\) = 5 × 104 A/m

Question 4.
The magnetic susceptibility of annealed iron at saturation is 5500. Find the permeability of annealed iron at saturation.
Solution:
Data : χm = 5500, μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
Permeability, μ = μ0(1 + χm)
The permeability of annealed iron at saturation is
μ = (4 × 3.142 × 10-7) (1 + 5500)
= 4 × 3.142 × 5.501 × 10-4
= 6.914 × 10-3 T∙m/A

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 5.
The magnetic induction B and the magnetic intensity H in a material are found to be 1.6 T and 1000 A/m, respectively. Calculate the relative permeability μr and the magnetic susceptibility χm of the material.
Solution:
Data : B = 1.6 T, H = 1000 A/m,
μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
(i) B = μH = μ0μr H
∴ The relative permeability of the material,
μr = \(\frac{B}{\mu_{0} H}=\frac{1.6}{\left(4 \times 3.142 \times 10^{-7}\right)\left(10^{3}\right)}\)
= \(\frac{4000}{3.142}\) = 1.273 × 103

(ii) μr = 1 + χm
∴ The magnetic susceptibility of the material,
χm = μr – 1
= 1273 – 1 = 1272 or 1.272 × 103

Question 6.
An ideal solenoid has a core of relative permeability 500 and its winding has 1000 turns per metre. If a steady current of 1.6 A is passed through its winding, find
(i) the magnetic field strength H
(ii) the magnetization Mz
(iii) the magnetic induction B within the solenoid. Assume that Mz is directly proportional to H and single valued.
Solution:
Data : μr = 500, n = 1000 m-1, I = 1.6 A,
μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
(i) The magnetic field strength (or magnetic intensity) of the ideal solenoid,
H = nI
= 1000 × 1.6 = 1.6 × 103 A/m

(ii) The magnetization of the core,
Mz = χmH = (μr – 1)H
= (500 – 1) × 1.6 × 103
= 499 × 1.6 × 103 = 7.984 × 105 A/m

(iii) The magnetic induction within the core of the solenoid,
B = μrμ0H
= (500) (4 × 3.142 × 10-7) (1.6 × 103)
= 32 × 3.142 × 10-2 = 1.005 T

Question 28.
What is a diamagnetic material? Give two examples.
Answer:
A material which is weakly repelled by a magnet and whose atoms /molecules do not possess a net magnetic’ moment in the absence of an external magnetic field is called a diamagnetic material.

When a diamagnetic material is placed in a uniform magnetic field, it acquires a small net induced magnetic moment directed opposite to the field.

Examples: Bismuth, copper, gold, silver, anti-mony, mercury, water, air, hydrogen, lead, silicon, nitrogen, sodium chloride.

Question 29.
What is diamagnetism?
Answer:
A material which is weakly repelled by a magnet and whose atoms/molecules do not possess a net magnetic moment in the absence of an external magnetic field is called a diamagnetic material. When a diamagnetic material is placed in a mag-netic field, it acquires a small net induced magnetic moment directed opposite to the field. The induced magnetism exhibited by such materials is called diamagnetism.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 30.
State any four properties of a diamagnetic material.
Answer:
Properties of a diamagnetic material :

  1. In the absence of an external magnetic field, the magnetic dipole moment of each atom / molecule of a diamagnetic material is zero.
  2. A diamagnetic material is weakly repelled by a magnet.
  3. If a thin rod of a diamagnetic material is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest with its length perpendicular to the field.
  4. When placed in a nonuniform magnetic field, a diamagnetic material is repelled from the region of strong field.
  5. The magnetic susceptibility (χm) of a diamagnetic material is small and negative.
  6. χm is very nearly temperature-independent.
  7. The relative permeability (μr) of a diamagnetic material is slightly less than 1 and very nearly temperature independent.
  8. If a diamagnetic liquid in a watch glass is placed on two closely spaced pole-pieces of a magnet, the liquid accumulates on the sides causing a depression at the centre.
    [ Note : When the pole-pieces are moved apart, the effect is reversed, i.e., the diamagnetic liquid accumulates at the centre, where the magnetic field is weak.]
  9. A diamagnetic liquid in a U-tube placed in a magnetic field shows a depression in the arm to which the magnetic field is applied.
  10. If a diamagnetic gas is introduced between the pole-pieces of a magnet, it spreads at right angles to the field.

Question 31.
Name two materials that have negative magnetic susceptibility.
Answer:
Copper and gold have negative magnetic susceptibility.

Question 32.
Explain the origin of diamagnetism.
OR
Explain the origin of diamagnetism on the basis of atomic structure.
Answer:
An atomic electron is equivalent to a current loop which has orbital magnetic moment. Further, electron spin gives rise to the spin magnetic moment. The magnetic moment of an atom is equal to the vector sum of the magnetic moments of all its electrons.

The electronic configuration in an atom of a diamagnetic material is such that the vector sum of the orbital and spin magnetic moments of all the electrons is zero. Thus, the atomic magnetic moment is zero. Hence, a diamagnetic material has no inherent magnetic moment associated with it.

When a diamagnetic material is placed in a magnetic field, the orbiting electrons are accelerated or decelerated depending on their sense of revolution. For the electrons that are speeded up, the magnetic moment increases and for those that are slowed down, the magnetic moment decreases. This happens due to induced current as per Lenz’s law. Thus, each atom acquires a net magnetic moment and the diamagnetic material is weakly magnetized. The induced magnetic moment is opposite in direction to the applied field.

Diamagnetism is the weakest magnetic phenomenon. Hence, although diamagnetism is a universal property, it can be detected only in the absence of properties resulting in para- and ferromagnetism.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 33.
Explain the diamagnetic behaviour of superconductors.
Answer:
Suppose a superconducting material in its normal phase, not the superconducting phase, is placed in a uniform applied magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}\) which is weaker than a certain critical magnetic induction \(\vec{B}_{\mathrm{c}}\) for that material. Then, when the temperature is reduced below the critical temperature for the material, it enters into the superconducting phase and the magnetic field is expelled from the interior of the material.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 14
There is no magnetic field inside the material, i.e., the material exhibits perfect diamagnetism. The expulsion of the magnetic field in a superconducting material is called the Meissner effect.

[Notes : (1) What happens is that currents appear on the surface of the material whose magnetic field exactly cancels the applied field inside it. (2) The German physicists Fritz Walther Meissner (1882-1974) and Robert Ochsenfeld (1901-1993) discovered the phenomenon in 1933 by measuring the magnetic field distribution outside superconducting tin and lead samples. The Meissner effect is so strong that a magnet can actually be levitated over a material cooled below its superconducting transition temperature Tc.]

Question 34.
What is a paramagnetic material? Give two examples.
Answer:
A material which is weakly attracted by a magnet and whose atoms possess a net magnetic moment with all atomic magnetic moments randomly directed in the absence of an external magnetic field but are capable of being aligned in the direction of the applied magnetic field is called a paramagnetic material.

Examples : Aluminium, platinum, chromium, manganese, sodium, calcium, magnesium, lithium, tungsten, niobium, copper chloride, oxygen.

Question 35.
State any four properties of a paramagnetic material.
Answer:
Properties of a paramagnetic material:

  1. Each atom of a paramagnetic material possesses a magnetic dipole moment. However, in the absence of an external magnetic field, the atomic magnetic moments are randomly oriented and hence the resultant magnetization of a paramagnetic material is zero.
  2. A paramagnetic material is weakly attracted by a magnet.
  3. If a thin rod of a paramagnetic material is sus-pended in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest with its length parallel to the field.
  4. When placed in a nonuniform magnetic field, a paramagnetic material is attracted towards the region of strong field.
  5. The magnetic susceptibility (χm) of a paramagnetic material is small and positive.
  6. χm varies inversely with the absolute temperature T.
  7. The relative permeability (μr) of a paramagnetic material is slightly greater than 1 and decreases with increasing temperature.
  8. If a paramagnetic liquid in a watch glass is placed on two closely spaced pole-pieces of a magnet, it shows a slight rise in the middle.
    [Note : If the pole-pieces are moved apart, the para-magnetic liquid moves away from the centre where the field is weak and gets depressed in the middle.]
  9. A paramagnetic liquid in a U-tube placed in a magnetic field shows a rise in the arm to which the magnetic field is applied.

Question 36.
Give one example each of a diamagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
Answer:
Bismuth is a diamagnetic material and aluminium is a paramagnetic material.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 37.
Name two materials that have small and positive magnetic susceptibility.
Answer:
Platinum and Chromium have small and positive magnetic susceptibility.

Question 38.
The relative permeability of two materials are 0.999 and 1.001. Identify the materials.
Answer:
A material with relative permeability μr ≤ 1 is diamagnetic while the one with μr ≥ 1 is paramagnetic.

Question 39.
Explain the origin of paramagnetism.
OR
Explain the origin of paramagnetism on the basis of atomic structure.
Answer:
Paramagnetism depends on the presence of permanent atomic or molecular magnetic dipole moments. The inherent net atomic magnetic mo-ment results from a particular combination of the spin and orbital magnetic moments of its electrons.

The spin magnetic moments of the electrons in matter are affected by the internal magnetic field created by the magnetic moments of surrounding electrons. This internal field, ~ 10-2 T to 10-1 T,
causes the spin magnetic moments to precess about the field direction. At normal temperature; the thermal motion of the electrons produces constant fluctuations in the internal field so that the spin magnetic moments have random directions, from figure (a). In the absence of an external magnetizing field, therefore, a paramagnetic material is not magnetized.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 15
When the applied field strength is greater than that of the internal field, the spin magnetic moments tend to align parallel to the external field direction. But the randomizing effect of thermal agitation prevents complete alignment, from figure (b). Therefore, at room temperature, when a paramagnetic material is placed in a magnetic field, it is weakly magnetized in the direction of the magnetizing field.

If the external field is very large or the temperature is very low, the magnetic dipole moments are effectively aligned parallel to the field so as to have the least magnetic potential energy and the magnetization reaches saturation, from figure (c).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 40.
Discuss Curie’s law for paramagnetic material.
OR
State Curie’s law of paramagnetism.
Answer:
Curie’s law : The magnetization of a paramagnetic material is directly proportional to the external magnetic field and inversely proportional to the absolute temperature of the material.

If a paramagnetic material at an absolute temperature T is placed in an external magnetic field of induction \(\overrightarrow{B_{\text {ext }}}\), the magnitude of its magnetization
Mz ∝ \(\frac{B_{\text {ext }}}{T}\) ∴ Mz = C \(\frac{B_{\text {ext }}}{T}\)
where the proportionality constant C is called the Curie constant.

[Notes : (1) The above law, discovered experimentally in 1895 by Pierre Curie (1859-1906) French physicist, is true only for values of Bext/ T below about 0.5 tesla per kelvin.
(2) [C] = [Mz ∙ T] / [Bext] = [L-1I∙Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 16] /[MT-2I-1]
= [M-1L-1T2I2Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 16],
where Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 16 denotes the dimension of temperature.]

Question 41.
Prove that the magnetic susceptibility of a para-magnetic material is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature.
Answer:
Consider a paramagnetic material at an absolute temperature T placed in an external magnetic field of induction \(\vec{B}_{\text {ext }}\). The magnitude of its magnetization is
Mz = C \(\frac{\vec{B}_{\text {ext }}}{T}\) …………. (1)
where the proportionality constant C is called the Curie constant.
Substituting \(\vec{B}_{\text {ext }}\) = μ0H in Eq. (1),
Mz = C \(\frac{\mu_{0} H}{T}\)
where µ0 is the permeability of free space and H is the intensity of the magnetizing field.
The magnetic susceptibility of the medium
χm = \(\frac{M_{z}}{H}\). Thus, Eq. (2) becomes ti
χm = C \(\frac{\mu_{0}}{T}\)
χm ∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\)
This is the required expression.

Question 42.
What is a ferromagnetic material? Give two examples.
Answer:
A material which is strongly attracted by a magnet and whose atoms possess a net magnetic moment (largely due to electron spin) which, within a certain temperature range, spontaneously line up parallel to each other by quantum mechanical exchange interaction is called a ferromagnetic material.

Examples : Transition elements (iron, cobalt and nickel), inner transition elements (gadolinium, Gd, and dysprosium, Dy) and their alloys.

[Note : Ferromagnetic behaviour was first explained by Pierre-Ernest Weiss on the basis of domain theory but its satisfactory explanation is given only by quantum mechanics.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 43.
What are domains in a ferromagnetic material ?
OR
Write a short note on domains in a ferromagnetic material.
Answer:
A ferromagnetic material is composed of mosaic of small regions within each of which all the atomic magnetic moments spontaneously line up parallel to each other by quantum mechanical exchange interaction within a certain temperature range. Each such spontaneously magnetized region is called a domain and the common direction of magnetic moment is called the domain axis. A domain is an extremely small region (e.g., a size of about 10-6 m -10-4 m) containing a large number (1010 – 1017) of atoms. The boundary between adjacent domains with a different orientation of magnetic moment is called a domain wall.

Question 44.
Explain ferromagnetism on the basis of the domain theory.
Answer:
Atoms of a ferromagnetic material have a perms tient non-zero magnetic dipole moment arising mainly from spin magnetic moments of the electrons.

According to the domain theory, a ferromagnetic material is composed of small regions called domains.

A domain is an extremely small region contain Inga large number (something like 1015 atoms as in common iron) of atoms,

Within each domain, the atomic magnetic moments of nearest-neighbour atoms interact strongly through exchange interaction (a quantum mechanical phenomenon) and align themselves parallel to each other even in the absence of an extemal magnetic field. A domain is. therefore, spontaneously magnetized to saturation.

In an unmagnetized material, however, the directions of magnetization of the different domains are w oriented that the net magnetization is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 17
When an external magnetic field Is applied, the resultant magnetization of the specimen Increases. This is achieved in either of two ways: Either a domain that is favourably oriented grows in size at the expenses of a less favourably oriented domain, or the direction of magnetization of an entire domain changes and aligns along the external magnetic field.

When a weak nagnetic field is applied, favour ably oriented domains grow in size by domain boundary displacement, from figure (b). In strong fields, the domains change their magnetization by domain rotation, from figures. 11.9 (c) and (d). If domains reach perfect alignment, as in from figure 11.9 (d),, the domains may merge into one large domain.

After the external field is removed, it may be energetically favourable for a domain’s direction of magnetizaLion to persist. Then, the specimen has a permanent magnetic dipole moment. This phonomenon, called magnetic remanance, Is the basis of the existence of permanent magnets.

Question 45.
State any four properties of a ferromagnetic material.
Answer:
(1) Each atom of a ferromagnetic material possesses a magnetic moment. A ferromagnetic material is composed of domains each of which is spontaneously magnetized to saturation. In an unmagnetized sample, the magnetic moments of different domains are so oriented that the macroscopic magnetization of the sample is zero.

(2) When a ferromagnetic material is placed in a strong external magnetic field, the domains whose magnetic moments are favourably oriented relative to the external field grow in size such that the sample acquires a nonzero macroscopic magnetization.
(3) A ferromagnetic material retains some magnetization even after it is removed from an external magnetic field. This magnetic retentivity is the basis ‘ of the existence of permanent magnets.

(4) A ferromagnetic material is strongly attracted by a magnet.
(5) A bar magnet, suspended in a uniform magnetic field, comes to rest with its magnetic dipole moment in the direction of the external field.
(6) When placed in a nonuniform magnetic field, a ferromagnetic material is attracted towards the region of strong field.
(7) The magnetic susceptibility (χm) and relative permeability (μr) of a ferromagnetic material are very high.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 46.
Are the (i) diamagnetic materials (ii) paramagnetic materials (iii) ferromagnetic materials attracted or repelled by a magnet?
Answer:
When placed in a nonuniform magnetic field,

  1. a diamagnetic material is weakly repelled from’ the region of strong field
  2. a paramagnetic material is weakly attracted towards the region of strong field
  3. a ferromagnetic material is strongly attracted towards the region of strong field.

Question 47.
Can there be a material which is nonmagnetic?
Answer:
All materials are magnetic. However, only ferromagnetics can have magnetic remanance and exhibit magnetic behaviour even in the absence of an external magnetic field. Diamagnetics and para-magnetics exhibit induced magnetism, i.e., they exhibit magnetic behaviour only in the presence of an external magnetic field.

[Note : A solid solution formed between paramagnetic or diamagnetic metals can be an exception to the general statement that all substances are magnetic. However, the zero value of the susceptibility will be retained only at one temperature, because the susceptibility of the paramagnetic constituent generally changes with temperature. A Cu-Ni alloy with 3.7 wt% Ni has zero susceptibility at room temperature.]

Question 48.
Which magnetic materials have
(i) relative permeability > 1
(ii) relative permeability <1?
Answer:
(i) Both paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials have relative permeability (μr) greater than 1. μr is only slightly greater than 1 for a paramagnetic material. μr is very high for a ferromagnetic material and is a function of the magnetizing field (also called the magnetic field intensity).

(ii) μr is slightly less than 1 for a diamagnetic material.

Question 49.
Draw a graph showing the variation of magnetic susceptibility of a ferromagnetic material with temperature.
Answer:
The magnetic susceptibility of a ferromagnetic material above Curie temperature Tc is given by χm = \(\frac{C}{T-T_{\mathrm{c}}}\), where C is the Curie constant. Below figure shows the variation of magnetic susceptibility of a ferromagnetic material with temperature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 18
[Note : The relation, χm = \(\frac{C}{T-T_{\mathrm{c}}}\), is known as Curie-Weiss law. A plot of reciprocal susceptibility versus temperature for a ferromagnetic material is a straight line intercepting the temperature axis at T. At T = T, the susceptibility diverges which implies that one may have a nonzero magnetization in a zero applied field. This exactly corresponds to the definition of the Curie temperature, being the upper limit for having a spontaneous magnetization.].

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 50.
Distinguish between a diamagnetic material and a paramagnetic material.
Answer:

Diamagnetic material  Paramagnetic material
1. A material whose atoms/ 1. molecules do not possess a net magnetic moment in the absence of an external magnetic field is called a diamagnetic material.   1. A material whose atoms possess net magnetic mo­ments that are all randomly directed in the absence of an external magnetic field is called a paramagnetic material.
2. When placed in a nonuni­form magnetic field, a diamagnetic material is weakly repelled from the region of strong field.  2. When placed in a nonuni­form magnetic field, a para­magnetic material is weakly attracted towards the region of strong field.
3.  In an external magnetic j field, it gets weakly magnetized in the direction oppo­site to that of the field.  3.  In an external magnetic field, it gets weakly magne­tized in the same direction as that of the field. 
4.  When a rod of a diamagnetic material is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest with its length perpendicular to the direc­tion of the field.  4.  When a rod of a paramag­netic material is suspended in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest with its length parallel to the direc­tion of the field.
5.  χm is small, negative and very nearly temperature independent.  5.  χm is small, positive and varies inversely with abso­lute temperature T  
6.  μr is slightly less than 1 and very nearly temperature! independent.  6. μr is slightly greater than 1 and decreases with increas­ing temperature.
 

Question 51.
Distinguish between a paramagnetic material and a ferromagnetic material.
Answer:

A paramagnetic material A ferromagnetic material
1. The permanent atomic mag­netic moments of a para­magnetic material are all randomly oriented so that, in the absence of an external magnetizing field, the material is unmagnetized.
 
1. The permanent atomic mag­netic moments of a ferro­magnetic material interact strongly through exchange interaction forming domains which are spontaneously magnetized to saturation
2. It gets weakly magnetized when placed in an external magnetic field. 2. In an unmagnetized ma­terial, the directions of mag­netization of the different domains are so oriented that the net magnetization is zero.
3. Its magnetization becomes zero when the external magnetic field is removed. 3. It retains some magnetiz­ation even after the external magnetic field is removed.
4. Its magnetization in a given external magnetic field increases with decreasing temperature. The magne­tization reaches saturation only if the external field is very large and the tempera­ture is very low. 4. It retains its domain struc­ture only up to a characte­ristic Curie temperature, above which it becomes paramagnetic.
5. χm is small and positive. μr is slightly greater than 1. 5. χm and μr are positive and very high.  

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 52.
Distinguish between a ferromagnetic material and a diamagnetic material.
Answer:

A ferromagnetic material A diamagnetic material
1. A material whose atoms/molecules possess permanent  magnetic moments which interact strongly through exchange interaction to form magnetic domains, each of which is magnetized to saturation, is called a ferromagnetic material. 1. A material whose atoms/molecules do not possess a net magnetic moment in the absence of an external magnetic field is called a diamagnetic material.
2. It gets strongly magnetized in the direction of the field even when placed in a weak magnetic field 2. In an external magnetic field, it gets weakly magnetized in the direction opposite to the field.
3. It retains some magnetiz­ation even after the external magnetic field is removed. 3. Its magnetization becomes zero when the external magnetic field is removed.
4. When placed in a nonuni­form magnetic field, a ferromagnetic material is strongly attracted towards the region of strong field. 4. When placed in a nonuni­form magnetic field, a dia­magnetic material is weakly repelled from the region of strong field.
5. χm and μr are positive and very high. 5. χm is small and negative. μr is slightly less than 1.

53. Solve the following
Question 1.
(5) A toroid (Rowland ring) of mean radius 16 cm has 1000 turns of wire closely wound on a ferromagnetic core of relative permeability 400. What is the magnetic induction B within the core for a magnetizing current of 1 A?
Solution:
Data: r = 16 × 10-2 m, N = 1000, μr = 400, I = 1 A,
μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
Magnetic field strength, H = nI = \(\frac{N I}{2 \pi r}\)
∴ The magnetic induction within the core,
B = μ0μrH = μ0μr \(\frac{N I}{2 \pi r}\)
= (4π × 10-7) (400) \(\frac{1000 \times 1}{2 \pi \times 16 \times 10^{-2}}\)
= \(\frac{8 \times 10^{-2}}{16 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 0.5 T

Question 2.
Find the percentage increase in the magnetic induction B when the space within a current-carrying toroid is filled with aluminium. The magnetic susceptibility of aluminium is 2.1 × 10-5.
Solution:
Data: χm = 2.1 × 10-5 (positive, since aluminium is paramagnetic)
The percentage increase in the magnetic induction B within the toroid due to the aluminium core
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 19

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 3.
The permeability of a substance at temperature 300 K is 6.284 × 10-3 SI unit. At what temperature will the susceptibility of that substance increase to 9.998 × 103?
Solution:
Data: T1 = 300 K, μ1 = 6.284 × 10-3, χm2 = 9.998 × 103, μ0 = 4π × 10-7 T∙m/A
Permeability, μ = μ0(1 + χm)
∴ The magnetic susceptibility at temperature T1,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 20
∴ The required temperature,
T2 = \(\frac{\chi_{\mathrm{m} 1}}{\chi_{\mathrm{m} 2}}\) × T1 = \(\frac{4999}{9998}\) × 300 = 150 K

Question 54.
Explain magnetic hysteresis in a ferromagnetic material.
OR
Explain the behaviour of a ferromagnetic material in an external magnetic field with the help of a magnetic hysteresis cycle.
OR
Explain the behaviour of a ferromagnetic material through one cycle of magnetization.
Answer:
A large scale consequence of the magnetic behaviour of a ferromagnetic under different applied magnetic fields can be observed by placing an unmagnetized rod of the material inside a solenoid. A current through the coil establishes the magnetizing field H, which we take as the independent variable. By measuring the voltage induced in a test coil wound alongside, we can determine changes in flux Φ, and hence changes in B inside the rod. B is measured in tesla while H is measured in ampere per metre. Knowing B and H, we can always compute magnetization M. It is however usual to plot B rather than M, as a function of H.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 21
Typical B-H plot during the following operations :
(1) Starting with an unmagnetized rod, B = 0 and H = 0 (Point O), H is increased until it has the value corresponding to point a : Here the rod has reached its saturation magnetization and B remains constant even with further increase in H. The lower part of the curve Oa is governed by domain growth while the upper flattening part is governed by domain rotation.

(2) Reduce H to zero (point b) : the curve does not retrace itself, as shown by the curve ab. This irre-versibility is called hysteresis. It is largely due to the domain boundary movements being partially irreversible. If the current is simply switched off at this point, the rod will have a residual magnetization as indicated by the non-zero value of B, called retentivity or remanence, for H = 0. Essentially now B = μ0M, i.e., the rod has acquired a permanent magnetization.

(3) Reverse H and increase it in magnitude until it has the value corresponding to point c : Here B is zero. The corresponding reverse magnetizing field H is called coercivity.

(4) Increase H in reverse direction until saturation magnetization is reached (point d).
(5) Reduce H to zero again (point e).
(6) Reverse the current once more until point a is reached again.
The process of taking the magnetic material once through the hysteresis loop abcdefa is called hysteresis cycle.

Question 55.
What is magnetic hysteresis ?
Explain it on the basis of magnetic domains.
Answer:
Magnetic hysteresis is a phenomenon shown by ferromagnetic materials in which the magnetic flux density through a material depends on the applied magnetizing field as well as the previous state of magnetization. Due to retention of its memory of previous state of magnetization, the flux density B lags behind (does not remain in step) with magnetizing field H. This delay in the change of its magnetization M (or equivalently, B) in response to a change in H is called hysteresis.

Hysteresis can be understood through the concept of magnetic domains. Domain boundary displacements and domain rotations are not totally reversible. When the applied magnetizing field H is increased and then decreased back to its initial value, the domains do not return completely to their original configuration but retain some memory or history of their previous alignment.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 56.
Define :
(1) retentivity
(2) coercivity.
Answer:

  1. Retentivity : The residual magnetic flux density or magnetization in a magnetic material when the magnetizing field intensity is reduced to zero is called retentivity or remanence.
  2. Coercivity: The reversed magnetizing field strength required to reduce the remanent magnetic flux density or magnetization in a magnetic material from its remanent value to zero, i.e., to demagnetize the magnetic material completely, is

Question 57.
What is a ‘soft’ magnetic material?
OR
What is meant by a ‘soft’ iron?
Answer:
A soft magnetic material, usually iron-based, has high permeability, low retentivity and low coercivity. In other words, it does not have appreciable hysteresis, i.e., its hysteresis loop is very narrow. Such a material magnetizes and demagnetizes more easily, by small external fields.

Question 58.
What is an electromagnet?
Answer:
An electromagnet is an insulated coil wrapped around a ferromagnetic core (usually a soft iron) of high permeability and low retentivity. When a current is passed through the coil-a solenoid or toroid, the ferromagnetic material magnifies the magnetic field of the coil, the magnification factor being the relative permeability (μ / μ0) of the core. The magnetic field of the current-carrying coil magnetizes the core material, thereby producing a much larger field than the coil would produce by itself.

Question 59.
What is a magnetically hard material?
Answer:
A ‘hard’ magnetic material, such as ALNICO (an alloy of aluminium, nickel and cobalt), has high permeability, high retentivity and very high coercivity- of the orders of 1 tesla and 104 ampere per metre, respectively. In other words, it has a large zero-field magnetization, and large reverse field needed to demagnetize. Its hysteresis loop is very broad. Such a material can be made into a permanent magnet, that is, its magnetization will persist indefinitely if it is subsequently exposed only to weak magnetic fields.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 60.
Distinguish between an electromagnet and a permanent magnet.
Answer:

Electromagnet

Permanent magnet

1. Magnetic field of an electromagnet is retained till there is passage of electric current through the solenoid or coil. 1. Magnetic field is retained for a long period of time.
2. current through the solenoid and the number of turns per unit length of the solenoid. 2. The strength of a permanent magnet depends upon the nature of the material of which it is made.
3. For a good electromagnet, the retentivity and coerciv­ity of the material should be low. 3. For a good permanent mag­ net, the retentivity and co­ercivity of the material should be high.
4. It is usually made of soft ferromagnetic material. 4. It is usually made of hard ferromagnetic material.
5. Poles of an electromagnet can be reversed by revers­ing the direction of electric current. 5. Poles of a permanent mag­net cannot be reversed.

Question 61.
Explain magnetic shielding.
Answer:
The use of a shell or box of magnetic material of high permeability to protect sensitive instruments from stray magnetic fields is called magnetic shielding. The permeability of the material being many order of magnitudes greater than air, the magnetic field lines pass through the shell. The saturation v induction B of the material must be greater than the external field to be shielded. from below figure shows the cross section of a cylindrical or spherical shield in which the central region is the field-free region.

Magnetic shielding is useful for a wide range of applications, from small components inside a set of speakers to large magnetically shielded rooms.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 22
[Note : The most widely used alloy for magnetic shielding purposes is the patented MuMetal®. Its composition of 80% nickel, 4.5% molybdenum and balance iron gives it high permeability.] .

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
A rectangular bar magnet-with sides l. b and w – h.is mass n and magnetic moment M. It is free to rotate about a vertical axis through its centre of mass such that its faces of area l × b are honzoritaL The period T of angular oscillations of this magnet in a uniform magnetic field B is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 23
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{\frac{\pi^{2} m\left(l^{2}+b^{2}\right)}{3 M B}}\)

Question 2.
A magnet of moment \(\vec{m}\) is placed in a uniform magnetic field \(\vec{B}\). Which of the following graphs correctly depicts the variation of its orientation energy Uθ i.e., its potential energy due to its orientation θ with \(\vec{B}\)?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 24
Answer:
(D)

Question 3.
The magnetic dipole moment has the dimensions of current
(A) \(\frac{\text { current }}{\text { area }}\)
(B) current × area
(C) \(\frac{\text { area }}{\text { current }}\)
(D) current × length.
Answer:
(B) current × area

Question 4.
The dimensions of magnetic dipole moment are
(A) [L2I]
(B) [LI]
(C) [L-1I]
(D) [L-2I]
Answer:
(A) [L2I]

Question 5.
The gyromagnetic ratio of an orbital electron is the ratio of its
(A) charge to mass
(B) magnetic moment to volume
(C) orbital magnetic moment to linear momentum
(D) orbital magnetic moment to orbital angular momentum.
Answer:
(D) orbital magnetic moment to orbital angular momentum.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 6.
If \(\vec{M}_{0}, \vec{L}_{0}\) and γ0 are respectively the magnetic dipole moment, orbital angular momentum and gyrornagnetlc ratio of an orbital electron. Then.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials 25
Answer:
(A) \(\vec{M}_{0}=-\gamma_{0} \overrightarrow{L_{0}}\)

Question 7.
Bohr magneton is the magnetic dipole moment of
(A) an orbital electron in the ground state of a Bohr atom
(B) an orbital electron with orbital angular momenturn of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)
(C) the order of 10-23 J/T
(D) all of the above.
Answer:
(D) all of the above.

Question 8.
A bar magnet 10 cm long has cross-sectional area 2 cm2 and magnetic dipole moment of 10 A∙m2. The magnetization of its material, assumed to be uniform, is
(A) 5 × 105 A/m
(B) 2 × 105 A/m
(C) 0.5 A/m
(D) 0.2 A/m.
Answer:
(A) 5 × 105 A/m

Question 9.
An iron rod of volume 10-4 m3 acquires a magnetic moment of 25 A∙m2 when placed inside a solenoid whose windings carry a current of 0.5 A. The magnetization of the rod (in A/m), assumed to be uniform, is
(A) 5 × 10-5
(B) 2.5 × 10-3
(C) 12.5
(D) 2.5 × 105
Answer:
(D) 2.5 × 105

Question 10.
The dimensions of magnetic intensity are
(A) [LI]
(B) [L2I]
(C) [L-1I]
(D) [L-2I].
Answer:
(C) [L-1I]

Question 11.
The ratio of magnetization to magnetic field induction (M/B) for both diamagnetic and paramagnetic materials is, in the usual notation,
(A) χm
(B) \(\frac{\chi_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mu_{0}}\)
(C) µr
(D) µ
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\chi_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mu_{0}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 12.
Magnetic susceptibility for vacuum (where there is no matter) is
(A) zero
(B) positive
(C) negative
(D) infinite.
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 13.
Magnetic susceptibility is positive and small for
(A) silver
(B) platinum
(C) mercury
(D) sodium chloride.
Answer:
(B) platinum

Question 14.
The magnetic induction within an ideal solenoid with air core is 5 mT. With an iron core of magnetic susceptibility 500, the induction within changes by
(A) 2.5 T
(B) 25 T
(C) 50 T
(D) 100 T.
Answer:
(A) 2.5 T

Question 15.
The magnetic moment of any atom in an isolated diamagnetic material is
(A) zero
(B) small
(C) large
(D) negative.
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 16.
Which of the following is diamagnetic?
(A) Dysprosium
(B) Gadolinium
(C) Magnesium
(D) Silver
Answer:
(D) Silver

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 17.
The most exotic diamagnetic materials are
(A) the glasses
(B) the insulators
(C) the superconductors
(D) the semiconductors.
Answer:
(C) the superconductors

Question 18.
A thin, small gIas rod is suspended between the poles of a strung electromagnet. The rod
(A) is strongly repelled by the magnetic field.
(B) orients itself parallel to the magnetic field
(C) orients itself perpendicuLar to the magnetic field
(D) is weakly attracted by the magnetic field
Answer:
(C) orients itself perpendicuLar to the magnetic field

Question 19.
Which of the following is paramagnetic?
(A) Bismuth
(B) Copper
(C) Liq. oxygen
(D) Silver
Answer:
(C) Liq. oxygen

Question 20.
When a parainagnetic material Is placed in a uniform magnetic field,
(A) its atoms acquire a magnetic moment opposite to the magnetic field
(B) the atomic magnetic moments tend to align along the magnetizing field
(C) all the atomic magnetic moments align along the magnetizing field
(D) the sample temporarily becomes ferromagnetic.
Answer:
(B) the atomic magnetic moments tend to align along the magnetizing field

Question 21.
Curte constant is
(A) a universal constant
(B) constant for a given paramagnetic material
(C) constant for a given diamagnetic material
(D) inversely proportional to the absolute temperature
Answer:
(B) constant for a given paramagnetic material

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 11 Magnetic Materials

Question 22.
The rare-earth element, gadolinium, is
(A) diamagnetic
(B) paramagnetic
(C) ferromagnetic
(D) nonmagnetic.
Answer:
(C) ferromagnetic

Question 23.
Curie’s law is valid for
(A) diamagnelics
(B) paramagnetics
(C) ferromagnetics
(D) all materials,
Answer:
(B) paramagnetics

Question 24.
Magnetizing and demagnetizing a material that has hysteresis involves
(A) increase in the temperature of the material
(B) a terro-to-para phase change
(C) decrease in the temperature of the material
(D) none of the above.
Answer:
(A) increase in the temperature of the material

Question 25.
The length of a bar magnet is large compared to its width and breadth. The time period of its angular oscillation in a vibration magnetometer is 2s. The magnet is cut along its length into two equal parts and the two parts are then mounted together in the magnetometer with their like poles together. The time period of this combination will be
(A) 2 s
(B) 1 s
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) s
(D) \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) s
Answer:
(B) 1 s

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Commerce OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Select the correct option and rewrite the sentences

Question 1.
Principle of utmost good faith is applicable to ………………
(a) Life insurance
(b) Marine insurance
(c) All types of insurance
Answer:
All types of insurance

Question 2.
Insurable interest must exist in ……………..
(a) Life insurance contract only
(b) Marine insurance contract only
(c) Every insurance contract
Answer:
Every insurance contract

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 3.
Indemnity means ………………….
(a) compensation equal to loss
(b) compensation more than loss
(c) compensation less than loss
Answer:
compensation equal to loss.

Question 4.
In India railways are owned and managed by ………………….
(a) Private companies
(b) Government
(c) Individuals
Answer:
Government

Question 5.
The costliest means of transport is ………………
(a) Rail transport
(b) Water transport
(c) Air transport
Answer:
Airtransport

Question 6.
Road transport is suitable for ……………… distance.
(a) Short
(b) Long
(c) Medium
Answer:
Short

Question 7.
Railway transport is convenient mode of transport for travelling ………………. distance.
(a) Short
(b) Long
(c) Medium
Answer:
Long.

Question 8.
Food Corporation of India is Em exEimple of ……………….
(a) Government warehouse
(b) Duty-paid warehouse
(c) Cold storage warehouse
Answer:
Government warehouse

Question 9.
Duty paid warehouses are located near ………………….
(a) Railway stations
(b) villages
(c) port and dock
Answer:
port and dock.

Question 10.
Postal services are administered by …………………
(a) Private companies
(b) Government of India
(c) Panchayat system
Answer:
Government of India

Question 11.
In case of urgency and to avoid delays ……………… is sent.
(a) Registered post
(b) Speed post
(c) Insured post
Answer:
Speed post

Question 12.
Inland letter card is used for transmission of messages ……………… only.
(a) outside India
(b) within India
(c) within state
Answer:
within India

Question 13.
Communication in the nature of financial statements may be posted by a service provider to the customers at least once in ……………….. days under Bill Mail Service.
(a) 90
(b) 60
(c) 30
Answer:
90

Question 14.
A ………….. is the person named in money order to whom the money is to be paid.
(a) drawee
(b) drawer
(c) payee
Answer:
payee

Question 15.
Under iMO one can transfer money from Rs ………………….. to Rs 50,000 from designated iMO post offices.
(a) 5,000
(b) 1,000
(c) 500
Answer:
1,000.

Question 16.
The types of account under which the amount is kept fixed for specific period is called ……………….
(a) Fixed Deposit Account
(b) Current Account
(c) Recurring Deposit Account
Answer:
Fixed Deposit Account

Question 17.
The account In which a monthly deposit of certain amount Is to be made for a fixed period Is known as ……………….
(a) Savings Account
(b) Current Account
(c) Recurring Deposit Account
Answer:
Recurring Deposit Account

Question 18.
The account suitable for business purpose is ………………….
(a) Savings Account
(b) Current Account
(c) Recurring Account
Answer:
Current Account

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 19.
The account suitable for creating a saving habit is ………………..
(a) Current Account
(b) Recurring Account
(c) Savings Account
Answer:
Savings Account

Question 20.
There Is no limit on the frequency of withdrawals from a …………………
(a) Savings Account
(b) Fixed Deposit Account
(c) Current Account
Answer:
Current Account.

Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) Life Insurance (1) Written request by insured
(B) Mitigation of loss (2) Document contains terms and conditions of insurance contract
(C) Premium (3) Insurable interest
(D) Policy (4) Maximise loss
(E) Claim (5) Transfer of loss from one person to another
(F) Subject-matter of insurance (6) To minimise the loss
(7) Owned by Private Companies
(8) Life, property or cargo of insured
(9) Demand to compensate the loss occurred
(10) Payment made by policyholder

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Life Insurance (3) Insurable interest
(B) Mitigation of loss (6) To minimise the loss
(C) Premium (10) Payment made by policyholder
(D) Policy (2) Document contains terms and conditions of insurance contract
(E) Claim (9) Demand to compensate the loss occurred
(F) Subject-matter of insurance (8) Life, property or cargo of insured

Question 2.

Group A Group B
(A) Air Transport (1) Suitable for carrying bulky and heavy goods
(B) Pipeline Transport (2) Connects two places on the hills
(C) Railway Transport (3) Raigad Ropeway
(D) Road transport (4) Fastest mode of Transport
(E) Water Transport (5) Feeder to other Transport
(6) Petroleum and gas
(7) Monorail transport
(8) Door to door service
(9) Owned by private companies
(10) Fully owned by foreign companies.

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Air Transport (4) Fastest mode of Transport
(B) PipelineTransport (6) Petroleum and gas
(C) Railway Transport (5) Feeder to other Transport
(D) Road transport (8) Door to door service
(E) Claim (1) Suitable for carrying bulky and heavy goods

Question 3.

Group A Group B
(A) Warehousing (1) Located at railway station
(B) Cold storage (2) Stocks the goods on which duty is paid
(C) Warehouse keeper (3) Owned and managed by Government
(D) Duty paid warehouses (4) Time utility
(E) Government warehouses (5) Bond
(6) Possession utility
(7) Perishable goods
(8) Stocks the goods on which duty is not yet paid
(9) Owned and managed by NGOs
(10) Operated by manufacturers to profit storage needs

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Warehousing (4) Time utility
(B) Cold storage (7) Perishable goods
(C) Warehouse keeper (5) Bond
(D) Duty paid warehouses (2) Stocks the goods on which duty is paid
(E) Government warehouses (3) Owned and managed by Government

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 4.

Group A Group B
(A) Reserve Bank of India (RBI) (1) Recurring deposit account
(B) Overdraft facilities (2) 12 hours service
(C) ATM (3) Withdrawals after fixed period of time
(D) Fixed deposit account (4) Central Bank
(E) Business Service (5) Current account
(6) 24 hours service
(7) Commercial bank
(8) Withdrawal before fixed period of time
(9) Intangible in nature
(10) Tangible in nature

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Reserve Bank of India (RBI) (4) Central Bank
(B) Overdraft facilities (5) Current account
(C) ATM (6) 24 hours service
(D) Fixed deposit account (3) Withdrawals after fixed period of time
(E) Business Service (9) Intangible in nature

Give one word/phrase/term for the following sentences

Question 1.
The policy under which cargo is insured for a specific period and voyage.
Answer:
Mixed Policy

Question 2.
The principle of insurance under which the insurer and insured must show complete faith towards each other.
Answer:
Principle of utmost good faith

Question 3.
The type of insurance where the principle of indemnity is not applicable.
Answer:
Life insurance

Question 4.
The person who is protected against certain losses.
Answer:
Insured or Policy Holder

Question 5.
The policy for which the premium is lowest, among all insurance policies.
Answer:
Term insurance policy

Question 6.
The consideration for which the insurer agrees to insure the insured.
Answer:
Premium

Question 7.
This policy is applicable till the departure of the vessel from the port.
Answer:
Part Risk Policy

Question 8.
A policy in which subject matter is insured for a specific voyage irrespective of time involved in it.
Answer:
Voyage policy

Question 9.
Type of marine insurance policy purchased from more than one insurer.
Answer:
Composite marine insurance policy

Question 10.
Policy under which several ships belonging to one owner are insured under the same policy.
Answer:
Fleet Policy or Block Policy.

Question 11.
Mode of transport which helps to get goods and passengers at their doors.
Answer:
Road transport

Question 12.
The mode of transport which connects two places on the hills or across a valley or river.
Answer:
Rope way.

Question 13.
A warehouse where the goods can be stored after the payment of import duty.
Answer:
Duty Paid Warehouse

Question 14.
These warehouses are owned and operated by big manufacturers to fulfil their own storage needs.
Answer:
Private Warehouses

Question 15.
The warehouses which provide storage facilities to general public for certain charges.
Answer:
Public Warehouses

Question 16.
The warehouses which store imported goods until the payment of custom duty.
Answer:
Bonded Warehouses

Question 17.
These warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by co-operative societies.
Answer:
Cooperative Warehouses.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 18.
A quick and easy way of transferring personal remittances from abroad to beneficiaries in India.
Answer:
International Money Transfer

Question 19.
A method of exchanging mail between people using electronic devices.
Answer:
e-mail

Question 20.
The process of passing any information from one person to another with the help of some medium.
Answer:
Communication

Question 21.
The postal service which provide complete solutions right from mail preparation to mail delivery useful for small business and large companies.
Answer:
Business Post.

Question 22.
A bank which Is known as banker’s bank.
Answer:
Central bank

Question 23.
The type of bank which issues currency notes In India.
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India

Question 24.
They operate at village level.
Answer:
Primary Credit Societies

Question 25.
It is not allowed to Issue loans and credit cards.
Answer:
Payment Bank

Question 26.
It is an apex institution for financing agricultural and rural sector.
Answer:
National Bank for Agricultural and Rural Development (NABARD)

Question 27.
The type of bank engaged in financing import and export trade and in foreign exchange transactions.
Answer:
Exchange bank.

State whether following statements are True or False

Question 1.
The principle of subrogation is applicable to life insurance contract.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
The principle of utmost good faith is only applicable to life insurance contract.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
Insured must have insurable interest in the subject-matter at the time of taking the policy.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
An individual must always try to minimize the loss by fire as far as possible.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 5.
The Principle of indemnity is applicable to fire insurance.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
Railway transport provides door to door services.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
Water transport is the costliest means of transport.
Answer:
False

Question 8.
Transport is useful in raising standard of living.
Answer:
True

Question 9.
Air transport is suitable for short distances.
Answer:
False

Question 10.
Air transport plays vital role during war or emergency situation.
Answer:
True.

Question 11.
International trade for perishable goods has become possible due to cold storage warehouses.
Answer:
True

Question 12.
In bonded warehouses imported goods on which customs duty is already paid are stocked.
Answer:
False

Question 13.
In duty paid warehouses imported goods on which customs duty is not yet paid are stocked.
Answer:
False

Question 14.
Co-operative warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by individuals and private enterprises to earn rent.
Answer:
False

Question 15.
Warehouses can provide transportation facilities to bulk depositors.
Answer:
True.

Question 16.
Parcel cannot be insured.
Answer:
False

Question 17.
Envelope ensures safety of documents and confidentiality of messages.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 18.
If insured parcel lost in transit, the post office is not responsible to pay the insured amount.
Answer:
False

Question 19.
As a premium, courier service is usually less” expensive than usual mail services.
Answer:
False.

Question 20.
Central bank of the nation cannot accept deposits from the public.
Answer:
True

Question 21.
Overdraft facility Is given to savings account holders.
Answer:
False

Question 22.
Current account Is suitable for business community.
Answer:
True

Question 23.
Debit cards are issued by the bank to non account holders also.
Answer:
False

Question 24.
Real-Time Gross Settlement means payment transaction is not subject to any waiting period.
Answer:
True

Question 25.
The minimum amount to be remitted through RTGS Rs 1.00,000
Answer:
False

Question 26.
Banks never charge any commission for issuing a bank draft.
Answer:
False

Question 27.
Bank issue gift cheques and gold coins to account holders only.
Answer:
False

Find the odd one

Question 1.
Voyage policy, Time policy, Average policy, Mixed policy.
Answer:
Average policy

Question 2.
Specific policy, Composite policy, Comprehensive policy, Excess policy.
Answer:
Composite policy.

Question 3.
Big ships, boats, helicopters, launches
Answer:
helicopters

Question 4.
Aircrafts, tankers, jets, helicopters
Answer:
tankers

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 5.
Animal carts, motor-cycles, tracks, boats
Answer:
boats

Question 6.
Launches, buses, boats, tankers
Answer:
buses

Question 7.
Fruits, machinery, fish, vegetables
Answer:
machinery

Question 8.
Machinery, cotton, coal, vegetables
Answer:
vegetables.

Question 9.
Storage, advertising, price stabilisation, risk-bearing
Answer:
advertising

Question 10.
Financing, grading and packing, salesmanship, processing.
Answer:
salesmanship.

Question 11.
Inland Letter, Envelope, Business Post, Book Post.
Answer:
Business Post

Question 12.
Electronic Money Transfer, Instant Money order, Bill Mail Service, International Money Transfer.
Answer:
Bill Mail Service

Question 13.
e-post, courier service, internet, email.
Answer:
e-post.

Question 14.
Issue of cheques. locker facility. issue of currency flotes, preparing project report.
Answer:
issue of currency notes

Question 15.
Portfolio management. framing monetary policy, Dematerlalisatlon, Forex transactions.
Answer:
framing monetary policy

Complete the sentences

Question 1.
……………… policy is suitable for small ship owner having only one ship.
Answer:
Single vessel

Question 2.
……………… policy is purchased from more than one insurer.
Answer:
Composite

Question 3.
Insurance is a means of protection from …………………
Answer:
financial loss

Question 4.
………………. is the consideration for which the insurer agrees to insured a person.
Answer:
Premium

Question 5.
……………….. policy is like pension payment scheme.
Answer:
Annuity

Question 6.
ULIP stands for ………………..
Answer:
Unit Linked Insurance Plan.

Question 7.
Road transport is suitable for …………….. distance.
Answer:
short

Question 8.
Road transport is suitable to carry …………….. goods over a short distance.
Answer:
Perishable

Question 9.
Transport system contributes to the rapid development of ………………..
Answer:
industry and commerce

Question 10.
Long distance networks of Pipeline transport are used for ………………
Answer:
petroleum and gas

Question 11.
When the goods and passenger move inside the country, it is known as ……………….. water transport.
Answer:
inland.

Question 12.
Warehouses provide space for ………………
Answer:
storage of goods

Question 13.
Bonded warehouses are under the close supervision of ………………
Answer:
customs authority

Question 14.
The ……………… warehouses are owned and managed by big manufacturers and merchants.
Answer:
private

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 15.
All duty paid warehouses are ………………
Answer:
public warehouses

Question 16.
……………… warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by the Government.
Answer:
Government

Question 17.
……………… warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by co-operative societies.
Answer:
Co-operative.

Question 18.
The process of passing information from one person to another with the help of some ……………….. is called Communication.
Answer:
Medium

Question 19.
The Department of Post and Telegraph is part of ………………..
Answer:
Ministry of Communication and Information and Technology

Question 20.
Printed books, magazines, etc. can be sent through ………………
Answer:
Book Post

Question 21.
………………. is the service through which customers can send their messages to any address in India.
Answer:
e-post

Question 22.
Courier services are usually employed by ………………..
Answer:
a company

Question 23.
The minimum quantity of articles to be posted ……………….. by Bill Mail Service at a time is
Answer:
5000.

Question 24.
Cash credit is granted under a separate …………………
Answer:
Loan account

Question 25.
ICICI Bank is an example of ……………..
Answer:
PrIvate Sector Bank

Question 26.
The account under which a fixed sum is to be deposited regularly every month is known as ………………
Answer:
Recurring deposit account

Question 27.
The RBI was established in the ……………… year
Answer:
1945

Question 28.
In public sector banks, the majority of capital Is held by …………………
Answer:
Government.

Select the correct option and complete the following table

Question 1.
(Warehousing provides storage facilities on rental basis, Big manufacturers and merchants to fulfil their storage needs, Duty paid warehouses, Bonded warehouses)

Group A Group B
(1) Private warehouses —————
(2) ————– Work under the control of customs authorities
(3) ————– Useful for importer as proper care of goods is taken after paying customs duty
(4) Public warehouses ————–
(5) Time utility and place utility ——————–

Answer:

Group A Group B
(1) Private warehouses Big manufacturers and merchants to fulfil their storage needs
(2) Bonded warehouses Work under the control of customs authorities
(3) Duty paid warehouses Useful for importer as proper care of goods is taken after paying customs duty
(4) Public warehouses Provide storage facilities on rental basis
(5) Time utility and place utility Warehousing.

Question 2.
(Courier service, ensures safety of documents and confidentiality of messages, Book Post, International Money Transfer, Communication in the nature of financial statements, bills, etc.)

Group A Group B
(1) Envelope —————-
(2) ————— Printed books, magazines can be sent at distance places through post.
(3) Bill mail service —————
(4) —————- Transferring personal remittances from abroad to beneficiaries in India.
(5) —————- Exchange of items between two or more persons.

Answer:

Group A Group B
(1) Envelope ensures safety of documents and confidentiality of messages
(2) Book Post Printed books, magazines can be sent at distance places through post.
(3) Bill mail service Communication in the nature of financial statements, bills, etc.
(4) International Money Transfer Transferring personal remittances from abroad to beneficiaries in India.
(5) Courier service Exchange of items between two or more persons.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 3.
(Ministry of Shipping, Air transport, movement of people and goods from place to another, Duroto Express and Shatabdi Express, Ministry of Railways, looks after development of surface transport in the country)

Group A Group B
(1) Transportation —————
(2) Ministry of Road Transport ————–
(3) ————– Looks after development of rail transport
(4) Some popular trains ————–
(5) ————– Mountainous areas where other modes of transport cannot reach
(6) —————- Looks after development of ocean transport

Answer:

Group A Group B
(1) Transportation Movement of people and goods from one place to another
(2) Ministry of Road Transport Looks after development of surface transport in the country
(3) Ministry of Railways Looks after development of rail transport
(4) Some popular trains Duranto express and Shatabdi Express
(5) Air transport Mountainous areas where other modes of transport cannot reach
(6) Ministry of Shipping Looks after development of ocean transport

Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What is Indemnity ?
Answer:
Indemnity means a guarantee or assurance to put the insured in same financial position in which he was immediately before the happening of the uncertain event.

Question 2.
What is Insurance ?
Answer:
insurance is contract between the insured and insurer whereby the insurer agrees to compensate the insured against loss.

Question 3.
What is Child Insurance ?
Answer:
A child insurance policy is a saving cum investment plan that is designed to meet child’s future financial requirements which helps him to pursue his dreams.

Question 4.
What is ULIP policy ?
Answer:
Unit Linked Insurance Policy (ULIP) is the policy which combines the benefits of life insurance policy with mutual funds.

Question 5.
Define warehouse.
Answer:
A warehouse is defined as, an establishment for the storage or accumulation of goods.

Question 6.
What is public warehouses ?
Answer:
A public warehouse is a specialised business establishment that provides storage facilities to the general public on certain charges.

Question 7.
What is Retail Post ?
Answer:
The service under which department of S post offers convenience to the common people by making third party’s products and services available in their areas through selected post offices, e.g. collection of electricity bill, collection of taxes, etc. is called Retail post.

Question 8.
What is e-Post ?
Answer:
e-Post is the service through which customers can send their messages to any address in India with a combination of electronic transmission and physical delivery.

Question 9.
What is Transportation ?
Answer:
Transportation refers to the movement of people, animals and goods from one location to another location.

Question 10.
What is Road Transport ?
Answer:
Road transport are the means that connect people and places on the surface of the land.

Question 11.
What is Rail Transport ?
Answer:
Transportation of passengers and goods on rail lines through trains is called as rail transport.

Question 12.
What is Water Transport ?
Answer:
The movement of passengers and goods on waterways by using various means such as boats, steamers, launches, ships, etc. is called water transport.

Question 13.
What are services ?
Answer:
Services are an act of performance that one party offers to another for certain consideration or without consideration essentially intangible and does not result in the ownership of anything, e.g. services of doctors.

Question 14.
What are business services ?
Answer:
Business services are those services which help business to grow and run It successfully.

Question 15.
What is NABARD ?
Answer:
National Bank for Agriculture and Rural Development (NABARD) Is an apex Institution which provides short term as well as long term credit through regional rural banks to agricultural and rural sector of the Indian economy.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 16.
What is overdraft ?
Answer:
Overdraft is a temporary arrangement by which a current accountholder Is allowed to withdraw more money than his own balance up to a certain limit sanctioned by the bank.

Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentences

Question 1.
Under whole life policy, the insured can receive money from the insurance company.
Answer:
cannot receive

Question 2.
The person who is protected against certain losses is called insurer.
Answer:
insured

Question 3.
Whole life policy is taken for a specific period.
Answer:
Endowment

Question 4.
Fire insurance gives protection against the losses caused due to the dangers of the sea.
Answer:
Marine.

Question 5.
Ministry of Railways looks after the development of water transport throughout the country.
Answer:
Railways

Question 6.
In hilly areas where other modes of transport are not accessible, water transport is important and convenient.
Answer:
Air

Question 7.
Ministry of Road transport looks after development of ocean transport throughout the country.
Answer:
Shipping

Question 8.
Palace on wheels and Maharaja are the examples of popular trains.
Answer:
Luxury

Question 9.
Warehouses are constructed in such a way to maximise risks.
Answer:
Minimise

Question 10.
Warehouses create place utility by preserving the goods till they are demanded.
Answer:
time

Question 11.
A private warehouse is a specialised establishment that provides storage facilities to the general public for certain charges.
Answer:
public

Question 12.
Duty paid warehouses work under the control of customs authorities.
Answer:
Bonded

Question 13.
Bonded warehouses are more useful for re-export of the goods.
Answer:
Duty paid.

Question 14.
Inland letter is used to send message outside India only.
Answer:
within

Question 15.
Printed books, magazines, journals, etc. can be sent through Business Post.
Answer:
Book Post

Question 16.
The minimum quantity of articles to be posted at a time is 1000 in Bill Mail Service.
Answer:
5000

Question 17.
A Drawee is the person named in money order as the person to whom the money is to be paid.
Answer:
A Payee

Question 18.
On can transfer money from INR 1000 to INR 5000 from designated imp post offices.
Answer:
50,000

Question 19.
Services are homogeneous.
Answer:
heterogeneous

Question 20.
All services are transferable in nature.
Answer:
non-transferable

Question 21.
Commercial bank issues currency notes in India.
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 22.
Export and Import Bank provides financial assistance to common people.
Answer:
Exporters and Importers

Distinguish between.

Question 1.
Private Warehouse and Public Warehouses
Answer:

Private Warehouse Public Warehouses
1. Ownership and management These warehouses are owned and managed by big manufacturers, merchants, a firm or a company. These warehouses are owned and managed by individuals, firms, co-operative organisations, etc.
2. Purpose These warehouses are meant for their owners. They Eire not given on rental basis to outsiders. These warehouses are meant for commercial use. Storage and other facilities are provided to small manufacturers and traders on payment of rent.
3. Location Private warehouses are located at the places near factory or residence or place which is convenient to their owners. Public warehouses are generally located near the junctions of railways, highways and waterways.
4. Rules and Regulations These warehouses Eire not required to work under any rules and regulations. They have to observe general laws of the nation. These warehouses work under a licence from the government in accordance with the rules and regulations prescribed by the government.
5. Suitability These warehouses are suitable for large scale manufacturers, wholesalers and retailers who can afford to have their own warehouses. These warehouses are more suitable for small scale manufacturers, traders or distributors who cannot afford to have their own warehouses.

Question 2.
Government Warehouses and Private Warehouses

Government Warehouses Private Warehouses
1. Ownership and management These warehouses Eire owned, managed and controlled by Central and State governments or public authorities. These warehouses are owned, managed and controlled by big manufacturers, merchants, a firm or a company.
2. Storage facilities These warehouses offer storage facilities to the governments, small farmers, businessmen, traders at nominal charges. These warehouses offer storage facilities to the owners for their own purposes. They are not rented to others.
3. Other services These warehouses provide all the services for marketing such as classification, standardisation, grading, packing, etc. These warehouses provide only those services which Eire required by their owners.
4. Rate The rates charged by these warehouses for storing the goods are usually cheap and low. Since these warehouses do not give their space on hire to outsiders, the question of charging rent does not arise.
5. Location These warehouses Eire located at the important transport centres across different states and country. These warehouses Eire located in the premises of the owners which may be near to their factories or market places.

Question 3.
Road Transport and Water Transport
Answer:

Road Transport Water Transport
1. Nature Road transport represents transport facilities on the ground. It consists of motor transport, carts, etc. Water transport represents transport facilities in the water. It consists of river, canal and ocean transport.
2. Carrying capacity It has limited carrying capacity. It has huge or large carrying capacity.
3. Cost of construction and maintenance It requires relatively less capital investment in terms of construction of vehicles and roads and their maintenance. Although no cost is involved in construction of waterways, high cost is involved for construction of ships and ports and also for maintenance of ships and ports
4. Transport charges Transport charges are not fixed but they Eire usually high due to increase in fuel charges. Transport charges Eire fixed according to the distance and they Eire relatively the lowest.
5. Door to door service Road transport provides door to door services to the passengers. Water transport does not provide door-to-door services to the passengers.
6. Suitability It is suitable for short distances and for carrying light and perishable goods such as fruits, fish, vegetables, food grains and other consumer goods. It is suitable for long distance and for carrying heavy and bulky goods such as machinery, cotton, COEQ, etc. in large quantity to any part of the world.
7. Means of transport It uses animals, animal carts, motor-cycles, trucks, tempos, three-wheelers, buses, motor CEO’S, etc. It uses launches, boats, tankers, liners, big ships etc.

Question 4.
Water Transport and Air Transport
Answer:

Water Transport Air Transport
1. Speed Water transport is the slowest mode of transport. Air transport is the fastest mode of transport
2. Carrying capacity Water transport has huge carrying capacity. Air transport has limited carrying capacity.
3. Means of transport Water transport uses big ships, boats, liners, tankers, etc. as means of transport. Air transport uses aircraft, jets, helicopter, etc. as means of transport.
4. Suitability Water transport is suitable for carrying heavy Eind bulky goods such as machinery, cotton, coal, etc. in large quantities to any part of the world. Air transport is suitable to carry light, perishable and valuable goods to any part of the world.
5. Transport charges Transport charges are fixed according to the distance and they are relatively lowest. Transport charges are fixed according to the distance and they Eire relatively highest.
6. Origin Water transport dates back to early historical period. Air transport commenced at the beginning of the 20th century.
7. Means of transport It uses animals, animal carts, motor-cycles, trucks, tempos, three-wheelers, buses, motor CEO’S, etc. It uses launches, boats, tankers, liners, big ships etc.

Question 5.
Savings Account and Fixed Deposit Account
Answer:

Savings Account Fixed Deposit Account
1. meaning A savings account is a type of bank account meant for any regular salaried and wage earners and for making savings A Fixed Deposit Account is a type of bank account under which a certain fixed amount is deposited for a definite period of time.
2. Mode of withdrawals Withdrawals are allowed by cheques or withdrawal slips. No withdrawal is permitted before the date of maturity.
3. Facilities Passbook balance on SMS, cheque books, etc. are issued to the account holders. Only Fixed Deposit Receipt (FDR) is issued.
4. Restrictions on withdrawals There are certain restrictions on the number of withdrawals and the amount to be withdrawn at a time. Withdrawal or payment can be obtained only on the expiry of the fixed period.
5. Rate of interest Interest at low rate is paid periodically in this account. Interest at high rate is paid periodically or at the expiry of period along with principal sum depending upon the time period of deposit.
6. Loan No loan facility is available on the balance of savings account. A certain amount by way of loan can be granted against the security of the Fixed Deposit Receipt (FDR).

Question 6.
Loan and Overdraft
Answer:

Loan Overdraft
1. Meaning Loan is an arrangement under which the bank advances an amount against securities for a certain fixed period of time. Overdraft is a temporary arrangement where a current account holder is allowed to overdraw from the account up to a specified limit.
2. Eligibility Any account holder (i.e. current, savings or fixed deposit) can get a loan facility. Only current account holders are eligible for an overdraft facility.
3. Purpose The purpose of loan is to provide a long-term finance for some project or expansion of business. The purpose of overdraft is to meet short term working capital requirements.
4.Duration Loan may be sanctioned for a period such as 1 year, 3 years, 5 years or even more. Overdraft is generally sanctioned for a short duration from 15 to 60 days.
5. Interest Interest is calculated on the sanctioned loan amount whether it is withdrawn or not and the rate of interest is a little higher than that of overdraft. Interest is calculated on the amount actually withdrawn and the rate of interest is lower than that of loan.
6. Repayment Loan is repaid either in instalments or in lump sum on its due date. Overdraft amount is adjusted against the amount or cheques deposited in the Current Account.

Arrange in proper order

Question 1.
email, Inland letter, Courier
Answer:
Inland letter, Courier, email.

Explain the following terms/concepts

Question 1.
Insurable interest.
Answer:
(1) A person is said to have insurable interest in the object insured if he is in such a relationship with the object of insurance, that he would stand to benefit monetarily by the continuance of the object insured or would suffer a financial loss by the loss or destruction or absence of the object. Therefore, it is necessary that he should be the owner or the lawful user of the object concerned.

(2) In simple term, insurable interest means – some financial interest in the subject-matter. The insured must have insurable (financial) interest in the subject-matter of insurance. No person can enter into a valid insurance contract unless he has insurable interest in the object insured. A person has insurable interest in his own life and his property. A wife has insurable interest in the life of her husband. Similarly, a businessman has insurable interest in the business property.

Question 2.
E-banking service
Answer:
(1) E-banklng stands for electronic banking. It is also called Virtual banking or Online Banking It is a systern under which all the working of the banks Is done through Internet and computers. With the help of this system. an account holder can deposit the money into the bank or withdraw the money. These funds tram one account to another. He can also get information of his account on the computer itself.

(2) The following-banking services are available to account holders:

  • Automated Thller Machine (ATM)
  • Credit Cards
  • Debit Cards
  • Mobile Banking
  • National Electronic Fund Transfer (NEFT)
  • Real Time Gross Settlement (RTGS). E-banking has made life much easier and banking much faster for both customers and banks.

Justify the following statements

Question 1.
The principle of indemnity does not apply to life insurance contract.
Answer:
(1) The principle of indemnity is the controlling principle of insurance according to which the insured shall be compensated for only the actual loss suffered by him.

(2) All insurance contracts except life insurance contracts are the contracts of indemnity. Life insurance contract is, strictly speaking, a contract of assurance and not a contract of indemnity.

(3) In the case of life insurance contract, insurer cannot fully compensate the insured or his legal heir. This is because loss due to death of individual cannot be exactly determined or expressed in terms of money.

(4) Life insurance contract is a contract of assurance by which the insurer agrees to pay a fixed amount on the happening of the contingency.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 2.
Transport is useful in raising standard of living.
Answer:
(1) An efficient transportation system helps to develop agriculture by making available better seeds, fertilisers and agricultural equipment.

(2) Transport system also contributes to the rapid development of industry and commerce. The development in agriculture, industry and commerce leads to expansion in employment opportunities. Transport, as an industry by itself, also provides jobs to millions of people all over the country.

(3) By generating employment, transport leads to increase the purchasing power with people. As a result consumption pattern improves and consumption of variety of goods and services increases.

(4) Transport makes products from different regions available in local markets. The people also get variety of new and novel goods and services from any corner of the world at their places. This raises their standard of living.

Question 3.
Railway transport does not provide door to door service.
Answer:
(1) Transportation of passengers and goods from one place to another on the land surface on railway tracks through trains is called Railway Transport. It is the most dependable, cheaper and faster mode of transport to carry goods and passengers over long distances. It occupies an important place in land transport system.

(2) Railway transport requires specially ; prepared rail tracks with signalling systems. Therefore, throughout the country only certain places are fixed between which such tracks Eire laid. So, it runs between two railway stations.

(3) Special platforms are constructed to facilitate the loading and unloading of goods and for the movement of passengers.

(4) Goods and passengers are transported from one station to another by railway and there onward journey in the interior locations is facilitated by road transport. Thus, railways cannot provide door-to-door service in the interior as road transport does.

Question 4.
Current account is suitable for businessman.
Answer:
(1) A current account is a type of bank account in which there are no restrictions on the number of deposits and withdrawals. Therefore, it is suitable for businessmen (traders, hospitals, educational institutions, companies, etc.) as they have numerous day-to-day transactions of depositing amounts or cheques into a bank and issuing cheques for making payments to various parties.

(2) A current account is meant for facilitating, banking transactions of a businessman, such as collection of cheques, remittances to parties, bank overdraft facility, etc. A salaried person has no such transactions and does not require such facilities.

(3) A salaried person is interested in the rate of interest on his savings in the bank account. Banks generally do not pay any interest on the current account balances because they cannot use the current deposits for advancing loans to businessmen. Therefore, a salaried person finds savings account suitable for his limited banking transactions.

(4) The minimum balance to be kept for running the current account is much higher as compared to that for the savings account. A salaried person has a limited income and therefore, cannot afford to keep relatively large sum blocked in his account without earning any interest thereon. Therefore, a current account is suitable for businessman.

Attempt the following

Question 1.
What is fire insurance? Explain the different types of fire insurance policies.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : Fire insurance contract is contract of indemnity against loss or damage to goods or property arising from fire. Any property which is likely to damage due to fire may be insured against fire. Fire insurance also cover the loss caused due to fire, lightning and explosion.

[B] Types : The different types of fire insurance policies are shown in the following:

  1. Valued Policy
  2. Average Policy
  3. Specific Policy
  4. Floating Policy
  5. Excess Policy
  6. Reinstatement Policy
  7. Comprehensive Policy
  8. Consequential Loss Policy
  9. Sprinkler Leakage Policy

1. Valued Policy : It is a policy under which the value of the property (i.e. subject mater) is ascertained and agreed upon by the insurer and the insured at the time of issue of the policy. The insurer undertakes to pay the agreed value irrespective of amount of loss caused due to fire. This type of policy is taken for those goods whose value is too difficult to calculate at the time of loss by fire, e.g. artwork, paintings, etc.

2. Average Policy : This policy contains an average clause. Under this policy the insurer is liable to pay only that proportion of the actual loss as the insured sum will bear to the full value of the property at the time of the loss, e.g. the machinery of Rs 5,00,000 is insured under fire insurance for Rs 2,00,000, The loss occurred due to fire arrived at Rs 2,50,000. This is because insurance is 40% of actual value of machinery. Hence the claim for loss is also 40% of 2,50,000 i.e. Rs 1,00,000.
Formula to calculate claim:
\(\frac {Value of Policy}{Value of Property}\) × Actual loss
\(\frac {200000}{500000}\) × 250000 = Rs 100000

3. Specific Policy: This type of policy mentions a specific maximum amount payable as compensation in case the insured property is destroyed by fire, irrespective of the market value of the property insured, e.g. a property of the value of Rs 5,00,000 is insured for Rs 3,00,000. The loss occurred due to fire is Rs 1,50,000. Here insurance company will pay Rs 1,50,000 in full as compensation.

4. Floating Policy : This type of policy covers, under one sum and for a single premium, one or several kinds of goods lying in different localities. As the quantity of goods lying at different places fluctuate from time to time, it is convenient to the businessmen to take a policy for one sum and one premium for goods lying at different places.

5. Excess Policy : This type of policy is taken when the market value of stock constantly fluctuates. In such case one policy is taken for a minimum amount below which value of stock never falls and another policy for excess amount by which price fluctuates, e.g. If the value of stock ranges between Rs 5,00,000 and Rs 5,40,000, then one policy will be taken for Rs 5,00,000 and another policy will be taken for Rs 40,000 i.e. for excess amount.

6. Reinstatement Policy : Under this policy, insurer undertakes to replace the property or goods lost by fire or to pay the amount that would be needed to reinstate or replace the damaged or destroyed property. While replacing the property for paying compensation depreciation amount of the property destroyed is not taken into consideration. The rate of premium is usually very high.

7. Comprehensive Policy : This fire insurance policy covers all kinds of risks such as fire explosion, lightning, earthquake, floods, riot, strikes, burglary, etc. under single policy.

8. Consequential Loss Policy : Initially a fire insurance policy was meant for indemnification of loss due to damage of tangible property. The intangible property was not covered by fire insurance. The consequential loss policy now taken for the loss of tangible as well as intangible properties. This policy covers the risk of loss of net profits, payment of standing charges, expenditure in respect of the increased cost of working, etc.

9. Sprinkler Leakage Policy: This policy covers the damage of property caused by an automatic sprinkler system that has leakage or discharged water accidently and not due to fire and smoke. This policy does not cover the discharge or leakage of water due to heat caused by fire, repair, earthquake, war, explosion, etc.

Question 2.
Explain the advantages of air transport.
Answer:
The advantages of air transport are explained as follows:
(1) Fastest means of transport : Among all the means of transport available at present, air transport is the fastest and quickest means of transport.

(2) Vital services : Air transport plays key role during war and emergency situations because it is useful to provide valuable services quickly in affected areas by floods, earthquakes, etc.

(3) Free routes : In case of air transport, it is not necessary to incur any expenditure on the construction of aerial routes. It uses natural and shortest aerial routes.

(4) Less pollution : In comparison to other means of transport like road transport, air transport is less polluting.

(5) Useful in certain areas : Air transport is very useful in carrying passengers, goods and medicines to the areas specially hilly and mountainous areas which are not accessible by any other means.

(6) Market for perishable and costly goods : For speedy transport of perishable good medicines, human organs, diamonds, ornaments, etc. air transport is most suitable and the fastest.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Answer the following.

Question 1.
Explain types of warehouses.
Answer:
The different types of warehouses are:
(1) Private warehouses : The warehouses owned and operated by the big manufacturers and wholesalers for storing their own goods are called private warehouses. Big companies which need large storage capacity on a regular basis, can afford to construct and maintain their own warehouses. Many public sector organisations also have their own private warehouses, e.g. the Food Corporation of India (FCI) has constructed warehouses in different parts of the country for its own use. Usually these warehouses are constructed near to ones business factory or industry for convenience. They have network of warehouses in different parts of the country.

(2) Public warehouses : Warehouses which are established to provide storage facilities to the general public, small manufacturers and traders on rental basis are called public warehouses. These warehouses are owned and managed by an individual or co-operative societies. These warehouses are located near railway junctions, highways, waterways, airport, seaport, etc. They are well guarded and specially designed to protect goods from several types of risks. These warehouses have to obtain licence from the government. They provide warehousing facilities at low cost. Many marketing facilities such as standardisation, grading, labelling, packing, branding, etc. are provided in these warehouses.

(3) Bonded warehouses : Warehouses which are licensed by the government to accept and store imported goods till the customs duties are not paid on such goods are called bonded warehouses. These warehouses are managed and controlled by customs authorities. These warehouses are located near the ports. The importers cannot take possession of goods from such warehouses unless and until the duty on the goods is paid.

The warehouse-keeper is required to give undertaking or ‘Bond’ that without the consent of the customs authorities goods will not be removed from the warehouse. Hence, such warehouses are called ‘Bonded Warehouses’. If an importer is unwilling or unable to pay customs duty immediately, he can withdraw them in instalments and pay customs duty proportionately.

(4) Duty-paid warehouses : The duty-paid warehouses provide the facility of storing the imported goods but not yet sold or transported to importers’ place or godown. These warehouses are owned and managed by the dock authorities only and hence they are also known as public warehouses. These warehouses are located near port and dock areas. They are more useful to importers who re-export the imported goods. The concerned authorities take all the due and reasonable care to ensure their safety. Processing of imported goods such as sorting, re-packing is done in these warehouses.

(5) Government warehouses : Warehouses which are owned, managed and controlled by the Central and State Governments or public authorities are called Government warehouses. These warehouses offer storage facilities to small traders, farmers, businessmen, etc. who are in need of the same on payment of reasonable rent. Central Warehousing Corporation of India (CWC), State Warehousing Corporation (SWC) and Food

(6) Co-operative warehouses : These are warehouses owned, run, managed and controlled by co-operative societies to provide warehousing facilities to the members who are farmers in rural areas. These warehouses are similar to private warehouses but they run on the principle of co-operation. They are used for storing agricultural commodities, consumer goods, raw materials, etc. Farmers, small producers and traders are benefited by such warehouses as they charge at economical rates.

(7) Cold storage warehouses : Cold storage warehouses are largely used to store and preserve perishable goods such as flowers, fish, eggs, meat, vegetables, fruits, medicines, dairy products, etc. These products are kept in cold storage warehouses at very low temperature so that their quality and freshness would remain intact. These warehouses ensure continuous supply of seasonal and perishable products throughout the year. International trade for seasonal and perishable goods such as green peas, mangoes, etc., becomes possible only because of cold storage facilities.

Question 2.
What is rail transport. Explain its advantages and disadvantages.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : Railways are the principal means of transport on land. The mode of transport which carries goods, passengers and materials from one place to another on rail lines through trains is called Railway transport. It runs passenger trains, mail express, goods trains, popular trains and luxury trains. The ministry of railways looks after the development of rail transport in India.

[B] Advantages : The advantages of rail transport are explained as follows:

  1. Suitable for long distances : Railway transport is suitable and convenient mode of transport for travelling over long distances.
  2. Carriage of heavy and bulky goods : Railway transport is more suitable for the carriage of bulky and heavy goods like engineering goods, coal, cotton, livestock, oil, etc. over long distances.
  3. Speedy : Railway transport is more speedy in comparison to road transport.
  4. Less affected by adverse weather conditions : Usually railway service is more certain, uniform and regular. It is not much affected by adverse weather conditions such as rains, fogs, floods, etc.
  5. Protection to goods : Railway transport protects goods against rains, sun, wind, snow, etc. and ensures safety and security to goods.

[C] Disadvantages : The disadvantages of railway transport are explained as follows:

  1. Expensive for short distances : Railway transport is more expensive for carrying goods and passengers over short distances.
  2. Non-availability of services in remote part : The services of railway transport are not reachable or available in the remote part of the country.
  3. Heavy loss in case of accident : In case of accident, it involves heavy losses of life, goods and materials.
  4. Inflexibility : Fixed time schedule of trains, permanent track, definite station and halts, etc. bring certain degree of inflexibility in railway transport.
  5. Incomplete service : The railway service is available between the nearest stations only. Railways can not provide door-to-door services. Therefore, railway stations are required to be connected by roads.

Question 3.
What is water transport? Explain the advantages and disadvantages of water transport.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : This is the oldest and cheapest means of transport. The mode of transport which carries goods and passengers on the surface of the water from one port to another by using boats, steamers, launches, ships, etc. is called water transport. When the passengers and goods move within the country, it is known as inland water transport and when the goods and passengers are carried through sea and oceans, it is known as ocean or sea transport. The ministry of shipping takes cares of ocean transport in India.

[B] Advantages : The advantages of water transport are explained as follows:

  1. Economical mode of transport : Water transport is suitable and economical mode of transport for carrying heavy and bulky goods over longer distances.
  2. Safe mode of transport : It is safe and secured mode of transport in regard to occurrence of accidents.
  3. Promotes international trade : Water transport facilitates and promotes international trade and thus helps to widen the market.
  4. Free routes : Water transport use waterways which are natural and free of cost route and involve no construction and maintenance costs.
  5. More flexibility : Water transport is more flexible in comparison to rail transport.

[C] Disadvantages : The disadvantages of water transport are explained as follows:

  1. Absence of door-to-door services : Water transport cannot provide door-to-door service. It carries goods and passengers from one port to another.
  2. Affected by adverse weather conditions : It is much affected by adverse weather conditions like heavy rains, cyclone, storms, etc.
  3. Low speed : In comparison to other modes of transport, speed of water transport is very slow. Therefore, perishable goods cannot be transported by this mode of transport.
  4. Heavy capital expenditure : Heavy investment (capital expenditure) cost is involved in the construction and maintenance of ships, ports, docks, wharves, etc.
  5. Hazardous : Water transport is hazardous. There are dangers of storms, cyclone and other perils of sea.

Maharashtra Board 12th OCM Important Questions Chapter 4 Business Services

Question 4.
Define Bank. Explain different type of banks.
Answer:
[A] Definition : Bank is a dealer in money and credit. It is a financial institution whose basic activities are to accept deposits and advance, lend money and provide other related services, According to The Indian Banking Regulation Act, 1949, “any company which transacts the business of banking in India.” The term banking is further defined as, “accepting for the purpose of lending or investment of deposits from the public, repayable on demand or otherwise and withdrawable by cheque, draft and order or otherwise.”

[B] Types of Banks:
The different types of banks are shown In the following:

  1. Central Bank
  2. Commercial Bank
  3. Co-operatIve Bank
  4. Industrial Development Bank
  5. Exchange Bank
  6. RegIonal Rural Bank
  7. SavIngs Bank
  8. Investment Bank
  9. Speclalised Bank

The different types of banks are explained below:
1. Central Bank : The central bank in a country is the financial institution at the top (apex) of all the banking institutions operating in the country. In India, The Reserve Bank of India was established in 1945 under a special statute called the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1944. It performs the functions like framing monetary policy, issuing currency notes, acting as a banker to the Government and acting as the banker’s bank to commercial and other banks in India.

2. Commercial Bank : The Commercial bank plays key role in the economic, industrial and social development of a country. It performs broadly two functions such as (i) Primary functions which include accepting deposits and lending money in different forms and (ii) Secondary function which include agency functions and utility functions. The different types of commercial banks in India are as follows:
(i) Public Sector Banks : The banks in which majority of the share capital or stake (interest) is held by the Government of India are called Public Sector Bank, e.g. State Bank of India, Bank of India, etc.

(ii) Private Sector Banks : The banks in which majority of the share capital or stake is held by private individuals are called Private Sector Banks, e.g. Axis Bank, HDFC Bank, etc.

(iii) Foreign Banks : The banks which are registered and have their headquarters in foreign country but operate in different countries including India through their branches established there, are called Foreign banks e.g. Standard Chartered Bank, American Express Bank, HSBC, etc.

3. Co-operative Banks : Co-operative banks are formed, registered and organised under the Indian Co-operative Societies Act and regulated under Banking Regulation Act. These banks are more popular in rural and semi-urban areas. These banks are primarily meant for catering to the financial needs of economically backward people, farmers and small scale units. They operate at three different levels:
(a) Primary Credit Societies : The primary credit societies work at village level. These credit societies collect the savings and surplus money in the form of deposits from members and common people. They are also financed by the State Co¬operative Banks and District Co-operative Banks for the purpose of lending to needy people for productive purpose.

(b) District Central Co-operative Banks : The District Central Co-operative Banks operating at district level and financed by the State Co-operative Bank for the purpose of providing finance to primary credit societies.

(c) State Co-operative Banks : The State Co-operative Banks Eire working at state level. These banks provide funds to District Central Cooperative Banks and Primary Credit Societies to enable them to provide finance to rural and semi urban areas. Apart from this, they also supervise the working of district banks and credit co¬operative societies.

4. Industrial Development Banks : The banks which provide medium and long term equipment, latest technology, expansion and modernisation of business, etc. are called Industrial Development Banks. Industrial Finance ; Corporation of India (IFCI), State Financial Corporations (SFCs), Maharashtra State Finance Corporation (MSFC), etc. are the examples of Industrial Development Banks. These banks perform the following functions:

  • Provide medium and long term finance to business organisations for expansion and modernisation.
  • Underwriting i.e. giving guarantee to buy shares issued by public limited companies.
  • Purchase debentures and bonds.

5. Exchange Banks : An exchange bank specialises in financing import and export trade and in foreign exchange transactions. The American Express Bank, Bank of Tokyo, Barclays Bank, etc. are the examples of Exchange Banks functioning in India. The Exchange Banks perform the following functions:

  • Finance foreign trade transactions,
  • Issue letter of credit on behalf of importer,
  • Discount foreign bills of exchange,
  • Remit dividend, interests and profits.

6. Regional Rural Banks : These banks were constituted (established) in 1975 and are sponsored by large public sector banks. 50%, 35% and 15% of the capital of these banks are provided by the Central Government, sponsored banks and State Government respectively. These banks collect (mobilise) funds in the form of deposits from rural and semi-urban areas. They provide loans and advances to small and marginal farmers, agricultural workers, rural artisans for productive purpose.

7. Savings Bank : A savings bank is one which has the main object of inculcating the habit of saving among the community. It collects scattered savings of the community especially from rural areas and invests the same in good securities. In India, Postal Savings Bank is an example of such a bank. Commercial Banks and Co-operative Banks act as savings banks as they have separate savings accounts departments.

8. Investment Bank : Investment banks offer financial and advisory assistance to their customers which usually include business firms and government organisations. These banks provide advice on investment decisions and facilitate mergers and acquisitions by undertaking research. These Banks do not directly deal with the common people.

9. Specialised Banks: The banks which make available to the requirements of the business and provide possible support to set up business activities in specific area are called Specialised Banks. The different types of specialised banks are:
(a) Export Import Bank of India (EXIM Bank) : These banks provide the needed financial assistance and support to the exporters and importers in setting up business for exporting and importing products respectively. They work to expand and promote country’s international trade.

(b) Small Industries Development Bank of India (SIDBI) : SIDBI was established on 2nd April, 1990 under the Act of Parliament of India. Its main function is to act as the main institution for financing, promoting and developing the Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSMEs) as well as co-ordinator of the institutions engaged in similar activities.

(c) National Bank for Agricultural and Rural Development (NABARD) : NABARD has been established to work as an apex institution to finance agricultural and rural sector. It provides long term and short term loans through regional rural banks. It provides loans to financial institutions and not individuals. It is also concerned with the function of policy planning and operations relating to agricultural credit and credit for other activities in rural areas.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions 16 Skeleton and Movement Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 1.
Name the three types of muscles which bring about movements in humans.
Answer:

  1. Smooth / non-striated / visceral / involuntary muscles
  2. Cardiac muscles
  3. Skeletal / straited / voluntary muscles.

Question 2.
Name the type of muscles which bring about running and speaking.
Answer:
Skeletal muscles (Voluntary muscles)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 3.
Name the muscles which do not contract as per our will.
Answer:
Involuntary muscles (smooth muscles and cardiac muscles)

Question 4.
Which type of muscles show rhythmic contractions?
Answer:
Cardiac muscles

Question 5.
Which type of muscle is present in the diaphragm of the respiratory system?
Answer:
Skeletal muscle

Question 6.
State the functions of:

  1. Smooth muscles
  2. Cardiac muscles
  3. Striated muscles

Answer:

  1. Smooth muscles: They bring about involuntary movements like peristalsis in the alimentary canal, constriction and dilation of blood vessels.
  2. Cardiac muscles: They bring about contraction and relaxation of the heart.
  3. Striated muscles: They control voluntary movements of limbs, head, trunk, eyes, etc.

Question 7.
What is locomotion?
Answer:
The change in locus of whole body of living organism from one place to another place is called locomotion.

Question 8.
State the four basic types of locomotory movements seen in animals.
Answer:
The four basic types locomotory movements seen in animals are:

  1. Amoeboid movement: It is performed by pseudopodia, e.g. leucocytes.
  2. Ciliary movement: It is performed by cilia, e.g. ciliated epithelium. In Paramoecium, cilia help in passage of food through cytopharynx.
  3. Whirling movement: It is performed by flagella, e.g. sperms.
  4. Muscular movement: It is performed by muscles, with the help of bones and joints.

Question 9.
All locomotions are movements but all movements are not locomotion. Justify
Answer:
Locomotion occurs when body changes its position, however all movements may not result in locomotion. Thus, all locomotions are movements but all movements are not locomotion.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 10.
Kriti was diagnosed with knee tendon injury. She asked the doctor whether she will be able to walk due to the injury? If not then state the reason.
Answer:
Knee tendon injury affects the ability to walk. Kriti may not be able to walk freely as the tendons attached to the bones help in the movement of the parts of skeleton.

Question 11.
Explain the types of straited muscles.
Answer:
On the basis of movements striated muscles are of three types:

  1. Agonists: These are considered as the prime movers. They bring about the initial movement of a part.
    e.g. biceps
  2. Antagonists: They bring about the action opposite to that of prime movers. e.g. Triceps.
  3. Svnergists They assist the prime movers. e.g. Brachialis assist biceps.

Question 12.
Describe the antagonistic muscles in detail.
Answer:
Following are the important antagonistic muscles:

  1. Flexor and extensor: Flexor muscle on contraction results into bending or flexion of joint. e.g. Biceps. Extensor muscle on contraction results in straightening or extension of a joint. e.g. Triceps.
  2. Abductor and adductor: Abductor muscle moves a body part away from the body axis. e.g. Deltoid muscle of shoulder moves the arm away from the body. Adductor muscle moves a body part towards the body axis.
    e.g. L.atissirnus dorsi of shoulder moves the arm near the body.
  3. Pronator and supinator: Pronator turns the palm downwards and supinator turns the palm upward.
  4. Levator and depressor: Levator raises a body part and the depressors lower the body part.
  5. Protractor and retractor: Protractor moves forward, whereas the retractor moves backward.
  6. Sphincters: Circular muscles present in the inner walls of anus, stomach. etc., for closure and opening.

Question 13.
Describe the structure of myosin and actin filaments, with the help of neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
i. Myosin filament:

  1. Each myosin filament is a polymerized protein. Many meromyosins (monomeric proteins) constitute one thick filament.
  2. Myosin molecule consists of two heavy chains (heavy meromyosin / HMM) coiled around each other forming a double helix. One end of each of these chains is projected outwardly is known as cross bridge. This end folds to form a globular protein mass called myosin head.
  3. Two light chains are associated with each head forming 4 light chains/light meromyosin / LMM.
  4. Myosin head has a special ATPase activity. It can split ATP to produce energy.
  5. Myosin contributes 55% of muscle proteins.
  6. In sarcomere, myosin tails are arranged to point towards the centre of the sarcomere and the heads point to the sides of the myofilament band.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 1

ii. Actin filament: It is a complex type of contractile protein. It is made up of three components:

  1. F actin: It forms the backbone of actin filament. F actin is made up of two helical strands. Each strand is composed of polymerized G actin molecules. One ADP molecule is attached to G actin molecule.
  2. Tropomyosin: The actin filament contains two additional protein strands that are polymers of tropomyosin molecules. Each strand is loosely attached to an F actin. In the resting stage, tropomyosin physically covers the active myosin-binding site of the actin strand.
  3. Troponin: It is a complex of three globular proteins, is attached approx. 2/3rd distance along each tropomyosin molecule. It has affinity for actin, tropomyosin and calcium ions. The troponin complex is believed to attach the tropomyosin to the actin. The strong affinity of troponin for calcium ions is believed to initiate the contraction process.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 2

Question 14.
A muscle can only pull and not push the bone. Why?
Answer:
The fundamental characteristic of the muscle is contraction. Therefore, muscle can only pull and not push the bone.

Question 15.
Explain the physiology of muscle contraction.
Answer:
When the muscles are relaxed, the active sites remain covered with tropomyosin and troponin complex. Due to this, myosin cannot interact with active site of actin and thus contraction cannot occur.

  1. When an impulse (action potential) comes to muscle through motor end plate, it spreads throughout the sarcolemma of the myofibril.
  2. The transverse tubules of sarcoplasmic reticulum release large number of Ca++ ions into sarcoplasm. These calcium ions interact with the troponin molecules and the interaction inactivates troponin-tropomyosin complex. This causes change in the structure of tropomyosin.
  3. As a result, tropomyosin gets detached from the active site of actin (F actin) filament, exposing the active site for actin.
  4. The myosin head cleaves the ATP to derive energy and gets attached to the uncovered active site of actin. This results into the formation of acto-myosin complex.
  5. The myosin heads are now tilted backwards and pull the attached actin filament inwardly. This results in contraction of the muscle fibres.

Question 16.
Why do we shiver during winter?
Answer:

  1. Humans are homeotherms as they can regulate their body temperature with respect to the surrounding temperature. During winter, when temperature falls, the thermoreceptors detect the change in temperature and send signals to the brain.
  2. Shivering reflex i.e. rapid contraction of muscles is triggered by the brain to generate heat and raise the body temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 17.
Write a short note on role of calcium ions in contraction and relaxation of muscles.
Answer:
Calcium ions play a major role in contraction and relaxation of muscles.

  1. Calcium ions are released from the sarcoplasm during muscle contraction and stored in sarcoplasmic reticulum during muscle relaxation.
  2. When a skeletal muscle is excited and an action potential travels along the T tubule, the concentration of calcium ions increases.
  3. These calcium ions bind to troponin which in turn undergoes a conformational change that causes tropomyosin to move away from the myosin-binding sites on actin. Once these binding sites are free, myosin heads bind to them to form cross-bridges and the muscle fiber contracts.
  4. The decrease in calcium ion concentration in the sarcoplasmic reticulum causes tropomyosin to slide back and block the myosin binding sites on actin. This causes the muscle to relax.

[Note: Students can scan the adjacent Q.R code to get conceptual clarity with the aid of a relevant video.]

Question 18.
Muscle contraction and relaxation are active processes. Give reason.
Answer:
Muscle contraction and relaxation are active processes as during both the processes energy is utilized by hydrolysis of ATP into ADP and inorganic phosphate by the enzyme ATPase.

Question 19.
Describe the properties of muscles observed on electrical stimulation.
Answer:
Properties of muscles observed on electrical excitation:

  1. Single muscle twitch: It is a muscle contraction initiated by a single brief-stimulation. It occurs in 3 stages: a latent period of no contraction, a contraction period and a relaxation period.
  2. Summation: If the muscle is stimulated before the end of the twitch, it generates greater tension i.e., summation or addition of effect takes place. Repeated stimuli will produce increasing strength of contraction (stair case phenomenon).
  3. Tetanus: If stimulation is very rapid and frequent the muscle does not have time to relax. It remains in a
    state of contraction called tetanus.
  4. Rcfraètory period: Immediately aller one stimulus, the muscle fibre cannot respond to another stimulus. This resting or refractory period is about 0.02 seconds.
  5. Threshold stimulus: For a muscle fibre to contract, a certain minimum strength or intensity of stimulus is required. This is called threshold stimulus.
  6. All or none principie: A stimulus below threshold will not result in contraction. A threshold stimulus will result in contraction. This contraction leads to maximum force. Higher stimulus will not increase force of contraction i.e. a muscle libre contracts either ftilly or not at all. This is ‘all or none’ principle. All types of muscle and nerve fibres obey this law.
  7. Oxygen debt: During strenuous exercise, the oxygen supply of muscle rapidly becomes insufficient to maintain oxidative phosphorylation of respiratory substrate. At this stage, muscles contract anaerobically and accumulate lactic acid produced by anaerobic glycolysis. Lactic acid produces less AlP and is toxic. It causes tiredness, pain and muscle cramps. During recovery, oxygen consumption of the muscle far exceeds than that in the resting state. This extra oxygen consumed during recovery is called oxygen debt of the muscle.

Note: The duration of refractory period varies with the muscle involved. Cardiac muscles have a longer refractory period of about 250 msec whereas skeletal muscles have a short refractory period of about I msec]

Question 20.
What is difference between endoskeleton and exoskeleton?
Answer:
The supportive structures present inside the body form the endoskeleton and when the supportive structures are present on the outer surface of the body they form exoskeleton.

Question 21.
Name the tissues that form the structural framework of the body.
Answer:
Cartilage and bone

Question 22.
What type of bones are present in our body?
Answer:
Long bones, short bones, flat bones, irregular bones and sesamoid bones.

Question 23.
How do bones help in various ways?
Answer:

  1. Bones form the framework of our body and thus provide shape to the body.
  2. They protect vital organs thus help in the smooth functioning of body.
  3. The joints between the bones help in movement and locomotion.
  4. They provide firm surface for attachment of muscles.
  5. They are reservoirs of calcium and form important site for hemopoiesis.

Question 24.
Explain the three types of lever found in human body.
Answer:
The three types of lever are as follows:

  1. Class I lever: The joint between the first vertebra and occipital condyle of skull is an example of Class I lever. The force is directed towards the joints (fulcrum); contraction of back muscle provides force while the part of head that is raised acts as resistance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 3
  2. Class II lever: Human body raised on toes is an example of Class II lever. Toe acts as fulcrum, contracting calf muscles provide the force while raised body acts as resistance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 4
  3. Class III lever: Flexion of forearm at elbow exhibit lever of class III. Elbow joint acts as fulcrum and radius, ulna provides resistance. Contracting bicep muscles provides force for the movement.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 5

Question 25.
Give an account of bones of human skull.
Answer:
Skull is made up of 22 bones. It is located at the superior end of vertebral column. The bones of skull are
joined by fixed or immovable joints except for jaw.
Skull consists of cranium or brain box and facial bones.

i. Cranium: It is made up of four median bones and two paired bones.

  1. Frontal bone: It is median bone (unpaired) forming forehead, roof of orbit (eye socket) and the most anterior part of cranium. It is connected to two parietals, sphenoid and ethmoid bone.
  2. Parietal bones: These paired bones form the roof of cranium and greater portion of sides of the cranium.
  3. Temporal bones: These paired bones are situated laterally just above the ear on either side. Each temporal bone gives out zygomatic process that joins zygomatic bone to form zygomatic arch. Just at the base of zygomatic process is mandibular fossa, a depression for mandibles (lower jaw bone) that forms the only movable joint of the skull. This bone harbors the ear canal that directs sound waves into the ear. The processes of temporal bones provide points for attachment for various muscles of neck and tongue.
  4. Occipital bone: It is a single bone present at the back of the head. It forms the posterior part and most of the base of cranium. The inferior part of this bone shows foramen magnum, the opening through which medulla oblongata connects with spinal cord. On the either sides of foramen magnum are two prominent protuberances called occipital condyles. These fit into the corresponding depressions present in 1st vertebra.
  5. Sphenoid bone: Median bone present at the base of the skull that articulates with all other cranial bones and holds them together. This butterfly shaped bone has a saddle shaped region called sella turcica. In this hypophyseal fossa, the pituitary gland is lodged.
  6. Ethmoid bone: This median bone is spongy in appearance. It is located anterior to sphenoid and posterior to nasal bones. It contributes to formation of nasal septum and is major supporting structure of nasal cavity.

ii. Facial Bones: Fourteen facial bones give a characteristic shape to the face. The growth of face stops of the age of 16.
Following bones comprise the facial bones:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 6

  1. Nasals: These are paired bones that form the bridge of nose.
  2. Maxillae: These form the upper jaw bones. They are paired bones that join with all facial bones except mandible. Upper row of teeth are lodged maxillae.
  3. Palatines: These are paired bones forming the roof of buccal cavity or floor of the nasal cavity.
  4. Zygomatic bones: They are commonly called as cheek bones.
  5. Lacrimal bones: These are the smallest amongst the facial bones.
    These bones form the medial wall of each orbit. They have lacrimal fossa that houses lacrimal sacs. These sacs gather tears and send them to nasal cavity.
  6. Inferior nasal conchae: They form the part of lateral wall of nasal cavity. They help to swirl and filter air before it passes to lungs.
  7. Vomer: The median, roughly triangular bone that forms the inferior portion of nasal septum.
  8. Mandible: This median bone forms the lower jaw. It is the largest and strongest facial bone. It is the only movable bone of skull. It has curved horizontal body and two perpendicular branches i.e. rami. These help in attachment of muscles. It has lower row of teeth lodged in it.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 26.
Give an account of hyoid bone.
Answer:

  1. It is a ‘U’ shaped bone that does not articulate with any other bone.
  2. It is suspended from temporal bone by ligaments and muscles.
  3. It is located between mandible and larynx.
  4. It has horizontal body and paired projections called horns.
  5. It provides site for attachment of some tongue muscles and muscles of neck and pharynx.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 7

Question 27.
Sketch and label the anterior and ‘entraI view of skull.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 8
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 9

Question 28.
Mention the sutures in skull along with their location.
Answer:
Skull has many sutures (type of immovable joints) present, out of which four prominent ones are:

  1. Coronal suture; Joins frontal bone with parietals.
  2. Sagittal suture: Joins two parietal bones.
  3. Lambdiodal suture: Joins two parietal bones with occipital bone.
  4. Lateral/squamous sutures: Joins parietal and temporal bones on lateral side.

Question 29.
What are ear ossicles?
Answer:
The three tiny bones present in each middle ear namely malleus, incus and stapes, together are called ‘ear ossicles’

Question 30.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram of ear ossicles.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 10

Question 31.
Write a note on human vertebral column. Sketch and label the structure of the vertebral column.
Answer:

  1. Human vertebral column or backbone is a part of axial skeleton.
  2. It is made up of a chain of irregular bones called vertebrae.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 11
  3. Humans have 33 vertebrae in early years of growth, whereas adults have 26 vertebrae.
  4. In adults, five sacral vertebrae lìjse to tòrm one sacrum and four coccygeal vertebrae fuse to form single coccyx.

Question 32.
Explain the cervical vertebrae in detail.
Answer:

  1. Atlas vertebrae:
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 12
  2. It is the 1st cervical vertebra.
  3. It is a ring like bone and consists of anterior and posterior arches.
  4. It does not have centrum and spinous process.
  5. The transverse processes and transverse foramina of atlas are large.
  6. The vertebral foramen is large and divided into two parts by transverse ligament.
  7. Spinal cord passes through anterior compartment.
  8. Anterior zygopophyses are replaced by facets for attachment with occipital condyle of skull that forms ‘Yes joint’.

ii. Axis vertebrae:

  1. It is the 2nd cervical vertebrae.
  2. The centrum of this vertebra gives out tooth-like odontoid process.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 13
  3. Odontoid process fits into the anterior portion of vertebral foramen of atlas vertebra thereby forming pivot joint, also known as ‘No joint’.

iii. Typical cervical vertebrae:

  1. Vertebrae number 3 to 6 are called as typical cervical vertebrae.
  2. They show short centrum and bifid spinous process.
  3. The transverse processes of these vertebrae are reduced; each having large vertebrarterial canal at its base for the passage of vertebral artery.

iv. 7th cervical vertebra (Vertebra prominens): It is the largest cervical vertebra where the neural spine is straight.

Question 33.
Write a note on thoracic vertebrae. Sketch and label thoracic vertebrae.
Answer:

  1. There are 12 thoracic vertebrae found in the chest region.
  2. The centrurn of thoracic vertebrae is heart shaped and all the processes are well developed.
  3. Except for 11th and 12th vertebrae; transverse process of other thoracic vertebrae show facets for attachment with ribs.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 14

Question 34.
Elaborate on lumbar vertebrae with help of a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 15

  1. There are 5 lumbar vertebrae.
  2. They are well developed vertebrae and exhibit all the characters of a typical vertebrae.
  3. The centrum of the lumbar vertebrae is kidney shaped.

Question 35.
Give an account on:
i. Sacrum
ii. Coccyx
Answer:
i. Sacrum:

  1. It is a triangular bone formed by the fusion of five sacral vertebrae.
  2. It is located in pelvic cavity between two hip bones.
  3. The anterior end of sacrum is broad and posterior end is narrow.
  4. It consists of vertebral foramina formed by the fusion of vertebrae.
  5. The reduced neural spines can be observed projecting from dorsal aspect of sacrum.
  6. Function: It gives strength to pelvic girdle,

ii. Coccyx:

  1. It is a triangular bone which is formed by fusion of four coccygeal vertebrae.
  2. It is reduced and does not show vertebral foramina and spinous processes.
  3. The transverse processes of coccygeal vertebrae are reduced.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 36.
Identify the given vertebrae and label it.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 16
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 17

Question 37.
Describe in brief the structure of thoracic cage.
Answer:
Thoracic cage consists of 12 pairs of ribs, breast bone or sternum.

i. Ribs:

  1. A rib is a ‘C’ shaped bone. It is attached to respective thoracic vertebrae on dorsal side.
  2. Twelve pairs of ribs are attached to twelve thoracic vertebrae. For attachment to the vertebrae the posterior ends of ribs have two protuberances namely the head and tubercle.
  3. The head of rib attaches to facet formed by demifacets of adjacent thoracic vertebrae at the base of transverse processes.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 18
  4. The tip of transverse processes of these vertebrae also have facets for attachment of ribs where tubercles of ribs are attached.
  5. Ribs provide space for attachment of intercostal muscles.
  6. On ventral side, the ribs may or may not attach the sternum. Depending on their attachment, the ribs are classified into three types:
    1. True ribs: First seven pairs of ribs are attached directly to the sternum by means of their costal cartilages.
    2. False ribs: Costal cartilages of rib numbers 8, 9 and 10 are attached to rib number 7 on either side and not directly to the sternum. Hence, these are called false ribs.
    3. Floating ribs: Last two pairs of ribs have no ventral connection. Hence, they are called floating ribs.

ii. Sternum:

  1. It is a flat, narrow bone, around 15 cms in length.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 19
  2. It is placed medially in anterior thoracic ] jugular notch wall (chest region).
  3. It consists of three distinct parts – manubrium, body and xiphoid processes.
  4. Manubrium shows two notches on anterio-lateral side for attachment with clavicle of each side. It also shows two notches on each of the lateral side for attachment of first two pairs of ribs.
  5. Body of sternum is a flat bone that shows five notches on lateral aspect which are meant for direct or indirect attachment of ribs.
  6. Xiphoid process is lowermost part of sternum which is initially cartilaginous and gets ossified in adults. It provides space for the attachment of diaphragm and abdominal muscles.
  7. Ribs are attached to sternum by means of cartilaginous extensions called costal cartilages.

Question 38.
What is intercostal space?
Answer:
The space between the ribs is called as intercostal space.

Question 39.
Describe the bones of pectoral girdle.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 20
Pectoral girdle is called as shoulder girdle. It attaches forelimb skeleton with axial skeleton. There are two pectoral girdles, each consists of a shoulder blade or scapula and collar bone or clavicle.

i. Clavicle:

  1. It is a ‘S’ shaped slender bone.
  2. One end of clavicle is attached to acromion process of scapula. The other rounded end called sternal end attaches to manubrium of sternum.
  3. This connects upper arm skeleton to axial skeleton.

ii. Scapula:

  1. It is a large, flat, triangular bone that occupies posterior chest wall extending from 2nd to 7th ribs.
  2. It is attached to axial skeleton by muscles and tendons.
  3. Scapula bears a concave socket called glenoid cavity at its lateral angle.
  4. Head of humerus (the upper arm bone) fits into the glenoid cavity.
  5. A beak like coracoid process projects from lateral angle of scapula and acromion process arise from scapula. They can be easily felt as high point of shoulder. Both the processes are meant for attachment of muscles.

Question 40.
Describe the bones of forelimb.
Answer:
Forelimb consists of humerus, radius and ulna (together forming forearm bones), carpals (bones of wrist), metacarpals (bones of palm) and phalanges (bones of digits). It consists of 30 bones.

i. Humerus:

  1. This is the bone of upper arm.
  2. It has a hemispherical head at its proximal end. On either side of head of humerus are present a pair of projections termed greater and lesser tubercles.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 21
  3. Bicipital groove is a deep groove present between the tubercles where a tendon of biceps muscle is attached.
  4. The shaft of humerus shows deltoid tuberosity. Distal end of humerus shows pulley like part called trochlea that articulates with ulna.

ii. Radius and Ulna:

  1. Radius is located laterally on thumb side of the forearm.
  2. The proximal end of radius has disc like head that articulates with humerus bone.
  3. The shaft of radius widens distally to form styloid process.
  4. Ulna is located medially on little finger side of forearm.
  5. At the proximal end of ulna there is a prominent process called Olecranon process that forms elbow joint with humerus bone. On the lateral side, near the upper end of ulna is present the radial notch into which the side of head of radius is fixed.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 22
    f. Radius and ulna articulate with each other at upper and lower extremities by superior and inferior radio-ulnar joints. In between the shaft of two bones, interosseous membrane is present.

iii. Carpals: These are bones of wrist, arranged in two rows of four each.

iv. Metacarpals: Five elongated metacarpals form the bones of palm. Their proximal ends join with carpals and distal ends form knuckles.

v. Phalanges: Phalanges form the bones of fingers and thumb. There are 14 phalanges in each hand (Four fingers have three phalanges each and thumb has two).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 23

Question 41.
Explain briefly the pelvic girdle with a neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. Pelvic girdle also known as hip girdle connects hind limb skeleton with axial skeleton.
  2. It is made up of two hip bones called coxal bones. These coxal bones unite posteriorly with sacrum.
  3. Coxal bone is a large irregularly shaped bone is made up of three parts – ilium, ischium and pubis.
  4. At the point of fusion of ilium, ischium and pubis, a cavity called acetabulum is present that forms ball and socket joint with the thigh bone.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 24
  5. The two pubis bones are joined medially by cartilaginous joint called pubic symphysis. Pubis and ischium together form a ring of bone that encloses a space called obturator foramen.

Question 42.
Describe the bones of lower limb.
Answer:
The bones of lower limb are femur, patella, tibia and fibula, tarsals, metatarsals and phalanges.

i. Femur: The thigh bone is the longest bone in the body. The head is joined to shaft at an angle by a short neck. It forms ball and socket joint with acetabulum cavity of coxal bone. The lower one third region of shaft is triangular flattened area called popliteal surface. Distal end has two condyles that articulate with tibia and fibula.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 25

ii. Patella: It is also called as knee cap. ft is a sesamoid bone (bone embedded in tendon). It is a flat rounded bone with a pointed lower end.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 26

iii. Tibia and fibula: These are the two long bones of shank or lower leg. The two bones are connected to each other at the extremities. In between the two bones interosseous membrane is present.

  1. Tibia: It is much thicker and stronger than fibula. Its broad and expanded upper end articulates with femur and the lower end articulates with talus (tarsal bone).
  2. Fibula: It is a long slender bone on lateral side of tibia.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 27

iv. Tarsals: These are the bones of ankle. Seven tarsals are arranged in three rows, two proximal, one intermediate and four distal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 28

v. Metatarsals: Five metatarsal bones support the foot. Proximally they attach with distal row of tarsals and distally the metatarsals articulate with phalanges.

vi. Phalanges: These are the bones of the toes. Except the big toe which has two phalanges, the other four toes have three phalanges each.

Question 43.
What is arthrology?
Answer:
The study of joints is called arthrology.

Question 44.
What makes synovial joint freely movable?
Answer:
Synovial joint is characterised by synovial cavity between the articulating bones which allows free movement at the joint. This makes the joint freely movable.

Question 45.
Complete the given table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 29
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 30

Question 46.
State and explain the disorders related to muscles.
Answer:
i. Muscular dystrophy:

  1. It is a gradual wasting disease affecting various groups of muscles.
  2. It is a genetic disorder.
  3. Usually the voluntary skeletal muscles are weakened whereas internal muscles such as diaphragm are not affected in the patient suffering from this disorder.
  4. The Duchenne type of muscular dystrophy usually occurs in boys, affecting their lower limbs.
  5. Limb girdle muscular dystrophy affects the muscles of shoulders or hips and it usually starts in adults between 20 – 30 years.
  6. There is no cure for this disease.

ii. Myasthenia gravis:

  1. It is a weakness of skeletal muscles.
  2. It is caused by an abnormality at the neuromuscular junction that partially blocks muscle contraction.
  3. It is an autoimmune disorder caused by excessive production of certain antibodies in the blood stream. These antibodies bind to acetylcholine receptors of neuromuscular junction. Thus, the transmission of nerve impulses to the muscle fibres is blocked. This causes progressive and extensive muscle weakness.
  4. It may affect the eye and eyelid movements, facial expression and swallowing.
  5. The degree of muscle weakness varies from local to general.
  6. Symptoms: Ptosis (drooping or falling of upper eye lid), diplopia or double vision, difficulty in swallowing, chewing and speech.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 47.
Give an account on disorders related to bones.
Answer:

  1. Arthritis: It is an inflammation of joints. It is a painful disorder of bones, ligaments, tendons, etc. In this disorder, joints become swollen, stiff and painful. It can lead to disability.
  2. Arthritis is of three types:
    1. Osteoarthritis: In this disorder, the joint cartilage is degenerated. It is caused by various factors like aging, obesity, muscle weakness, etc. This is the most common type of arthritis that affects hands, knees and spine.
    2. Gouty arthritis (Gout): In this disorder, joint pain occurs due to the deposition of uric acid in joints. If uric acid is produced in excess or is not excreted, it accumulates in joints as sodium urate. The accumulated sodium urate degenerates the cartilage causing inflammation and pain. It generally affects the joints of feet.
    3. Rheumotoid arthritis: It is an autoimmune disorder where body’s immune system attacks its own tissues. In rheumatoid arthritis, synovial membrane swells up and starts secreting extra synovial fluid. This fluid exerts pressure on joint and makes it painful. Membrane may develop abnormal granulation tissue called pannus. Pannus may erode cartilage. Fibrous tissue gets ossified and may lead to stiffness in joints.
  3. Osteoporosis:
    1. In this disorder, bones become porous and hence brittle. It is primarily age related disease and is more common in women than men.
    2. As age advances, bone resorption outpaces bone formation. Hence, the bones lose mass and become brittle. More calcium is lost in urine, sweat, etc., than it is gained through diet. Thus, prevention of disease is better than treatment by consuming adequate amount of calcium and exercise at young age.
    3. Osteoporosis may be caused due to decreasing estrogen secretion after menopause, deficiency of vitamin D, low calcium diet, decreased secretion of sex hormones and thyrocalcitonin.

Question 48.
Name the following.

Question 1.
The striated muscles that are known as prime movers
Answer:
Agonists

Question 2.
The antagonistic muscles that lower the body part
Answer:
Depressor

Question 3.
The contractile proteins of sarcomere
Answer:
Actin and myosin

Question 4.
Sliding filament theory is also known as
Answer:
Walk along theory or Rachet theory

Question 5.
The smallest facial bone
Answer:
Lacrimal bones

Question 6.
Number of bones in thoracic cage
Answer:
25

Question 7.
The first cervical vertebrae
Answer:
Atlas

Question 8.
The three bones of pelvic girdle
Answer:
Ilium, ischium and pubis

Question 9.
The bone which is known as the knee cap
Answer:
Patella

Question 10.
Age related disorder more common in woman than man.
Answer:
Osteoporosis

Question 49.
Fill in the blanks.

Question 1.
The actin filament contains two additional proteins strands that are polymers of ___ molecules.
Answer:
tropomyosin

Question 2.
___ of sarcoplasmic reticulum release large number of Ca++ into sarcoplasm.
Answer:
Transverse (T) tubules

Question 3.
The joint between the first vertebra and occipital condyle of skull is an example of ____ class of lever.
Answer:
Class I

Question 4.
Endoskeleton of an adult human consists of ___ bones.
Answer:
206

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 5.
___ are the bones that connect limbs to the axial skeleton.
Answer:
Girdles

Question 6.
___ bones form the roof of cranium.
Answer:
Parietal

Question 7.
Zveomatic bone is commonly known as ___ bone.
Answer:
Cheek

Question 8.
The largest and strongest facial bone is ___
Answer:
Mandible

Question 9.
There are ___ types of vertebrae.
Answer:
5

Question 10.
___ is also known as shoulder girdle.
Answer:
Pectoral girdle

Question 11.
___ are the bones of wrist.
Answer:
Carpals

Question 12.
___ is known as immovable or fixed joint.
Answer:
Synarthroses

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 13.
Tibia and fibula are two long bones of ___.
Answer:
Shank or lower leg

Question 14.
___ is caused due to deposition of uric acid in joints.
Answer:
Gouty arthritis

Question 50.
State whether the following statements are True or False:

Question 1.
Saggital suture joins frontal bone with parietal bone.
Answer:
False. Saggital suture joins two parietal bones.

Question 2.
In human beings, there are 10 pairs of ribs.
Answer:
False. In human beings, there are 12 pairs of ribs.

Question 3.
Hyoid bone does not articulate with any other bone.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Pivot joint is present between Atlas and Axis vertebrae.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
The two pubis bones are joined by cartilaginous joint called pubic symphysis.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
Rheumatoid arthritis is an autoimmune disorder.
Answer:
True

Question 50.
Identify the INCORRECTLY labelled part of pectoral girdle.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement 31
Answer:
Glenoid cavity is incorrectly labelled as obturator foramen.

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Locomotion in sperms takes place with the help of
(A) flagella
(B) cilia
(C) pseudopodia
(D) muscles
Answer:
(A) flagella

Question 2.
Levator muscles result into the action of
(A) lowering a body part
(B) tensing a body part
(C) relaxing a body part
(D) raising a body part
Answer:
(D) raising a body part

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Biology Important Questions Chapter 16 Skeleton and Movement

Question 3.
Which of these is not a skull bone?
(A) Frontal
(B) Scapula
(C) Occipital
(D) Temporal
Answer:
(B) Scapula

Question 4.
Immovable joint is in between the bones of
(A) frontal and parietal
(B) metacarpal and phalangeal
(C) femur and tibia
(D) radius and ulna
Answer:
(A) frontal and parietal

Question 5.
Total number of vertebrae in human beings is
(A) 22
(B) 33
(C) 24
(D) 12
Answer:
(B) 33

Question 6.
Which of the following is NOT a part of appendicular skeleton?
(A) Girdles
(B) Forelimb
(C) Hindlimb
(D) Vertebral column
Answer:
(D) Vertebral column

Question 7.
___ connects the upper arm to the axial skeleton.
(A) Clavicle
(B) Patella
(C) Tibia
(D) Femur
Answer:
(A) Clavicle

Question 8.
__ is a part of hind limb.
(A) Radius
(B) Ulna
(C) Humers
(D) Fibula
Answer:
(D) Fibula

Question 9.
Which of the following are toe bones?
(A) Tarsals
(B) Metatarsals
(C) Carpals
(D) Phalanges
Answer:
(D) Phalanges

Question 10.
Sutures on the skull are ___ joints.
(A) freely movable
(B) slightly movable
(C) fixed
(D) synovial
Answer:
(C) fixed

Question 11.
___ is an example of syndesmoses.
(A) Distal tibiofibular joint
(B) Rib-sternum junction
(C) Tooth and jaw bones
(D) Intervertebral disc
Answer:
(A) Distal tibiofibular joint

Question 12.
Elbow joint is
(A) ball and socket joint
(B) hinge joint
(C) suture joint
(D) gliding joint
Answer:
(B) hinge joint

Question 13.
Complete the analogy.
Hinge joint: Monoaxial movement:: ___ Biaxial movement
(A) Ball and socket joint
(B) Gliding joint
(C) Condyloid joint
(D) Both (A) and (B)
Answer:
(C) Condyloid joint

Question 14.
An autoimmune disorder in which an antibody reduces the efficiency of transmission between the motor neuron is called
(A) Myasthenia gravis
(B) Tetany
(C) Osteoarthritis
(D) Osteoporosis
Answer:
(A) Myasthenia gravis